File: | src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libclangCodeGen/../../../llvm/clang/lib/CodeGen/CGBlocks.cpp |
Warning: | line 555, column 45 Access to field 'CurFuncDecl' results in a dereference of a null pointer (loaded from variable 'CGF') |
Press '?' to see keyboard shortcuts
Keyboard shortcuts:
1 | //===--- CGBlocks.cpp - Emit LLVM Code for declarations ---------*- C++ -*-===// | |||
2 | // | |||
3 | // Part of the LLVM Project, under the Apache License v2.0 with LLVM Exceptions. | |||
4 | // See https://llvm.org/LICENSE.txt for license information. | |||
5 | // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0 WITH LLVM-exception | |||
6 | // | |||
7 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// | |||
8 | // | |||
9 | // This contains code to emit blocks. | |||
10 | // | |||
11 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// | |||
12 | ||||
13 | #include "CGBlocks.h" | |||
14 | #include "CGCXXABI.h" | |||
15 | #include "CGDebugInfo.h" | |||
16 | #include "CGObjCRuntime.h" | |||
17 | #include "CGOpenCLRuntime.h" | |||
18 | #include "CodeGenFunction.h" | |||
19 | #include "CodeGenModule.h" | |||
20 | #include "ConstantEmitter.h" | |||
21 | #include "TargetInfo.h" | |||
22 | #include "clang/AST/Attr.h" | |||
23 | #include "clang/AST/DeclObjC.h" | |||
24 | #include "clang/CodeGen/ConstantInitBuilder.h" | |||
25 | #include "llvm/ADT/SmallSet.h" | |||
26 | #include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h" | |||
27 | #include "llvm/IR/Module.h" | |||
28 | #include "llvm/Support/ScopedPrinter.h" | |||
29 | #include <algorithm> | |||
30 | #include <cstdio> | |||
31 | ||||
32 | using namespace clang; | |||
33 | using namespace CodeGen; | |||
34 | ||||
35 | CGBlockInfo::CGBlockInfo(const BlockDecl *block, StringRef name) | |||
36 | : Name(name), CXXThisIndex(0), CanBeGlobal(false), NeedsCopyDispose(false), | |||
37 | HasCXXObject(false), UsesStret(false), HasCapturedVariableLayout(false), | |||
38 | CapturesNonExternalType(false), LocalAddress(Address::invalid()), | |||
39 | StructureType(nullptr), Block(block) { | |||
40 | ||||
41 | // Skip asm prefix, if any. 'name' is usually taken directly from | |||
42 | // the mangled name of the enclosing function. | |||
43 | if (!name.empty() && name[0] == '\01') | |||
44 | name = name.substr(1); | |||
45 | } | |||
46 | ||||
47 | // Anchor the vtable to this translation unit. | |||
48 | BlockByrefHelpers::~BlockByrefHelpers() {} | |||
49 | ||||
50 | /// Build the given block as a global block. | |||
51 | static llvm::Constant *buildGlobalBlock(CodeGenModule &CGM, | |||
52 | const CGBlockInfo &blockInfo, | |||
53 | llvm::Constant *blockFn); | |||
54 | ||||
55 | /// Build the helper function to copy a block. | |||
56 | static llvm::Constant *buildCopyHelper(CodeGenModule &CGM, | |||
57 | const CGBlockInfo &blockInfo) { | |||
58 | return CodeGenFunction(CGM).GenerateCopyHelperFunction(blockInfo); | |||
59 | } | |||
60 | ||||
61 | /// Build the helper function to dispose of a block. | |||
62 | static llvm::Constant *buildDisposeHelper(CodeGenModule &CGM, | |||
63 | const CGBlockInfo &blockInfo) { | |||
64 | return CodeGenFunction(CGM).GenerateDestroyHelperFunction(blockInfo); | |||
65 | } | |||
66 | ||||
67 | namespace { | |||
68 | ||||
69 | /// Represents a type of copy/destroy operation that should be performed for an | |||
70 | /// entity that's captured by a block. | |||
71 | enum class BlockCaptureEntityKind { | |||
72 | CXXRecord, // Copy or destroy | |||
73 | ARCWeak, | |||
74 | ARCStrong, | |||
75 | NonTrivialCStruct, | |||
76 | BlockObject, // Assign or release | |||
77 | None | |||
78 | }; | |||
79 | ||||
80 | /// Represents a captured entity that requires extra operations in order for | |||
81 | /// this entity to be copied or destroyed correctly. | |||
82 | struct BlockCaptureManagedEntity { | |||
83 | BlockCaptureEntityKind CopyKind, DisposeKind; | |||
84 | BlockFieldFlags CopyFlags, DisposeFlags; | |||
85 | const BlockDecl::Capture *CI; | |||
86 | const CGBlockInfo::Capture *Capture; | |||
87 | ||||
88 | BlockCaptureManagedEntity(BlockCaptureEntityKind CopyType, | |||
89 | BlockCaptureEntityKind DisposeType, | |||
90 | BlockFieldFlags CopyFlags, | |||
91 | BlockFieldFlags DisposeFlags, | |||
92 | const BlockDecl::Capture &CI, | |||
93 | const CGBlockInfo::Capture &Capture) | |||
94 | : CopyKind(CopyType), DisposeKind(DisposeType), CopyFlags(CopyFlags), | |||
95 | DisposeFlags(DisposeFlags), CI(&CI), Capture(&Capture) {} | |||
96 | ||||
97 | bool operator<(const BlockCaptureManagedEntity &Other) const { | |||
98 | return Capture->getOffset() < Other.Capture->getOffset(); | |||
99 | } | |||
100 | }; | |||
101 | ||||
102 | enum class CaptureStrKind { | |||
103 | // String for the copy helper. | |||
104 | CopyHelper, | |||
105 | // String for the dispose helper. | |||
106 | DisposeHelper, | |||
107 | // Merge the strings for the copy helper and dispose helper. | |||
108 | Merged | |||
109 | }; | |||
110 | ||||
111 | } // end anonymous namespace | |||
112 | ||||
113 | static void findBlockCapturedManagedEntities( | |||
114 | const CGBlockInfo &BlockInfo, const LangOptions &LangOpts, | |||
115 | SmallVectorImpl<BlockCaptureManagedEntity> &ManagedCaptures); | |||
116 | ||||
117 | static std::string getBlockCaptureStr(const BlockCaptureManagedEntity &E, | |||
118 | CaptureStrKind StrKind, | |||
119 | CharUnits BlockAlignment, | |||
120 | CodeGenModule &CGM); | |||
121 | ||||
122 | static std::string getBlockDescriptorName(const CGBlockInfo &BlockInfo, | |||
123 | CodeGenModule &CGM) { | |||
124 | std::string Name = "__block_descriptor_"; | |||
125 | Name += llvm::to_string(BlockInfo.BlockSize.getQuantity()) + "_"; | |||
126 | ||||
127 | if (BlockInfo.needsCopyDisposeHelpers()) { | |||
128 | if (CGM.getLangOpts().Exceptions) | |||
129 | Name += "e"; | |||
130 | if (CGM.getCodeGenOpts().ObjCAutoRefCountExceptions) | |||
131 | Name += "a"; | |||
132 | Name += llvm::to_string(BlockInfo.BlockAlign.getQuantity()) + "_"; | |||
133 | ||||
134 | SmallVector<BlockCaptureManagedEntity, 4> ManagedCaptures; | |||
135 | findBlockCapturedManagedEntities(BlockInfo, CGM.getContext().getLangOpts(), | |||
136 | ManagedCaptures); | |||
137 | ||||
138 | for (const BlockCaptureManagedEntity &E : ManagedCaptures) { | |||
139 | Name += llvm::to_string(E.Capture->getOffset().getQuantity()); | |||
140 | ||||
141 | if (E.CopyKind == E.DisposeKind) { | |||
142 | // If CopyKind and DisposeKind are the same, merge the capture | |||
143 | // information. | |||
144 | assert(E.CopyKind != BlockCaptureEntityKind::None &&((void)0) | |||
145 | "shouldn't see BlockCaptureManagedEntity that is None")((void)0); | |||
146 | Name += getBlockCaptureStr(E, CaptureStrKind::Merged, | |||
147 | BlockInfo.BlockAlign, CGM); | |||
148 | } else { | |||
149 | // If CopyKind and DisposeKind are not the same, which can happen when | |||
150 | // either Kind is None or the captured object is a __strong block, | |||
151 | // concatenate the copy and dispose strings. | |||
152 | Name += getBlockCaptureStr(E, CaptureStrKind::CopyHelper, | |||
153 | BlockInfo.BlockAlign, CGM); | |||
154 | Name += getBlockCaptureStr(E, CaptureStrKind::DisposeHelper, | |||
155 | BlockInfo.BlockAlign, CGM); | |||
156 | } | |||
157 | } | |||
158 | Name += "_"; | |||
159 | } | |||
160 | ||||
161 | std::string TypeAtEncoding = | |||
162 | CGM.getContext().getObjCEncodingForBlock(BlockInfo.getBlockExpr()); | |||
163 | /// Replace occurrences of '@' with '\1'. '@' is reserved on ELF platforms as | |||
164 | /// a separator between symbol name and symbol version. | |||
165 | std::replace(TypeAtEncoding.begin(), TypeAtEncoding.end(), '@', '\1'); | |||
166 | Name += "e" + llvm::to_string(TypeAtEncoding.size()) + "_" + TypeAtEncoding; | |||
167 | Name += "l" + CGM.getObjCRuntime().getRCBlockLayoutStr(CGM, BlockInfo); | |||
168 | return Name; | |||
169 | } | |||
170 | ||||
171 | /// buildBlockDescriptor - Build the block descriptor meta-data for a block. | |||
172 | /// buildBlockDescriptor is accessed from 5th field of the Block_literal | |||
173 | /// meta-data and contains stationary information about the block literal. | |||
174 | /// Its definition will have 4 (or optionally 6) words. | |||
175 | /// \code | |||
176 | /// struct Block_descriptor { | |||
177 | /// unsigned long reserved; | |||
178 | /// unsigned long size; // size of Block_literal metadata in bytes. | |||
179 | /// void *copy_func_helper_decl; // optional copy helper. | |||
180 | /// void *destroy_func_decl; // optional destructor helper. | |||
181 | /// void *block_method_encoding_address; // @encode for block literal signature. | |||
182 | /// void *block_layout_info; // encoding of captured block variables. | |||
183 | /// }; | |||
184 | /// \endcode | |||
185 | static llvm::Constant *buildBlockDescriptor(CodeGenModule &CGM, | |||
186 | const CGBlockInfo &blockInfo) { | |||
187 | ASTContext &C = CGM.getContext(); | |||
188 | ||||
189 | llvm::IntegerType *ulong = | |||
190 | cast<llvm::IntegerType>(CGM.getTypes().ConvertType(C.UnsignedLongTy)); | |||
191 | llvm::PointerType *i8p = nullptr; | |||
192 | if (CGM.getLangOpts().OpenCL) | |||
193 | i8p = | |||
194 | llvm::Type::getInt8PtrTy( | |||
195 | CGM.getLLVMContext(), C.getTargetAddressSpace(LangAS::opencl_constant)); | |||
196 | else | |||
197 | i8p = CGM.VoidPtrTy; | |||
198 | ||||
199 | std::string descName; | |||
200 | ||||
201 | // If an equivalent block descriptor global variable exists, return it. | |||
202 | if (C.getLangOpts().ObjC && | |||
203 | CGM.getLangOpts().getGC() == LangOptions::NonGC) { | |||
204 | descName = getBlockDescriptorName(blockInfo, CGM); | |||
205 | if (llvm::GlobalValue *desc = CGM.getModule().getNamedValue(descName)) | |||
206 | return llvm::ConstantExpr::getBitCast(desc, | |||
207 | CGM.getBlockDescriptorType()); | |||
208 | } | |||
209 | ||||
210 | // If there isn't an equivalent block descriptor global variable, create a new | |||
211 | // one. | |||
212 | ConstantInitBuilder builder(CGM); | |||
213 | auto elements = builder.beginStruct(); | |||
214 | ||||
215 | // reserved | |||
216 | elements.addInt(ulong, 0); | |||
217 | ||||
218 | // Size | |||
219 | // FIXME: What is the right way to say this doesn't fit? We should give | |||
220 | // a user diagnostic in that case. Better fix would be to change the | |||
221 | // API to size_t. | |||
222 | elements.addInt(ulong, blockInfo.BlockSize.getQuantity()); | |||
223 | ||||
224 | // Optional copy/dispose helpers. | |||
225 | bool hasInternalHelper = false; | |||
226 | if (blockInfo.needsCopyDisposeHelpers()) { | |||
227 | // copy_func_helper_decl | |||
228 | llvm::Constant *copyHelper = buildCopyHelper(CGM, blockInfo); | |||
229 | elements.add(copyHelper); | |||
230 | ||||
231 | // destroy_func_decl | |||
232 | llvm::Constant *disposeHelper = buildDisposeHelper(CGM, blockInfo); | |||
233 | elements.add(disposeHelper); | |||
234 | ||||
235 | if (cast<llvm::Function>(copyHelper->getOperand(0))->hasInternalLinkage() || | |||
236 | cast<llvm::Function>(disposeHelper->getOperand(0)) | |||
237 | ->hasInternalLinkage()) | |||
238 | hasInternalHelper = true; | |||
239 | } | |||
240 | ||||
241 | // Signature. Mandatory ObjC-style method descriptor @encode sequence. | |||
242 | std::string typeAtEncoding = | |||
243 | CGM.getContext().getObjCEncodingForBlock(blockInfo.getBlockExpr()); | |||
244 | elements.add(llvm::ConstantExpr::getBitCast( | |||
245 | CGM.GetAddrOfConstantCString(typeAtEncoding).getPointer(), i8p)); | |||
246 | ||||
247 | // GC layout. | |||
248 | if (C.getLangOpts().ObjC) { | |||
249 | if (CGM.getLangOpts().getGC() != LangOptions::NonGC) | |||
250 | elements.add(CGM.getObjCRuntime().BuildGCBlockLayout(CGM, blockInfo)); | |||
251 | else | |||
252 | elements.add(CGM.getObjCRuntime().BuildRCBlockLayout(CGM, blockInfo)); | |||
253 | } | |||
254 | else | |||
255 | elements.addNullPointer(i8p); | |||
256 | ||||
257 | unsigned AddrSpace = 0; | |||
258 | if (C.getLangOpts().OpenCL) | |||
259 | AddrSpace = C.getTargetAddressSpace(LangAS::opencl_constant); | |||
260 | ||||
261 | llvm::GlobalValue::LinkageTypes linkage; | |||
262 | if (descName.empty()) { | |||
263 | linkage = llvm::GlobalValue::InternalLinkage; | |||
264 | descName = "__block_descriptor_tmp"; | |||
265 | } else if (hasInternalHelper) { | |||
266 | // If either the copy helper or the dispose helper has internal linkage, | |||
267 | // the block descriptor must have internal linkage too. | |||
268 | linkage = llvm::GlobalValue::InternalLinkage; | |||
269 | } else { | |||
270 | linkage = llvm::GlobalValue::LinkOnceODRLinkage; | |||
271 | } | |||
272 | ||||
273 | llvm::GlobalVariable *global = | |||
274 | elements.finishAndCreateGlobal(descName, CGM.getPointerAlign(), | |||
275 | /*constant*/ true, linkage, AddrSpace); | |||
276 | ||||
277 | if (linkage == llvm::GlobalValue::LinkOnceODRLinkage) { | |||
278 | if (CGM.supportsCOMDAT()) | |||
279 | global->setComdat(CGM.getModule().getOrInsertComdat(descName)); | |||
280 | global->setVisibility(llvm::GlobalValue::HiddenVisibility); | |||
281 | global->setUnnamedAddr(llvm::GlobalValue::UnnamedAddr::Global); | |||
282 | } | |||
283 | ||||
284 | return llvm::ConstantExpr::getBitCast(global, CGM.getBlockDescriptorType()); | |||
285 | } | |||
286 | ||||
287 | /* | |||
288 | Purely notional variadic template describing the layout of a block. | |||
289 | ||||
290 | template <class _ResultType, class... _ParamTypes, class... _CaptureTypes> | |||
291 | struct Block_literal { | |||
292 | /// Initialized to one of: | |||
293 | /// extern void *_NSConcreteStackBlock[]; | |||
294 | /// extern void *_NSConcreteGlobalBlock[]; | |||
295 | /// | |||
296 | /// In theory, we could start one off malloc'ed by setting | |||
297 | /// BLOCK_NEEDS_FREE, giving it a refcount of 1, and using | |||
298 | /// this isa: | |||
299 | /// extern void *_NSConcreteMallocBlock[]; | |||
300 | struct objc_class *isa; | |||
301 | ||||
302 | /// These are the flags (with corresponding bit number) that the | |||
303 | /// compiler is actually supposed to know about. | |||
304 | /// 23. BLOCK_IS_NOESCAPE - indicates that the block is non-escaping | |||
305 | /// 25. BLOCK_HAS_COPY_DISPOSE - indicates that the block | |||
306 | /// descriptor provides copy and dispose helper functions | |||
307 | /// 26. BLOCK_HAS_CXX_OBJ - indicates that there's a captured | |||
308 | /// object with a nontrivial destructor or copy constructor | |||
309 | /// 28. BLOCK_IS_GLOBAL - indicates that the block is allocated | |||
310 | /// as global memory | |||
311 | /// 29. BLOCK_USE_STRET - indicates that the block function | |||
312 | /// uses stret, which objc_msgSend needs to know about | |||
313 | /// 30. BLOCK_HAS_SIGNATURE - indicates that the block has an | |||
314 | /// @encoded signature string | |||
315 | /// And we're not supposed to manipulate these: | |||
316 | /// 24. BLOCK_NEEDS_FREE - indicates that the block has been moved | |||
317 | /// to malloc'ed memory | |||
318 | /// 27. BLOCK_IS_GC - indicates that the block has been moved to | |||
319 | /// to GC-allocated memory | |||
320 | /// Additionally, the bottom 16 bits are a reference count which | |||
321 | /// should be zero on the stack. | |||
322 | int flags; | |||
323 | ||||
324 | /// Reserved; should be zero-initialized. | |||
325 | int reserved; | |||
326 | ||||
327 | /// Function pointer generated from block literal. | |||
328 | _ResultType (*invoke)(Block_literal *, _ParamTypes...); | |||
329 | ||||
330 | /// Block description metadata generated from block literal. | |||
331 | struct Block_descriptor *block_descriptor; | |||
332 | ||||
333 | /// Captured values follow. | |||
334 | _CapturesTypes captures...; | |||
335 | }; | |||
336 | */ | |||
337 | ||||
338 | namespace { | |||
339 | /// A chunk of data that we actually have to capture in the block. | |||
340 | struct BlockLayoutChunk { | |||
341 | CharUnits Alignment; | |||
342 | CharUnits Size; | |||
343 | Qualifiers::ObjCLifetime Lifetime; | |||
344 | const BlockDecl::Capture *Capture; // null for 'this' | |||
345 | llvm::Type *Type; | |||
346 | QualType FieldType; | |||
347 | ||||
348 | BlockLayoutChunk(CharUnits align, CharUnits size, | |||
349 | Qualifiers::ObjCLifetime lifetime, | |||
350 | const BlockDecl::Capture *capture, | |||
351 | llvm::Type *type, QualType fieldType) | |||
352 | : Alignment(align), Size(size), Lifetime(lifetime), | |||
353 | Capture(capture), Type(type), FieldType(fieldType) {} | |||
354 | ||||
355 | /// Tell the block info that this chunk has the given field index. | |||
356 | void setIndex(CGBlockInfo &info, unsigned index, CharUnits offset) { | |||
357 | if (!Capture) { | |||
358 | info.CXXThisIndex = index; | |||
359 | info.CXXThisOffset = offset; | |||
360 | } else { | |||
361 | auto C = CGBlockInfo::Capture::makeIndex(index, offset, FieldType); | |||
362 | info.Captures.insert({Capture->getVariable(), C}); | |||
363 | } | |||
364 | } | |||
365 | }; | |||
366 | ||||
367 | /// Order by 1) all __strong together 2) next, all byfref together 3) next, | |||
368 | /// all __weak together. Preserve descending alignment in all situations. | |||
369 | bool operator<(const BlockLayoutChunk &left, const BlockLayoutChunk &right) { | |||
370 | if (left.Alignment != right.Alignment) | |||
371 | return left.Alignment > right.Alignment; | |||
372 | ||||
373 | auto getPrefOrder = [](const BlockLayoutChunk &chunk) { | |||
374 | if (chunk.Capture && chunk.Capture->isByRef()) | |||
375 | return 1; | |||
376 | if (chunk.Lifetime == Qualifiers::OCL_Strong) | |||
377 | return 0; | |||
378 | if (chunk.Lifetime == Qualifiers::OCL_Weak) | |||
379 | return 2; | |||
380 | return 3; | |||
381 | }; | |||
382 | ||||
383 | return getPrefOrder(left) < getPrefOrder(right); | |||
384 | } | |||
385 | } // end anonymous namespace | |||
386 | ||||
387 | /// Determines if the given type is safe for constant capture in C++. | |||
388 | static bool isSafeForCXXConstantCapture(QualType type) { | |||
389 | const RecordType *recordType = | |||
390 | type->getBaseElementTypeUnsafe()->getAs<RecordType>(); | |||
391 | ||||
392 | // Only records can be unsafe. | |||
393 | if (!recordType) return true; | |||
394 | ||||
395 | const auto *record = cast<CXXRecordDecl>(recordType->getDecl()); | |||
396 | ||||
397 | // Maintain semantics for classes with non-trivial dtors or copy ctors. | |||
398 | if (!record->hasTrivialDestructor()) return false; | |||
399 | if (record->hasNonTrivialCopyConstructor()) return false; | |||
400 | ||||
401 | // Otherwise, we just have to make sure there aren't any mutable | |||
402 | // fields that might have changed since initialization. | |||
403 | return !record->hasMutableFields(); | |||
404 | } | |||
405 | ||||
406 | /// It is illegal to modify a const object after initialization. | |||
407 | /// Therefore, if a const object has a constant initializer, we don't | |||
408 | /// actually need to keep storage for it in the block; we'll just | |||
409 | /// rematerialize it at the start of the block function. This is | |||
410 | /// acceptable because we make no promises about address stability of | |||
411 | /// captured variables. | |||
412 | static llvm::Constant *tryCaptureAsConstant(CodeGenModule &CGM, | |||
413 | CodeGenFunction *CGF, | |||
414 | const VarDecl *var) { | |||
415 | // Return if this is a function parameter. We shouldn't try to | |||
416 | // rematerialize default arguments of function parameters. | |||
417 | if (isa<ParmVarDecl>(var)) | |||
418 | return nullptr; | |||
419 | ||||
420 | QualType type = var->getType(); | |||
421 | ||||
422 | // We can only do this if the variable is const. | |||
423 | if (!type.isConstQualified()) return nullptr; | |||
424 | ||||
425 | // Furthermore, in C++ we have to worry about mutable fields: | |||
426 | // C++ [dcl.type.cv]p4: | |||
427 | // Except that any class member declared mutable can be | |||
428 | // modified, any attempt to modify a const object during its | |||
429 | // lifetime results in undefined behavior. | |||
430 | if (CGM.getLangOpts().CPlusPlus && !isSafeForCXXConstantCapture(type)) | |||
431 | return nullptr; | |||
432 | ||||
433 | // If the variable doesn't have any initializer (shouldn't this be | |||
434 | // invalid?), it's not clear what we should do. Maybe capture as | |||
435 | // zero? | |||
436 | const Expr *init = var->getInit(); | |||
437 | if (!init) return nullptr; | |||
438 | ||||
439 | return ConstantEmitter(CGM, CGF).tryEmitAbstractForInitializer(*var); | |||
440 | } | |||
441 | ||||
442 | /// Get the low bit of a nonzero character count. This is the | |||
443 | /// alignment of the nth byte if the 0th byte is universally aligned. | |||
444 | static CharUnits getLowBit(CharUnits v) { | |||
445 | return CharUnits::fromQuantity(v.getQuantity() & (~v.getQuantity() + 1)); | |||
446 | } | |||
447 | ||||
448 | static void initializeForBlockHeader(CodeGenModule &CGM, CGBlockInfo &info, | |||
449 | SmallVectorImpl<llvm::Type*> &elementTypes) { | |||
450 | ||||
451 | assert(elementTypes.empty())((void)0); | |||
452 | if (CGM.getLangOpts().OpenCL) { | |||
453 | // The header is basically 'struct { int; int; generic void *; | |||
454 | // custom_fields; }'. Assert that struct is packed. | |||
455 | auto GenericAS = | |||
456 | CGM.getContext().getTargetAddressSpace(LangAS::opencl_generic); | |||
457 | auto GenPtrAlign = | |||
458 | CharUnits::fromQuantity(CGM.getTarget().getPointerAlign(GenericAS) / 8); | |||
459 | auto GenPtrSize = | |||
460 | CharUnits::fromQuantity(CGM.getTarget().getPointerWidth(GenericAS) / 8); | |||
461 | assert(CGM.getIntSize() <= GenPtrSize)((void)0); | |||
462 | assert(CGM.getIntAlign() <= GenPtrAlign)((void)0); | |||
463 | assert((2 * CGM.getIntSize()).isMultipleOf(GenPtrAlign))((void)0); | |||
464 | elementTypes.push_back(CGM.IntTy); /* total size */ | |||
465 | elementTypes.push_back(CGM.IntTy); /* align */ | |||
466 | elementTypes.push_back( | |||
467 | CGM.getOpenCLRuntime() | |||
468 | .getGenericVoidPointerType()); /* invoke function */ | |||
469 | unsigned Offset = | |||
470 | 2 * CGM.getIntSize().getQuantity() + GenPtrSize.getQuantity(); | |||
471 | unsigned BlockAlign = GenPtrAlign.getQuantity(); | |||
472 | if (auto *Helper = | |||
473 | CGM.getTargetCodeGenInfo().getTargetOpenCLBlockHelper()) { | |||
474 | for (auto I : Helper->getCustomFieldTypes()) /* custom fields */ { | |||
475 | // TargetOpenCLBlockHelp needs to make sure the struct is packed. | |||
476 | // If necessary, add padding fields to the custom fields. | |||
477 | unsigned Align = CGM.getDataLayout().getABITypeAlignment(I); | |||
478 | if (BlockAlign < Align) | |||
479 | BlockAlign = Align; | |||
480 | assert(Offset % Align == 0)((void)0); | |||
481 | Offset += CGM.getDataLayout().getTypeAllocSize(I); | |||
482 | elementTypes.push_back(I); | |||
483 | } | |||
484 | } | |||
485 | info.BlockAlign = CharUnits::fromQuantity(BlockAlign); | |||
486 | info.BlockSize = CharUnits::fromQuantity(Offset); | |||
487 | } else { | |||
488 | // The header is basically 'struct { void *; int; int; void *; void *; }'. | |||
489 | // Assert that the struct is packed. | |||
490 | assert(CGM.getIntSize() <= CGM.getPointerSize())((void)0); | |||
491 | assert(CGM.getIntAlign() <= CGM.getPointerAlign())((void)0); | |||
492 | assert((2 * CGM.getIntSize()).isMultipleOf(CGM.getPointerAlign()))((void)0); | |||
493 | info.BlockAlign = CGM.getPointerAlign(); | |||
494 | info.BlockSize = 3 * CGM.getPointerSize() + 2 * CGM.getIntSize(); | |||
495 | elementTypes.push_back(CGM.VoidPtrTy); | |||
496 | elementTypes.push_back(CGM.IntTy); | |||
497 | elementTypes.push_back(CGM.IntTy); | |||
498 | elementTypes.push_back(CGM.VoidPtrTy); | |||
499 | elementTypes.push_back(CGM.getBlockDescriptorType()); | |||
500 | } | |||
501 | } | |||
502 | ||||
503 | static QualType getCaptureFieldType(const CodeGenFunction &CGF, | |||
504 | const BlockDecl::Capture &CI) { | |||
505 | const VarDecl *VD = CI.getVariable(); | |||
506 | ||||
507 | // If the variable is captured by an enclosing block or lambda expression, | |||
508 | // use the type of the capture field. | |||
509 | if (CGF.BlockInfo && CI.isNested()) | |||
510 | return CGF.BlockInfo->getCapture(VD).fieldType(); | |||
511 | if (auto *FD = CGF.LambdaCaptureFields.lookup(VD)) | |||
512 | return FD->getType(); | |||
513 | // If the captured variable is a non-escaping __block variable, the field | |||
514 | // type is the reference type. If the variable is a __block variable that | |||
515 | // already has a reference type, the field type is the variable's type. | |||
516 | return VD->isNonEscapingByref() ? | |||
517 | CGF.getContext().getLValueReferenceType(VD->getType()) : VD->getType(); | |||
518 | } | |||
519 | ||||
520 | /// Compute the layout of the given block. Attempts to lay the block | |||
521 | /// out with minimal space requirements. | |||
522 | static void computeBlockInfo(CodeGenModule &CGM, CodeGenFunction *CGF, | |||
523 | CGBlockInfo &info) { | |||
524 | ASTContext &C = CGM.getContext(); | |||
525 | const BlockDecl *block = info.getBlockDecl(); | |||
526 | ||||
527 | SmallVector<llvm::Type*, 8> elementTypes; | |||
528 | initializeForBlockHeader(CGM, info, elementTypes); | |||
529 | bool hasNonConstantCustomFields = false; | |||
530 | if (auto *OpenCLHelper = | |||
531 | CGM.getTargetCodeGenInfo().getTargetOpenCLBlockHelper()) | |||
532 | hasNonConstantCustomFields = | |||
533 | !OpenCLHelper->areAllCustomFieldValuesConstant(info); | |||
534 | if (!block->hasCaptures() && !hasNonConstantCustomFields) { | |||
535 | info.StructureType = | |||
536 | llvm::StructType::get(CGM.getLLVMContext(), elementTypes, true); | |||
537 | info.CanBeGlobal = true; | |||
538 | return; | |||
539 | } | |||
540 | else if (C.getLangOpts().ObjC && | |||
541 | CGM.getLangOpts().getGC() == LangOptions::NonGC) | |||
542 | info.HasCapturedVariableLayout = true; | |||
543 | ||||
544 | // Collect the layout chunks. | |||
545 | SmallVector<BlockLayoutChunk, 16> layout; | |||
546 | layout.reserve(block->capturesCXXThis() + | |||
547 | (block->capture_end() - block->capture_begin())); | |||
548 | ||||
549 | CharUnits maxFieldAlign; | |||
550 | ||||
551 | // First, 'this'. | |||
552 | if (block->capturesCXXThis()) { | |||
553 | assert(CGF && CGF->CurFuncDecl && isa<CXXMethodDecl>(CGF->CurFuncDecl) &&((void)0) | |||
554 | "Can't capture 'this' outside a method")((void)0); | |||
555 | QualType thisType = cast<CXXMethodDecl>(CGF->CurFuncDecl)->getThisType(); | |||
| ||||
556 | ||||
557 | // Theoretically, this could be in a different address space, so | |||
558 | // don't assume standard pointer size/align. | |||
559 | llvm::Type *llvmType = CGM.getTypes().ConvertType(thisType); | |||
560 | auto TInfo = CGM.getContext().getTypeInfoInChars(thisType); | |||
561 | maxFieldAlign = std::max(maxFieldAlign, TInfo.Align); | |||
562 | ||||
563 | layout.push_back(BlockLayoutChunk(TInfo.Align, TInfo.Width, | |||
564 | Qualifiers::OCL_None, | |||
565 | nullptr, llvmType, thisType)); | |||
566 | } | |||
567 | ||||
568 | // Next, all the block captures. | |||
569 | for (const auto &CI : block->captures()) { | |||
570 | const VarDecl *variable = CI.getVariable(); | |||
571 | ||||
572 | if (CI.isEscapingByref()) { | |||
573 | // We have to copy/dispose of the __block reference. | |||
574 | info.NeedsCopyDispose = true; | |||
575 | ||||
576 | // Just use void* instead of a pointer to the byref type. | |||
577 | CharUnits align = CGM.getPointerAlign(); | |||
578 | maxFieldAlign = std::max(maxFieldAlign, align); | |||
579 | ||||
580 | // Since a __block variable cannot be captured by lambdas, its type and | |||
581 | // the capture field type should always match. | |||
582 | assert(CGF && getCaptureFieldType(*CGF, CI) == variable->getType() &&((void)0) | |||
583 | "capture type differs from the variable type")((void)0); | |||
584 | layout.push_back(BlockLayoutChunk(align, CGM.getPointerSize(), | |||
585 | Qualifiers::OCL_None, &CI, | |||
586 | CGM.VoidPtrTy, variable->getType())); | |||
587 | continue; | |||
588 | } | |||
589 | ||||
590 | // Otherwise, build a layout chunk with the size and alignment of | |||
591 | // the declaration. | |||
592 | if (llvm::Constant *constant = tryCaptureAsConstant(CGM, CGF, variable)) { | |||
593 | info.Captures[variable] = CGBlockInfo::Capture::makeConstant(constant); | |||
594 | continue; | |||
595 | } | |||
596 | ||||
597 | QualType VT = getCaptureFieldType(*CGF, CI); | |||
598 | ||||
599 | // If we have a lifetime qualifier, honor it for capture purposes. | |||
600 | // That includes *not* copying it if it's __unsafe_unretained. | |||
601 | Qualifiers::ObjCLifetime lifetime = VT.getObjCLifetime(); | |||
602 | if (lifetime) { | |||
603 | switch (lifetime) { | |||
604 | case Qualifiers::OCL_None: llvm_unreachable("impossible")__builtin_unreachable(); | |||
605 | case Qualifiers::OCL_ExplicitNone: | |||
606 | case Qualifiers::OCL_Autoreleasing: | |||
607 | break; | |||
608 | ||||
609 | case Qualifiers::OCL_Strong: | |||
610 | case Qualifiers::OCL_Weak: | |||
611 | info.NeedsCopyDispose = true; | |||
612 | } | |||
613 | ||||
614 | // Block pointers require copy/dispose. So do Objective-C pointers. | |||
615 | } else if (VT->isObjCRetainableType()) { | |||
616 | // But honor the inert __unsafe_unretained qualifier, which doesn't | |||
617 | // actually make it into the type system. | |||
618 | if (VT->isObjCInertUnsafeUnretainedType()) { | |||
619 | lifetime = Qualifiers::OCL_ExplicitNone; | |||
620 | } else { | |||
621 | info.NeedsCopyDispose = true; | |||
622 | // used for mrr below. | |||
623 | lifetime = Qualifiers::OCL_Strong; | |||
624 | } | |||
625 | ||||
626 | // So do types that require non-trivial copy construction. | |||
627 | } else if (CI.hasCopyExpr()) { | |||
628 | info.NeedsCopyDispose = true; | |||
629 | info.HasCXXObject = true; | |||
630 | if (!VT->getAsCXXRecordDecl()->isExternallyVisible()) | |||
631 | info.CapturesNonExternalType = true; | |||
632 | ||||
633 | // So do C structs that require non-trivial copy construction or | |||
634 | // destruction. | |||
635 | } else if (VT.isNonTrivialToPrimitiveCopy() == QualType::PCK_Struct || | |||
636 | VT.isDestructedType() == QualType::DK_nontrivial_c_struct) { | |||
637 | info.NeedsCopyDispose = true; | |||
638 | ||||
639 | // And so do types with destructors. | |||
640 | } else if (CGM.getLangOpts().CPlusPlus) { | |||
641 | if (const CXXRecordDecl *record = VT->getAsCXXRecordDecl()) { | |||
642 | if (!record->hasTrivialDestructor()) { | |||
643 | info.HasCXXObject = true; | |||
644 | info.NeedsCopyDispose = true; | |||
645 | if (!record->isExternallyVisible()) | |||
646 | info.CapturesNonExternalType = true; | |||
647 | } | |||
648 | } | |||
649 | } | |||
650 | ||||
651 | CharUnits size = C.getTypeSizeInChars(VT); | |||
652 | CharUnits align = C.getDeclAlign(variable); | |||
653 | ||||
654 | maxFieldAlign = std::max(maxFieldAlign, align); | |||
655 | ||||
656 | llvm::Type *llvmType = | |||
657 | CGM.getTypes().ConvertTypeForMem(VT); | |||
658 | ||||
659 | layout.push_back( | |||
660 | BlockLayoutChunk(align, size, lifetime, &CI, llvmType, VT)); | |||
661 | } | |||
662 | ||||
663 | // If that was everything, we're done here. | |||
664 | if (layout.empty()) { | |||
665 | info.StructureType = | |||
666 | llvm::StructType::get(CGM.getLLVMContext(), elementTypes, true); | |||
667 | info.CanBeGlobal = true; | |||
668 | return; | |||
669 | } | |||
670 | ||||
671 | // Sort the layout by alignment. We have to use a stable sort here | |||
672 | // to get reproducible results. There should probably be an | |||
673 | // llvm::array_pod_stable_sort. | |||
674 | llvm::stable_sort(layout); | |||
675 | ||||
676 | // Needed for blocks layout info. | |||
677 | info.BlockHeaderForcedGapOffset = info.BlockSize; | |||
678 | info.BlockHeaderForcedGapSize = CharUnits::Zero(); | |||
679 | ||||
680 | CharUnits &blockSize = info.BlockSize; | |||
681 | info.BlockAlign = std::max(maxFieldAlign, info.BlockAlign); | |||
682 | ||||
683 | // Assuming that the first byte in the header is maximally aligned, | |||
684 | // get the alignment of the first byte following the header. | |||
685 | CharUnits endAlign = getLowBit(blockSize); | |||
686 | ||||
687 | // If the end of the header isn't satisfactorily aligned for the | |||
688 | // maximum thing, look for things that are okay with the header-end | |||
689 | // alignment, and keep appending them until we get something that's | |||
690 | // aligned right. This algorithm is only guaranteed optimal if | |||
691 | // that condition is satisfied at some point; otherwise we can get | |||
692 | // things like: | |||
693 | // header // next byte has alignment 4 | |||
694 | // something_with_size_5; // next byte has alignment 1 | |||
695 | // something_with_alignment_8; | |||
696 | // which has 7 bytes of padding, as opposed to the naive solution | |||
697 | // which might have less (?). | |||
698 | if (endAlign < maxFieldAlign) { | |||
699 | SmallVectorImpl<BlockLayoutChunk>::iterator | |||
700 | li = layout.begin() + 1, le = layout.end(); | |||
701 | ||||
702 | // Look for something that the header end is already | |||
703 | // satisfactorily aligned for. | |||
704 | for (; li != le && endAlign < li->Alignment; ++li) | |||
705 | ; | |||
706 | ||||
707 | // If we found something that's naturally aligned for the end of | |||
708 | // the header, keep adding things... | |||
709 | if (li != le) { | |||
710 | SmallVectorImpl<BlockLayoutChunk>::iterator first = li; | |||
711 | for (; li != le; ++li) { | |||
712 | assert(endAlign >= li->Alignment)((void)0); | |||
713 | ||||
714 | li->setIndex(info, elementTypes.size(), blockSize); | |||
715 | elementTypes.push_back(li->Type); | |||
716 | blockSize += li->Size; | |||
717 | endAlign = getLowBit(blockSize); | |||
718 | ||||
719 | // ...until we get to the alignment of the maximum field. | |||
720 | if (endAlign >= maxFieldAlign) { | |||
721 | break; | |||
722 | } | |||
723 | } | |||
724 | // Don't re-append everything we just appended. | |||
725 | layout.erase(first, li); | |||
726 | } | |||
727 | } | |||
728 | ||||
729 | assert(endAlign == getLowBit(blockSize))((void)0); | |||
730 | ||||
731 | // At this point, we just have to add padding if the end align still | |||
732 | // isn't aligned right. | |||
733 | if (endAlign < maxFieldAlign) { | |||
734 | CharUnits newBlockSize = blockSize.alignTo(maxFieldAlign); | |||
735 | CharUnits padding = newBlockSize - blockSize; | |||
736 | ||||
737 | // If we haven't yet added any fields, remember that there was an | |||
738 | // initial gap; this need to go into the block layout bit map. | |||
739 | if (blockSize == info.BlockHeaderForcedGapOffset) { | |||
740 | info.BlockHeaderForcedGapSize = padding; | |||
741 | } | |||
742 | ||||
743 | elementTypes.push_back(llvm::ArrayType::get(CGM.Int8Ty, | |||
744 | padding.getQuantity())); | |||
745 | blockSize = newBlockSize; | |||
746 | endAlign = getLowBit(blockSize); // might be > maxFieldAlign | |||
747 | } | |||
748 | ||||
749 | assert(endAlign >= maxFieldAlign)((void)0); | |||
750 | assert(endAlign == getLowBit(blockSize))((void)0); | |||
751 | // Slam everything else on now. This works because they have | |||
752 | // strictly decreasing alignment and we expect that size is always a | |||
753 | // multiple of alignment. | |||
754 | for (SmallVectorImpl<BlockLayoutChunk>::iterator | |||
755 | li = layout.begin(), le = layout.end(); li != le; ++li) { | |||
756 | if (endAlign < li->Alignment) { | |||
757 | // size may not be multiple of alignment. This can only happen with | |||
758 | // an over-aligned variable. We will be adding a padding field to | |||
759 | // make the size be multiple of alignment. | |||
760 | CharUnits padding = li->Alignment - endAlign; | |||
761 | elementTypes.push_back(llvm::ArrayType::get(CGM.Int8Ty, | |||
762 | padding.getQuantity())); | |||
763 | blockSize += padding; | |||
764 | endAlign = getLowBit(blockSize); | |||
765 | } | |||
766 | assert(endAlign >= li->Alignment)((void)0); | |||
767 | li->setIndex(info, elementTypes.size(), blockSize); | |||
768 | elementTypes.push_back(li->Type); | |||
769 | blockSize += li->Size; | |||
770 | endAlign = getLowBit(blockSize); | |||
771 | } | |||
772 | ||||
773 | info.StructureType = | |||
774 | llvm::StructType::get(CGM.getLLVMContext(), elementTypes, true); | |||
775 | } | |||
776 | ||||
777 | /// Emit a block literal expression in the current function. | |||
778 | llvm::Value *CodeGenFunction::EmitBlockLiteral(const BlockExpr *blockExpr) { | |||
779 | // If the block has no captures, we won't have a pre-computed | |||
780 | // layout for it. | |||
781 | if (!blockExpr->getBlockDecl()->hasCaptures()) | |||
782 | // The block literal is emitted as a global variable, and the block invoke | |||
783 | // function has to be extracted from its initializer. | |||
784 | if (llvm::Constant *Block = CGM.getAddrOfGlobalBlockIfEmitted(blockExpr)) | |||
785 | return Block; | |||
786 | ||||
787 | CGBlockInfo blockInfo(blockExpr->getBlockDecl(), CurFn->getName()); | |||
788 | computeBlockInfo(CGM, this, blockInfo); | |||
789 | blockInfo.BlockExpression = blockExpr; | |||
790 | if (!blockInfo.CanBeGlobal) | |||
791 | blockInfo.LocalAddress = CreateTempAlloca(blockInfo.StructureType, | |||
792 | blockInfo.BlockAlign, "block"); | |||
793 | return EmitBlockLiteral(blockInfo); | |||
794 | } | |||
795 | ||||
796 | llvm::Value *CodeGenFunction::EmitBlockLiteral(const CGBlockInfo &blockInfo) { | |||
797 | bool IsOpenCL = CGM.getContext().getLangOpts().OpenCL; | |||
798 | auto GenVoidPtrTy = | |||
799 | IsOpenCL ? CGM.getOpenCLRuntime().getGenericVoidPointerType() : VoidPtrTy; | |||
800 | LangAS GenVoidPtrAddr = IsOpenCL ? LangAS::opencl_generic : LangAS::Default; | |||
801 | auto GenVoidPtrSize = CharUnits::fromQuantity( | |||
802 | CGM.getTarget().getPointerWidth( | |||
803 | CGM.getContext().getTargetAddressSpace(GenVoidPtrAddr)) / | |||
804 | 8); | |||
805 | // Using the computed layout, generate the actual block function. | |||
806 | bool isLambdaConv = blockInfo.getBlockDecl()->isConversionFromLambda(); | |||
807 | CodeGenFunction BlockCGF{CGM, true}; | |||
808 | BlockCGF.SanOpts = SanOpts; | |||
809 | auto *InvokeFn = BlockCGF.GenerateBlockFunction( | |||
810 | CurGD, blockInfo, LocalDeclMap, isLambdaConv, blockInfo.CanBeGlobal); | |||
811 | auto *blockFn = llvm::ConstantExpr::getPointerCast(InvokeFn, GenVoidPtrTy); | |||
812 | ||||
813 | // If there is nothing to capture, we can emit this as a global block. | |||
814 | if (blockInfo.CanBeGlobal) | |||
815 | return CGM.getAddrOfGlobalBlockIfEmitted(blockInfo.BlockExpression); | |||
816 | ||||
817 | // Otherwise, we have to emit this as a local block. | |||
818 | ||||
819 | Address blockAddr = blockInfo.LocalAddress; | |||
820 | assert(blockAddr.isValid() && "block has no address!")((void)0); | |||
821 | ||||
822 | llvm::Constant *isa; | |||
823 | llvm::Constant *descriptor; | |||
824 | BlockFlags flags; | |||
825 | if (!IsOpenCL) { | |||
826 | // If the block is non-escaping, set field 'isa 'to NSConcreteGlobalBlock | |||
827 | // and set the BLOCK_IS_GLOBAL bit of field 'flags'. Copying a non-escaping | |||
828 | // block just returns the original block and releasing it is a no-op. | |||
829 | llvm::Constant *blockISA = blockInfo.getBlockDecl()->doesNotEscape() | |||
830 | ? CGM.getNSConcreteGlobalBlock() | |||
831 | : CGM.getNSConcreteStackBlock(); | |||
832 | isa = llvm::ConstantExpr::getBitCast(blockISA, VoidPtrTy); | |||
833 | ||||
834 | // Build the block descriptor. | |||
835 | descriptor = buildBlockDescriptor(CGM, blockInfo); | |||
836 | ||||
837 | // Compute the initial on-stack block flags. | |||
838 | flags = BLOCK_HAS_SIGNATURE; | |||
839 | if (blockInfo.HasCapturedVariableLayout) | |||
840 | flags |= BLOCK_HAS_EXTENDED_LAYOUT; | |||
841 | if (blockInfo.needsCopyDisposeHelpers()) | |||
842 | flags |= BLOCK_HAS_COPY_DISPOSE; | |||
843 | if (blockInfo.HasCXXObject) | |||
844 | flags |= BLOCK_HAS_CXX_OBJ; | |||
845 | if (blockInfo.UsesStret) | |||
846 | flags |= BLOCK_USE_STRET; | |||
847 | if (blockInfo.getBlockDecl()->doesNotEscape()) | |||
848 | flags |= BLOCK_IS_NOESCAPE | BLOCK_IS_GLOBAL; | |||
849 | } | |||
850 | ||||
851 | auto projectField = [&](unsigned index, const Twine &name) -> Address { | |||
852 | return Builder.CreateStructGEP(blockAddr, index, name); | |||
853 | }; | |||
854 | auto storeField = [&](llvm::Value *value, unsigned index, const Twine &name) { | |||
855 | Builder.CreateStore(value, projectField(index, name)); | |||
856 | }; | |||
857 | ||||
858 | // Initialize the block header. | |||
859 | { | |||
860 | // We assume all the header fields are densely packed. | |||
861 | unsigned index = 0; | |||
862 | CharUnits offset; | |||
863 | auto addHeaderField = [&](llvm::Value *value, CharUnits size, | |||
864 | const Twine &name) { | |||
865 | storeField(value, index, name); | |||
866 | offset += size; | |||
867 | index++; | |||
868 | }; | |||
869 | ||||
870 | if (!IsOpenCL) { | |||
871 | addHeaderField(isa, getPointerSize(), "block.isa"); | |||
872 | addHeaderField(llvm::ConstantInt::get(IntTy, flags.getBitMask()), | |||
873 | getIntSize(), "block.flags"); | |||
874 | addHeaderField(llvm::ConstantInt::get(IntTy, 0), getIntSize(), | |||
875 | "block.reserved"); | |||
876 | } else { | |||
877 | addHeaderField( | |||
878 | llvm::ConstantInt::get(IntTy, blockInfo.BlockSize.getQuantity()), | |||
879 | getIntSize(), "block.size"); | |||
880 | addHeaderField( | |||
881 | llvm::ConstantInt::get(IntTy, blockInfo.BlockAlign.getQuantity()), | |||
882 | getIntSize(), "block.align"); | |||
883 | } | |||
884 | addHeaderField(blockFn, GenVoidPtrSize, "block.invoke"); | |||
885 | if (!IsOpenCL) | |||
886 | addHeaderField(descriptor, getPointerSize(), "block.descriptor"); | |||
887 | else if (auto *Helper = | |||
888 | CGM.getTargetCodeGenInfo().getTargetOpenCLBlockHelper()) { | |||
889 | for (auto I : Helper->getCustomFieldValues(*this, blockInfo)) { | |||
890 | addHeaderField( | |||
891 | I.first, | |||
892 | CharUnits::fromQuantity( | |||
893 | CGM.getDataLayout().getTypeAllocSize(I.first->getType())), | |||
894 | I.second); | |||
895 | } | |||
896 | } | |||
897 | } | |||
898 | ||||
899 | // Finally, capture all the values into the block. | |||
900 | const BlockDecl *blockDecl = blockInfo.getBlockDecl(); | |||
901 | ||||
902 | // First, 'this'. | |||
903 | if (blockDecl->capturesCXXThis()) { | |||
904 | Address addr = | |||
905 | projectField(blockInfo.CXXThisIndex, "block.captured-this.addr"); | |||
906 | Builder.CreateStore(LoadCXXThis(), addr); | |||
907 | } | |||
908 | ||||
909 | // Next, captured variables. | |||
910 | for (const auto &CI : blockDecl->captures()) { | |||
911 | const VarDecl *variable = CI.getVariable(); | |||
912 | const CGBlockInfo::Capture &capture = blockInfo.getCapture(variable); | |||
913 | ||||
914 | // Ignore constant captures. | |||
915 | if (capture.isConstant()) continue; | |||
916 | ||||
917 | QualType type = capture.fieldType(); | |||
918 | ||||
919 | // This will be a [[type]]*, except that a byref entry will just be | |||
920 | // an i8**. | |||
921 | Address blockField = projectField(capture.getIndex(), "block.captured"); | |||
922 | ||||
923 | // Compute the address of the thing we're going to move into the | |||
924 | // block literal. | |||
925 | Address src = Address::invalid(); | |||
926 | ||||
927 | if (blockDecl->isConversionFromLambda()) { | |||
928 | // The lambda capture in a lambda's conversion-to-block-pointer is | |||
929 | // special; we'll simply emit it directly. | |||
930 | src = Address::invalid(); | |||
931 | } else if (CI.isEscapingByref()) { | |||
932 | if (BlockInfo && CI.isNested()) { | |||
933 | // We need to use the capture from the enclosing block. | |||
934 | const CGBlockInfo::Capture &enclosingCapture = | |||
935 | BlockInfo->getCapture(variable); | |||
936 | ||||
937 | // This is a [[type]]*, except that a byref entry will just be an i8**. | |||
938 | src = Builder.CreateStructGEP(LoadBlockStruct(), | |||
939 | enclosingCapture.getIndex(), | |||
940 | "block.capture.addr"); | |||
941 | } else { | |||
942 | auto I = LocalDeclMap.find(variable); | |||
943 | assert(I != LocalDeclMap.end())((void)0); | |||
944 | src = I->second; | |||
945 | } | |||
946 | } else { | |||
947 | DeclRefExpr declRef(getContext(), const_cast<VarDecl *>(variable), | |||
948 | /*RefersToEnclosingVariableOrCapture*/ CI.isNested(), | |||
949 | type.getNonReferenceType(), VK_LValue, | |||
950 | SourceLocation()); | |||
951 | src = EmitDeclRefLValue(&declRef).getAddress(*this); | |||
952 | }; | |||
953 | ||||
954 | // For byrefs, we just write the pointer to the byref struct into | |||
955 | // the block field. There's no need to chase the forwarding | |||
956 | // pointer at this point, since we're building something that will | |||
957 | // live a shorter life than the stack byref anyway. | |||
958 | if (CI.isEscapingByref()) { | |||
959 | // Get a void* that points to the byref struct. | |||
960 | llvm::Value *byrefPointer; | |||
961 | if (CI.isNested()) | |||
962 | byrefPointer = Builder.CreateLoad(src, "byref.capture"); | |||
963 | else | |||
964 | byrefPointer = Builder.CreateBitCast(src.getPointer(), VoidPtrTy); | |||
965 | ||||
966 | // Write that void* into the capture field. | |||
967 | Builder.CreateStore(byrefPointer, blockField); | |||
968 | ||||
969 | // If we have a copy constructor, evaluate that into the block field. | |||
970 | } else if (const Expr *copyExpr = CI.getCopyExpr()) { | |||
971 | if (blockDecl->isConversionFromLambda()) { | |||
972 | // If we have a lambda conversion, emit the expression | |||
973 | // directly into the block instead. | |||
974 | AggValueSlot Slot = | |||
975 | AggValueSlot::forAddr(blockField, Qualifiers(), | |||
976 | AggValueSlot::IsDestructed, | |||
977 | AggValueSlot::DoesNotNeedGCBarriers, | |||
978 | AggValueSlot::IsNotAliased, | |||
979 | AggValueSlot::DoesNotOverlap); | |||
980 | EmitAggExpr(copyExpr, Slot); | |||
981 | } else { | |||
982 | EmitSynthesizedCXXCopyCtor(blockField, src, copyExpr); | |||
983 | } | |||
984 | ||||
985 | // If it's a reference variable, copy the reference into the block field. | |||
986 | } else if (type->isReferenceType()) { | |||
987 | Builder.CreateStore(src.getPointer(), blockField); | |||
988 | ||||
989 | // If type is const-qualified, copy the value into the block field. | |||
990 | } else if (type.isConstQualified() && | |||
991 | type.getObjCLifetime() == Qualifiers::OCL_Strong && | |||
992 | CGM.getCodeGenOpts().OptimizationLevel != 0) { | |||
993 | llvm::Value *value = Builder.CreateLoad(src, "captured"); | |||
994 | Builder.CreateStore(value, blockField); | |||
995 | ||||
996 | // If this is an ARC __strong block-pointer variable, don't do a | |||
997 | // block copy. | |||
998 | // | |||
999 | // TODO: this can be generalized into the normal initialization logic: | |||
1000 | // we should never need to do a block-copy when initializing a local | |||
1001 | // variable, because the local variable's lifetime should be strictly | |||
1002 | // contained within the stack block's. | |||
1003 | } else if (type.getObjCLifetime() == Qualifiers::OCL_Strong && | |||
1004 | type->isBlockPointerType()) { | |||
1005 | // Load the block and do a simple retain. | |||
1006 | llvm::Value *value = Builder.CreateLoad(src, "block.captured_block"); | |||
1007 | value = EmitARCRetainNonBlock(value); | |||
1008 | ||||
1009 | // Do a primitive store to the block field. | |||
1010 | Builder.CreateStore(value, blockField); | |||
1011 | ||||
1012 | // Otherwise, fake up a POD copy into the block field. | |||
1013 | } else { | |||
1014 | // Fake up a new variable so that EmitScalarInit doesn't think | |||
1015 | // we're referring to the variable in its own initializer. | |||
1016 | ImplicitParamDecl BlockFieldPseudoVar(getContext(), type, | |||
1017 | ImplicitParamDecl::Other); | |||
1018 | ||||
1019 | // We use one of these or the other depending on whether the | |||
1020 | // reference is nested. | |||
1021 | DeclRefExpr declRef(getContext(), const_cast<VarDecl *>(variable), | |||
1022 | /*RefersToEnclosingVariableOrCapture*/ CI.isNested(), | |||
1023 | type, VK_LValue, SourceLocation()); | |||
1024 | ||||
1025 | ImplicitCastExpr l2r(ImplicitCastExpr::OnStack, type, CK_LValueToRValue, | |||
1026 | &declRef, VK_PRValue, FPOptionsOverride()); | |||
1027 | // FIXME: Pass a specific location for the expr init so that the store is | |||
1028 | // attributed to a reasonable location - otherwise it may be attributed to | |||
1029 | // locations of subexpressions in the initialization. | |||
1030 | EmitExprAsInit(&l2r, &BlockFieldPseudoVar, | |||
1031 | MakeAddrLValue(blockField, type, AlignmentSource::Decl), | |||
1032 | /*captured by init*/ false); | |||
1033 | } | |||
1034 | ||||
1035 | // Push a cleanup for the capture if necessary. | |||
1036 | if (!blockInfo.NeedsCopyDispose) | |||
1037 | continue; | |||
1038 | ||||
1039 | // Ignore __block captures; there's nothing special in the on-stack block | |||
1040 | // that we need to do for them. | |||
1041 | if (CI.isByRef()) | |||
1042 | continue; | |||
1043 | ||||
1044 | // Ignore objects that aren't destructed. | |||
1045 | QualType::DestructionKind dtorKind = type.isDestructedType(); | |||
1046 | if (dtorKind == QualType::DK_none) | |||
1047 | continue; | |||
1048 | ||||
1049 | CodeGenFunction::Destroyer *destroyer; | |||
1050 | ||||
1051 | // Block captures count as local values and have imprecise semantics. | |||
1052 | // They also can't be arrays, so need to worry about that. | |||
1053 | // | |||
1054 | // For const-qualified captures, emit clang.arc.use to ensure the captured | |||
1055 | // object doesn't get released while we are still depending on its validity | |||
1056 | // within the block. | |||
1057 | if (type.isConstQualified() && | |||
1058 | type.getObjCLifetime() == Qualifiers::OCL_Strong && | |||
1059 | CGM.getCodeGenOpts().OptimizationLevel != 0) { | |||
1060 | assert(CGM.getLangOpts().ObjCAutoRefCount &&((void)0) | |||
1061 | "expected ObjC ARC to be enabled")((void)0); | |||
1062 | destroyer = emitARCIntrinsicUse; | |||
1063 | } else if (dtorKind == QualType::DK_objc_strong_lifetime) { | |||
1064 | destroyer = destroyARCStrongImprecise; | |||
1065 | } else { | |||
1066 | destroyer = getDestroyer(dtorKind); | |||
1067 | } | |||
1068 | ||||
1069 | CleanupKind cleanupKind = NormalCleanup; | |||
1070 | bool useArrayEHCleanup = needsEHCleanup(dtorKind); | |||
1071 | if (useArrayEHCleanup) | |||
1072 | cleanupKind = NormalAndEHCleanup; | |||
1073 | ||||
1074 | // Extend the lifetime of the capture to the end of the scope enclosing the | |||
1075 | // block expression except when the block decl is in the list of RetExpr's | |||
1076 | // cleanup objects, in which case its lifetime ends after the full | |||
1077 | // expression. | |||
1078 | auto IsBlockDeclInRetExpr = [&]() { | |||
1079 | auto *EWC = llvm::dyn_cast_or_null<ExprWithCleanups>(RetExpr); | |||
1080 | if (EWC) | |||
1081 | for (auto &C : EWC->getObjects()) | |||
1082 | if (auto *BD = C.dyn_cast<BlockDecl *>()) | |||
1083 | if (BD == blockDecl) | |||
1084 | return true; | |||
1085 | return false; | |||
1086 | }; | |||
1087 | ||||
1088 | if (IsBlockDeclInRetExpr()) | |||
1089 | pushDestroy(cleanupKind, blockField, type, destroyer, useArrayEHCleanup); | |||
1090 | else | |||
1091 | pushLifetimeExtendedDestroy(cleanupKind, blockField, type, destroyer, | |||
1092 | useArrayEHCleanup); | |||
1093 | } | |||
1094 | ||||
1095 | // Cast to the converted block-pointer type, which happens (somewhat | |||
1096 | // unfortunately) to be a pointer to function type. | |||
1097 | llvm::Value *result = Builder.CreatePointerCast( | |||
1098 | blockAddr.getPointer(), ConvertType(blockInfo.getBlockExpr()->getType())); | |||
1099 | ||||
1100 | if (IsOpenCL) { | |||
1101 | CGM.getOpenCLRuntime().recordBlockInfo(blockInfo.BlockExpression, InvokeFn, | |||
1102 | result); | |||
1103 | } | |||
1104 | ||||
1105 | return result; | |||
1106 | } | |||
1107 | ||||
1108 | ||||
1109 | llvm::Type *CodeGenModule::getBlockDescriptorType() { | |||
1110 | if (BlockDescriptorType) | |||
1111 | return BlockDescriptorType; | |||
1112 | ||||
1113 | llvm::Type *UnsignedLongTy = | |||
1114 | getTypes().ConvertType(getContext().UnsignedLongTy); | |||
1115 | ||||
1116 | // struct __block_descriptor { | |||
1117 | // unsigned long reserved; | |||
1118 | // unsigned long block_size; | |||
1119 | // | |||
1120 | // // later, the following will be added | |||
1121 | // | |||
1122 | // struct { | |||
1123 | // void (*copyHelper)(); | |||
1124 | // void (*copyHelper)(); | |||
1125 | // } helpers; // !!! optional | |||
1126 | // | |||
1127 | // const char *signature; // the block signature | |||
1128 | // const char *layout; // reserved | |||
1129 | // }; | |||
1130 | BlockDescriptorType = llvm::StructType::create( | |||
1131 | "struct.__block_descriptor", UnsignedLongTy, UnsignedLongTy); | |||
1132 | ||||
1133 | // Now form a pointer to that. | |||
1134 | unsigned AddrSpace = 0; | |||
1135 | if (getLangOpts().OpenCL) | |||
1136 | AddrSpace = getContext().getTargetAddressSpace(LangAS::opencl_constant); | |||
1137 | BlockDescriptorType = llvm::PointerType::get(BlockDescriptorType, AddrSpace); | |||
1138 | return BlockDescriptorType; | |||
1139 | } | |||
1140 | ||||
1141 | llvm::Type *CodeGenModule::getGenericBlockLiteralType() { | |||
1142 | if (GenericBlockLiteralType) | |||
1143 | return GenericBlockLiteralType; | |||
1144 | ||||
1145 | llvm::Type *BlockDescPtrTy = getBlockDescriptorType(); | |||
1146 | ||||
1147 | if (getLangOpts().OpenCL) { | |||
1148 | // struct __opencl_block_literal_generic { | |||
1149 | // int __size; | |||
1150 | // int __align; | |||
1151 | // __generic void *__invoke; | |||
1152 | // /* custom fields */ | |||
1153 | // }; | |||
1154 | SmallVector<llvm::Type *, 8> StructFields( | |||
1155 | {IntTy, IntTy, getOpenCLRuntime().getGenericVoidPointerType()}); | |||
1156 | if (auto *Helper = getTargetCodeGenInfo().getTargetOpenCLBlockHelper()) { | |||
1157 | for (auto I : Helper->getCustomFieldTypes()) | |||
1158 | StructFields.push_back(I); | |||
1159 | } | |||
1160 | GenericBlockLiteralType = llvm::StructType::create( | |||
1161 | StructFields, "struct.__opencl_block_literal_generic"); | |||
1162 | } else { | |||
1163 | // struct __block_literal_generic { | |||
1164 | // void *__isa; | |||
1165 | // int __flags; | |||
1166 | // int __reserved; | |||
1167 | // void (*__invoke)(void *); | |||
1168 | // struct __block_descriptor *__descriptor; | |||
1169 | // }; | |||
1170 | GenericBlockLiteralType = | |||
1171 | llvm::StructType::create("struct.__block_literal_generic", VoidPtrTy, | |||
1172 | IntTy, IntTy, VoidPtrTy, BlockDescPtrTy); | |||
1173 | } | |||
1174 | ||||
1175 | return GenericBlockLiteralType; | |||
1176 | } | |||
1177 | ||||
1178 | RValue CodeGenFunction::EmitBlockCallExpr(const CallExpr *E, | |||
1179 | ReturnValueSlot ReturnValue) { | |||
1180 | const auto *BPT = E->getCallee()->getType()->castAs<BlockPointerType>(); | |||
1181 | llvm::Value *BlockPtr = EmitScalarExpr(E->getCallee()); | |||
1182 | llvm::Type *GenBlockTy = CGM.getGenericBlockLiteralType(); | |||
1183 | llvm::Value *Func = nullptr; | |||
1184 | QualType FnType = BPT->getPointeeType(); | |||
1185 | ASTContext &Ctx = getContext(); | |||
1186 | CallArgList Args; | |||
1187 | ||||
1188 | if (getLangOpts().OpenCL) { | |||
1189 | // For OpenCL, BlockPtr is already casted to generic block literal. | |||
1190 | ||||
1191 | // First argument of a block call is a generic block literal casted to | |||
1192 | // generic void pointer, i.e. i8 addrspace(4)* | |||
1193 | llvm::Type *GenericVoidPtrTy = | |||
1194 | CGM.getOpenCLRuntime().getGenericVoidPointerType(); | |||
1195 | llvm::Value *BlockDescriptor = Builder.CreatePointerCast( | |||
1196 | BlockPtr, GenericVoidPtrTy); | |||
1197 | QualType VoidPtrQualTy = Ctx.getPointerType( | |||
1198 | Ctx.getAddrSpaceQualType(Ctx.VoidTy, LangAS::opencl_generic)); | |||
1199 | Args.add(RValue::get(BlockDescriptor), VoidPtrQualTy); | |||
1200 | // And the rest of the arguments. | |||
1201 | EmitCallArgs(Args, FnType->getAs<FunctionProtoType>(), E->arguments()); | |||
1202 | ||||
1203 | // We *can* call the block directly unless it is a function argument. | |||
1204 | if (!isa<ParmVarDecl>(E->getCalleeDecl())) | |||
1205 | Func = CGM.getOpenCLRuntime().getInvokeFunction(E->getCallee()); | |||
1206 | else { | |||
1207 | llvm::Value *FuncPtr = Builder.CreateStructGEP(GenBlockTy, BlockPtr, 2); | |||
1208 | Func = Builder.CreateAlignedLoad(GenericVoidPtrTy, FuncPtr, | |||
1209 | getPointerAlign()); | |||
1210 | } | |||
1211 | } else { | |||
1212 | // Bitcast the block literal to a generic block literal. | |||
1213 | BlockPtr = Builder.CreatePointerCast( | |||
1214 | BlockPtr, llvm::PointerType::get(GenBlockTy, 0), "block.literal"); | |||
1215 | // Get pointer to the block invoke function | |||
1216 | llvm::Value *FuncPtr = Builder.CreateStructGEP(GenBlockTy, BlockPtr, 3); | |||
1217 | ||||
1218 | // First argument is a block literal casted to a void pointer | |||
1219 | BlockPtr = Builder.CreatePointerCast(BlockPtr, VoidPtrTy); | |||
1220 | Args.add(RValue::get(BlockPtr), Ctx.VoidPtrTy); | |||
1221 | // And the rest of the arguments. | |||
1222 | EmitCallArgs(Args, FnType->getAs<FunctionProtoType>(), E->arguments()); | |||
1223 | ||||
1224 | // Load the function. | |||
1225 | Func = Builder.CreateAlignedLoad(VoidPtrTy, FuncPtr, getPointerAlign()); | |||
1226 | } | |||
1227 | ||||
1228 | const FunctionType *FuncTy = FnType->castAs<FunctionType>(); | |||
1229 | const CGFunctionInfo &FnInfo = | |||
1230 | CGM.getTypes().arrangeBlockFunctionCall(Args, FuncTy); | |||
1231 | ||||
1232 | // Cast the function pointer to the right type. | |||
1233 | llvm::Type *BlockFTy = CGM.getTypes().GetFunctionType(FnInfo); | |||
1234 | ||||
1235 | llvm::Type *BlockFTyPtr = llvm::PointerType::getUnqual(BlockFTy); | |||
1236 | Func = Builder.CreatePointerCast(Func, BlockFTyPtr); | |||
1237 | ||||
1238 | // Prepare the callee. | |||
1239 | CGCallee Callee(CGCalleeInfo(), Func); | |||
1240 | ||||
1241 | // And call the block. | |||
1242 | return EmitCall(FnInfo, Callee, ReturnValue, Args); | |||
1243 | } | |||
1244 | ||||
1245 | Address CodeGenFunction::GetAddrOfBlockDecl(const VarDecl *variable) { | |||
1246 | assert(BlockInfo && "evaluating block ref without block information?")((void)0); | |||
1247 | const CGBlockInfo::Capture &capture = BlockInfo->getCapture(variable); | |||
1248 | ||||
1249 | // Handle constant captures. | |||
1250 | if (capture.isConstant()) return LocalDeclMap.find(variable)->second; | |||
1251 | ||||
1252 | Address addr = Builder.CreateStructGEP(LoadBlockStruct(), capture.getIndex(), | |||
1253 | "block.capture.addr"); | |||
1254 | ||||
1255 | if (variable->isEscapingByref()) { | |||
1256 | // addr should be a void** right now. Load, then cast the result | |||
1257 | // to byref*. | |||
1258 | ||||
1259 | auto &byrefInfo = getBlockByrefInfo(variable); | |||
1260 | addr = Address(Builder.CreateLoad(addr), byrefInfo.ByrefAlignment); | |||
1261 | ||||
1262 | auto byrefPointerType = llvm::PointerType::get(byrefInfo.Type, 0); | |||
1263 | addr = Builder.CreateBitCast(addr, byrefPointerType, "byref.addr"); | |||
1264 | ||||
1265 | addr = emitBlockByrefAddress(addr, byrefInfo, /*follow*/ true, | |||
1266 | variable->getName()); | |||
1267 | } | |||
1268 | ||||
1269 | assert((!variable->isNonEscapingByref() ||((void)0) | |||
1270 | capture.fieldType()->isReferenceType()) &&((void)0) | |||
1271 | "the capture field of a non-escaping variable should have a "((void)0) | |||
1272 | "reference type")((void)0); | |||
1273 | if (capture.fieldType()->isReferenceType()) | |||
1274 | addr = EmitLoadOfReference(MakeAddrLValue(addr, capture.fieldType())); | |||
1275 | ||||
1276 | return addr; | |||
1277 | } | |||
1278 | ||||
1279 | void CodeGenModule::setAddrOfGlobalBlock(const BlockExpr *BE, | |||
1280 | llvm::Constant *Addr) { | |||
1281 | bool Ok = EmittedGlobalBlocks.insert(std::make_pair(BE, Addr)).second; | |||
1282 | (void)Ok; | |||
1283 | assert(Ok && "Trying to replace an already-existing global block!")((void)0); | |||
1284 | } | |||
1285 | ||||
1286 | llvm::Constant * | |||
1287 | CodeGenModule::GetAddrOfGlobalBlock(const BlockExpr *BE, | |||
1288 | StringRef Name) { | |||
1289 | if (llvm::Constant *Block = getAddrOfGlobalBlockIfEmitted(BE)) | |||
| ||||
1290 | return Block; | |||
1291 | ||||
1292 | CGBlockInfo blockInfo(BE->getBlockDecl(), Name); | |||
1293 | blockInfo.BlockExpression = BE; | |||
1294 | ||||
1295 | // Compute information about the layout, etc., of this block. | |||
1296 | computeBlockInfo(*this, nullptr, blockInfo); | |||
1297 | ||||
1298 | // Using that metadata, generate the actual block function. | |||
1299 | { | |||
1300 | CodeGenFunction::DeclMapTy LocalDeclMap; | |||
1301 | CodeGenFunction(*this).GenerateBlockFunction( | |||
1302 | GlobalDecl(), blockInfo, LocalDeclMap, | |||
1303 | /*IsLambdaConversionToBlock*/ false, /*BuildGlobalBlock*/ true); | |||
1304 | } | |||
1305 | ||||
1306 | return getAddrOfGlobalBlockIfEmitted(BE); | |||
1307 | } | |||
1308 | ||||
1309 | static llvm::Constant *buildGlobalBlock(CodeGenModule &CGM, | |||
1310 | const CGBlockInfo &blockInfo, | |||
1311 | llvm::Constant *blockFn) { | |||
1312 | assert(blockInfo.CanBeGlobal)((void)0); | |||
1313 | // Callers should detect this case on their own: calling this function | |||
1314 | // generally requires computing layout information, which is a waste of time | |||
1315 | // if we've already emitted this block. | |||
1316 | assert(!CGM.getAddrOfGlobalBlockIfEmitted(blockInfo.BlockExpression) &&((void)0) | |||
1317 | "Refusing to re-emit a global block.")((void)0); | |||
1318 | ||||
1319 | // Generate the constants for the block literal initializer. | |||
1320 | ConstantInitBuilder builder(CGM); | |||
1321 | auto fields = builder.beginStruct(); | |||
1322 | ||||
1323 | bool IsOpenCL = CGM.getLangOpts().OpenCL; | |||
1324 | bool IsWindows = CGM.getTarget().getTriple().isOSWindows(); | |||
1325 | if (!IsOpenCL) { | |||
1326 | // isa | |||
1327 | if (IsWindows) | |||
1328 | fields.addNullPointer(CGM.Int8PtrPtrTy); | |||
1329 | else | |||
1330 | fields.add(CGM.getNSConcreteGlobalBlock()); | |||
1331 | ||||
1332 | // __flags | |||
1333 | BlockFlags flags = BLOCK_IS_GLOBAL | BLOCK_HAS_SIGNATURE; | |||
1334 | if (blockInfo.UsesStret) | |||
1335 | flags |= BLOCK_USE_STRET; | |||
1336 | ||||
1337 | fields.addInt(CGM.IntTy, flags.getBitMask()); | |||
1338 | ||||
1339 | // Reserved | |||
1340 | fields.addInt(CGM.IntTy, 0); | |||
1341 | } else { | |||
1342 | fields.addInt(CGM.IntTy, blockInfo.BlockSize.getQuantity()); | |||
1343 | fields.addInt(CGM.IntTy, blockInfo.BlockAlign.getQuantity()); | |||
1344 | } | |||
1345 | ||||
1346 | // Function | |||
1347 | fields.add(blockFn); | |||
1348 | ||||
1349 | if (!IsOpenCL) { | |||
1350 | // Descriptor | |||
1351 | fields.add(buildBlockDescriptor(CGM, blockInfo)); | |||
1352 | } else if (auto *Helper = | |||
1353 | CGM.getTargetCodeGenInfo().getTargetOpenCLBlockHelper()) { | |||
1354 | for (auto I : Helper->getCustomFieldValues(CGM, blockInfo)) { | |||
1355 | fields.add(I); | |||
1356 | } | |||
1357 | } | |||
1358 | ||||
1359 | unsigned AddrSpace = 0; | |||
1360 | if (CGM.getContext().getLangOpts().OpenCL) | |||
1361 | AddrSpace = CGM.getContext().getTargetAddressSpace(LangAS::opencl_global); | |||
1362 | ||||
1363 | llvm::GlobalVariable *literal = fields.finishAndCreateGlobal( | |||
1364 | "__block_literal_global", blockInfo.BlockAlign, | |||
1365 | /*constant*/ !IsWindows, llvm::GlobalVariable::InternalLinkage, AddrSpace); | |||
1366 | ||||
1367 | literal->addAttribute("objc_arc_inert"); | |||
1368 | ||||
1369 | // Windows does not allow globals to be initialised to point to globals in | |||
1370 | // different DLLs. Any such variables must run code to initialise them. | |||
1371 | if (IsWindows) { | |||
1372 | auto *Init = llvm::Function::Create(llvm::FunctionType::get(CGM.VoidTy, | |||
1373 | {}), llvm::GlobalValue::InternalLinkage, ".block_isa_init", | |||
1374 | &CGM.getModule()); | |||
1375 | llvm::IRBuilder<> b(llvm::BasicBlock::Create(CGM.getLLVMContext(), "entry", | |||
1376 | Init)); | |||
1377 | b.CreateAlignedStore(CGM.getNSConcreteGlobalBlock(), | |||
1378 | b.CreateStructGEP(literal->getValueType(), literal, 0), | |||
1379 | CGM.getPointerAlign().getAsAlign()); | |||
1380 | b.CreateRetVoid(); | |||
1381 | // We can't use the normal LLVM global initialisation array, because we | |||
1382 | // need to specify that this runs early in library initialisation. | |||
1383 | auto *InitVar = new llvm::GlobalVariable(CGM.getModule(), Init->getType(), | |||
1384 | /*isConstant*/true, llvm::GlobalValue::InternalLinkage, | |||
1385 | Init, ".block_isa_init_ptr"); | |||
1386 | InitVar->setSection(".CRT$XCLa"); | |||
1387 | CGM.addUsedGlobal(InitVar); | |||
1388 | } | |||
1389 | ||||
1390 | // Return a constant of the appropriately-casted type. | |||
1391 | llvm::Type *RequiredType = | |||
1392 | CGM.getTypes().ConvertType(blockInfo.getBlockExpr()->getType()); | |||
1393 | llvm::Constant *Result = | |||
1394 | llvm::ConstantExpr::getPointerCast(literal, RequiredType); | |||
1395 | CGM.setAddrOfGlobalBlock(blockInfo.BlockExpression, Result); | |||
1396 | if (CGM.getContext().getLangOpts().OpenCL) | |||
1397 | CGM.getOpenCLRuntime().recordBlockInfo( | |||
1398 | blockInfo.BlockExpression, | |||
1399 | cast<llvm::Function>(blockFn->stripPointerCasts()), Result); | |||
1400 | return Result; | |||
1401 | } | |||
1402 | ||||
1403 | void CodeGenFunction::setBlockContextParameter(const ImplicitParamDecl *D, | |||
1404 | unsigned argNum, | |||
1405 | llvm::Value *arg) { | |||
1406 | assert(BlockInfo && "not emitting prologue of block invocation function?!")((void)0); | |||
1407 | ||||
1408 | // Allocate a stack slot like for any local variable to guarantee optimal | |||
1409 | // debug info at -O0. The mem2reg pass will eliminate it when optimizing. | |||
1410 | Address alloc = CreateMemTemp(D->getType(), D->getName() + ".addr"); | |||
1411 | Builder.CreateStore(arg, alloc); | |||
1412 | if (CGDebugInfo *DI = getDebugInfo()) { | |||
1413 | if (CGM.getCodeGenOpts().hasReducedDebugInfo()) { | |||
1414 | DI->setLocation(D->getLocation()); | |||
1415 | DI->EmitDeclareOfBlockLiteralArgVariable( | |||
1416 | *BlockInfo, D->getName(), argNum, | |||
1417 | cast<llvm::AllocaInst>(alloc.getPointer()), Builder); | |||
1418 | } | |||
1419 | } | |||
1420 | ||||
1421 | SourceLocation StartLoc = BlockInfo->getBlockExpr()->getBody()->getBeginLoc(); | |||
1422 | ApplyDebugLocation Scope(*this, StartLoc); | |||
1423 | ||||
1424 | // Instead of messing around with LocalDeclMap, just set the value | |||
1425 | // directly as BlockPointer. | |||
1426 | BlockPointer = Builder.CreatePointerCast( | |||
1427 | arg, | |||
1428 | BlockInfo->StructureType->getPointerTo( | |||
1429 | getContext().getLangOpts().OpenCL | |||
1430 | ? getContext().getTargetAddressSpace(LangAS::opencl_generic) | |||
1431 | : 0), | |||
1432 | "block"); | |||
1433 | } | |||
1434 | ||||
1435 | Address CodeGenFunction::LoadBlockStruct() { | |||
1436 | assert(BlockInfo && "not in a block invocation function!")((void)0); | |||
1437 | assert(BlockPointer && "no block pointer set!")((void)0); | |||
1438 | return Address(BlockPointer, BlockInfo->BlockAlign); | |||
1439 | } | |||
1440 | ||||
1441 | llvm::Function * | |||
1442 | CodeGenFunction::GenerateBlockFunction(GlobalDecl GD, | |||
1443 | const CGBlockInfo &blockInfo, | |||
1444 | const DeclMapTy &ldm, | |||
1445 | bool IsLambdaConversionToBlock, | |||
1446 | bool BuildGlobalBlock) { | |||
1447 | const BlockDecl *blockDecl = blockInfo.getBlockDecl(); | |||
1448 | ||||
1449 | CurGD = GD; | |||
1450 | ||||
1451 | CurEHLocation = blockInfo.getBlockExpr()->getEndLoc(); | |||
1452 | ||||
1453 | BlockInfo = &blockInfo; | |||
1454 | ||||
1455 | // Arrange for local static and local extern declarations to appear | |||
1456 | // to be local to this function as well, in case they're directly | |||
1457 | // referenced in a block. | |||
1458 | for (DeclMapTy::const_iterator i = ldm.begin(), e = ldm.end(); i != e; ++i) { | |||
1459 | const auto *var = dyn_cast<VarDecl>(i->first); | |||
1460 | if (var && !var->hasLocalStorage()) | |||
1461 | setAddrOfLocalVar(var, i->second); | |||
1462 | } | |||
1463 | ||||
1464 | // Begin building the function declaration. | |||
1465 | ||||
1466 | // Build the argument list. | |||
1467 | FunctionArgList args; | |||
1468 | ||||
1469 | // The first argument is the block pointer. Just take it as a void* | |||
1470 | // and cast it later. | |||
1471 | QualType selfTy = getContext().VoidPtrTy; | |||
1472 | ||||
1473 | // For OpenCL passed block pointer can be private AS local variable or | |||
1474 | // global AS program scope variable (for the case with and without captures). | |||
1475 | // Generic AS is used therefore to be able to accommodate both private and | |||
1476 | // generic AS in one implementation. | |||
1477 | if (getLangOpts().OpenCL) | |||
1478 | selfTy = getContext().getPointerType(getContext().getAddrSpaceQualType( | |||
1479 | getContext().VoidTy, LangAS::opencl_generic)); | |||
1480 | ||||
1481 | IdentifierInfo *II = &CGM.getContext().Idents.get(".block_descriptor"); | |||
1482 | ||||
1483 | ImplicitParamDecl SelfDecl(getContext(), const_cast<BlockDecl *>(blockDecl), | |||
1484 | SourceLocation(), II, selfTy, | |||
1485 | ImplicitParamDecl::ObjCSelf); | |||
1486 | args.push_back(&SelfDecl); | |||
1487 | ||||
1488 | // Now add the rest of the parameters. | |||
1489 | args.append(blockDecl->param_begin(), blockDecl->param_end()); | |||
1490 | ||||
1491 | // Create the function declaration. | |||
1492 | const FunctionProtoType *fnType = blockInfo.getBlockExpr()->getFunctionType(); | |||
1493 | const CGFunctionInfo &fnInfo = | |||
1494 | CGM.getTypes().arrangeBlockFunctionDeclaration(fnType, args); | |||
1495 | if (CGM.ReturnSlotInterferesWithArgs(fnInfo)) | |||
1496 | blockInfo.UsesStret = true; | |||
1497 | ||||
1498 | llvm::FunctionType *fnLLVMType = CGM.getTypes().GetFunctionType(fnInfo); | |||
1499 | ||||
1500 | StringRef name = CGM.getBlockMangledName(GD, blockDecl); | |||
1501 | llvm::Function *fn = llvm::Function::Create( | |||
1502 | fnLLVMType, llvm::GlobalValue::InternalLinkage, name, &CGM.getModule()); | |||
1503 | CGM.SetInternalFunctionAttributes(blockDecl, fn, fnInfo); | |||
1504 | ||||
1505 | if (BuildGlobalBlock) { | |||
1506 | auto GenVoidPtrTy = getContext().getLangOpts().OpenCL | |||
1507 | ? CGM.getOpenCLRuntime().getGenericVoidPointerType() | |||
1508 | : VoidPtrTy; | |||
1509 | buildGlobalBlock(CGM, blockInfo, | |||
1510 | llvm::ConstantExpr::getPointerCast(fn, GenVoidPtrTy)); | |||
1511 | } | |||
1512 | ||||
1513 | // Begin generating the function. | |||
1514 | StartFunction(blockDecl, fnType->getReturnType(), fn, fnInfo, args, | |||
1515 | blockDecl->getLocation(), | |||
1516 | blockInfo.getBlockExpr()->getBody()->getBeginLoc()); | |||
1517 | ||||
1518 | // Okay. Undo some of what StartFunction did. | |||
1519 | ||||
1520 | // At -O0 we generate an explicit alloca for the BlockPointer, so the RA | |||
1521 | // won't delete the dbg.declare intrinsics for captured variables. | |||
1522 | llvm::Value *BlockPointerDbgLoc = BlockPointer; | |||
1523 | if (CGM.getCodeGenOpts().OptimizationLevel == 0) { | |||
1524 | // Allocate a stack slot for it, so we can point the debugger to it | |||
1525 | Address Alloca = CreateTempAlloca(BlockPointer->getType(), | |||
1526 | getPointerAlign(), | |||
1527 | "block.addr"); | |||
1528 | // Set the DebugLocation to empty, so the store is recognized as a | |||
1529 | // frame setup instruction by llvm::DwarfDebug::beginFunction(). | |||
1530 | auto NL = ApplyDebugLocation::CreateEmpty(*this); | |||
1531 | Builder.CreateStore(BlockPointer, Alloca); | |||
1532 | BlockPointerDbgLoc = Alloca.getPointer(); | |||
1533 | } | |||
1534 | ||||
1535 | // If we have a C++ 'this' reference, go ahead and force it into | |||
1536 | // existence now. | |||
1537 | if (blockDecl->capturesCXXThis()) { | |||
1538 | Address addr = Builder.CreateStructGEP( | |||
1539 | LoadBlockStruct(), blockInfo.CXXThisIndex, "block.captured-this"); | |||
1540 | CXXThisValue = Builder.CreateLoad(addr, "this"); | |||
1541 | } | |||
1542 | ||||
1543 | // Also force all the constant captures. | |||
1544 | for (const auto &CI : blockDecl->captures()) { | |||
1545 | const VarDecl *variable = CI.getVariable(); | |||
1546 | const CGBlockInfo::Capture &capture = blockInfo.getCapture(variable); | |||
1547 | if (!capture.isConstant()) continue; | |||
1548 | ||||
1549 | CharUnits align = getContext().getDeclAlign(variable); | |||
1550 | Address alloca = | |||
1551 | CreateMemTemp(variable->getType(), align, "block.captured-const"); | |||
1552 | ||||
1553 | Builder.CreateStore(capture.getConstant(), alloca); | |||
1554 | ||||
1555 | setAddrOfLocalVar(variable, alloca); | |||
1556 | } | |||
1557 | ||||
1558 | // Save a spot to insert the debug information for all the DeclRefExprs. | |||
1559 | llvm::BasicBlock *entry = Builder.GetInsertBlock(); | |||
1560 | llvm::BasicBlock::iterator entry_ptr = Builder.GetInsertPoint(); | |||
1561 | --entry_ptr; | |||
1562 | ||||
1563 | if (IsLambdaConversionToBlock) | |||
1564 | EmitLambdaBlockInvokeBody(); | |||
1565 | else { | |||
1566 | PGO.assignRegionCounters(GlobalDecl(blockDecl), fn); | |||
1567 | incrementProfileCounter(blockDecl->getBody()); | |||
1568 | EmitStmt(blockDecl->getBody()); | |||
1569 | } | |||
1570 | ||||
1571 | // Remember where we were... | |||
1572 | llvm::BasicBlock *resume = Builder.GetInsertBlock(); | |||
1573 | ||||
1574 | // Go back to the entry. | |||
1575 | ++entry_ptr; | |||
1576 | Builder.SetInsertPoint(entry, entry_ptr); | |||
1577 | ||||
1578 | // Emit debug information for all the DeclRefExprs. | |||
1579 | // FIXME: also for 'this' | |||
1580 | if (CGDebugInfo *DI = getDebugInfo()) { | |||
1581 | for (const auto &CI : blockDecl->captures()) { | |||
1582 | const VarDecl *variable = CI.getVariable(); | |||
1583 | DI->EmitLocation(Builder, variable->getLocation()); | |||
1584 | ||||
1585 | if (CGM.getCodeGenOpts().hasReducedDebugInfo()) { | |||
1586 | const CGBlockInfo::Capture &capture = blockInfo.getCapture(variable); | |||
1587 | if (capture.isConstant()) { | |||
1588 | auto addr = LocalDeclMap.find(variable)->second; | |||
1589 | (void)DI->EmitDeclareOfAutoVariable(variable, addr.getPointer(), | |||
1590 | Builder); | |||
1591 | continue; | |||
1592 | } | |||
1593 | ||||
1594 | DI->EmitDeclareOfBlockDeclRefVariable( | |||
1595 | variable, BlockPointerDbgLoc, Builder, blockInfo, | |||
1596 | entry_ptr == entry->end() ? nullptr : &*entry_ptr); | |||
1597 | } | |||
1598 | } | |||
1599 | // Recover location if it was changed in the above loop. | |||
1600 | DI->EmitLocation(Builder, | |||
1601 | cast<CompoundStmt>(blockDecl->getBody())->getRBracLoc()); | |||
1602 | } | |||
1603 | ||||
1604 | // And resume where we left off. | |||
1605 | if (resume == nullptr) | |||
1606 | Builder.ClearInsertionPoint(); | |||
1607 | else | |||
1608 | Builder.SetInsertPoint(resume); | |||
1609 | ||||
1610 | FinishFunction(cast<CompoundStmt>(blockDecl->getBody())->getRBracLoc()); | |||
1611 | ||||
1612 | return fn; | |||
1613 | } | |||
1614 | ||||
1615 | static std::pair<BlockCaptureEntityKind, BlockFieldFlags> | |||
1616 | computeCopyInfoForBlockCapture(const BlockDecl::Capture &CI, QualType T, | |||
1617 | const LangOptions &LangOpts) { | |||
1618 | if (CI.getCopyExpr()) { | |||
1619 | assert(!CI.isByRef())((void)0); | |||
1620 | // don't bother computing flags | |||
1621 | return std::make_pair(BlockCaptureEntityKind::CXXRecord, BlockFieldFlags()); | |||
1622 | } | |||
1623 | BlockFieldFlags Flags; | |||
1624 | if (CI.isEscapingByref()) { | |||
1625 | Flags = BLOCK_FIELD_IS_BYREF; | |||
1626 | if (T.isObjCGCWeak()) | |||
1627 | Flags |= BLOCK_FIELD_IS_WEAK; | |||
1628 | return std::make_pair(BlockCaptureEntityKind::BlockObject, Flags); | |||
1629 | } | |||
1630 | ||||
1631 | Flags = BLOCK_FIELD_IS_OBJECT; | |||
1632 | bool isBlockPointer = T->isBlockPointerType(); | |||
1633 | if (isBlockPointer) | |||
1634 | Flags = BLOCK_FIELD_IS_BLOCK; | |||
1635 | ||||
1636 | switch (T.isNonTrivialToPrimitiveCopy()) { | |||
1637 | case QualType::PCK_Struct: | |||
1638 | return std::make_pair(BlockCaptureEntityKind::NonTrivialCStruct, | |||
1639 | BlockFieldFlags()); | |||
1640 | case QualType::PCK_ARCWeak: | |||
1641 | // We need to register __weak direct captures with the runtime. | |||
1642 | return std::make_pair(BlockCaptureEntityKind::ARCWeak, Flags); | |||
1643 | case QualType::PCK_ARCStrong: | |||
1644 | // We need to retain the copied value for __strong direct captures. | |||
1645 | // If it's a block pointer, we have to copy the block and assign that to | |||
1646 | // the destination pointer, so we might as well use _Block_object_assign. | |||
1647 | // Otherwise we can avoid that. | |||
1648 | return std::make_pair(!isBlockPointer ? BlockCaptureEntityKind::ARCStrong | |||
1649 | : BlockCaptureEntityKind::BlockObject, | |||
1650 | Flags); | |||
1651 | case QualType::PCK_Trivial: | |||
1652 | case QualType::PCK_VolatileTrivial: { | |||
1653 | if (!T->isObjCRetainableType()) | |||
1654 | // For all other types, the memcpy is fine. | |||
1655 | return std::make_pair(BlockCaptureEntityKind::None, BlockFieldFlags()); | |||
1656 | ||||
1657 | // Special rules for ARC captures: | |||
1658 | Qualifiers QS = T.getQualifiers(); | |||
1659 | ||||
1660 | // Non-ARC captures of retainable pointers are strong and | |||
1661 | // therefore require a call to _Block_object_assign. | |||
1662 | if (!QS.getObjCLifetime() && !LangOpts.ObjCAutoRefCount) | |||
1663 | return std::make_pair(BlockCaptureEntityKind::BlockObject, Flags); | |||
1664 | ||||
1665 | // Otherwise the memcpy is fine. | |||
1666 | return std::make_pair(BlockCaptureEntityKind::None, BlockFieldFlags()); | |||
1667 | } | |||
1668 | } | |||
1669 | llvm_unreachable("after exhaustive PrimitiveCopyKind switch")__builtin_unreachable(); | |||
1670 | } | |||
1671 | ||||
1672 | static std::pair<BlockCaptureEntityKind, BlockFieldFlags> | |||
1673 | computeDestroyInfoForBlockCapture(const BlockDecl::Capture &CI, QualType T, | |||
1674 | const LangOptions &LangOpts); | |||
1675 | ||||
1676 | /// Find the set of block captures that need to be explicitly copied or destroy. | |||
1677 | static void findBlockCapturedManagedEntities( | |||
1678 | const CGBlockInfo &BlockInfo, const LangOptions &LangOpts, | |||
1679 | SmallVectorImpl<BlockCaptureManagedEntity> &ManagedCaptures) { | |||
1680 | for (const auto &CI : BlockInfo.getBlockDecl()->captures()) { | |||
1681 | const VarDecl *Variable = CI.getVariable(); | |||
1682 | const CGBlockInfo::Capture &Capture = BlockInfo.getCapture(Variable); | |||
1683 | if (Capture.isConstant()) | |||
1684 | continue; | |||
1685 | ||||
1686 | QualType VT = Capture.fieldType(); | |||
1687 | auto CopyInfo = computeCopyInfoForBlockCapture(CI, VT, LangOpts); | |||
1688 | auto DisposeInfo = computeDestroyInfoForBlockCapture(CI, VT, LangOpts); | |||
1689 | if (CopyInfo.first != BlockCaptureEntityKind::None || | |||
1690 | DisposeInfo.first != BlockCaptureEntityKind::None) | |||
1691 | ManagedCaptures.emplace_back(CopyInfo.first, DisposeInfo.first, | |||
1692 | CopyInfo.second, DisposeInfo.second, CI, | |||
1693 | Capture); | |||
1694 | } | |||
1695 | ||||
1696 | // Sort the captures by offset. | |||
1697 | llvm::sort(ManagedCaptures); | |||
1698 | } | |||
1699 | ||||
1700 | namespace { | |||
1701 | /// Release a __block variable. | |||
1702 | struct CallBlockRelease final : EHScopeStack::Cleanup { | |||
1703 | Address Addr; | |||
1704 | BlockFieldFlags FieldFlags; | |||
1705 | bool LoadBlockVarAddr, CanThrow; | |||
1706 | ||||
1707 | CallBlockRelease(Address Addr, BlockFieldFlags Flags, bool LoadValue, | |||
1708 | bool CT) | |||
1709 | : Addr(Addr), FieldFlags(Flags), LoadBlockVarAddr(LoadValue), | |||
1710 | CanThrow(CT) {} | |||
1711 | ||||
1712 | void Emit(CodeGenFunction &CGF, Flags flags) override { | |||
1713 | llvm::Value *BlockVarAddr; | |||
1714 | if (LoadBlockVarAddr) { | |||
1715 | BlockVarAddr = CGF.Builder.CreateLoad(Addr); | |||
1716 | BlockVarAddr = CGF.Builder.CreateBitCast(BlockVarAddr, CGF.VoidPtrTy); | |||
1717 | } else { | |||
1718 | BlockVarAddr = Addr.getPointer(); | |||
1719 | } | |||
1720 | ||||
1721 | CGF.BuildBlockRelease(BlockVarAddr, FieldFlags, CanThrow); | |||
1722 | } | |||
1723 | }; | |||
1724 | } // end anonymous namespace | |||
1725 | ||||
1726 | /// Check if \p T is a C++ class that has a destructor that can throw. | |||
1727 | bool CodeGenFunction::cxxDestructorCanThrow(QualType T) { | |||
1728 | if (const auto *RD = T->getAsCXXRecordDecl()) | |||
1729 | if (const CXXDestructorDecl *DD = RD->getDestructor()) | |||
1730 | return DD->getType()->castAs<FunctionProtoType>()->canThrow(); | |||
1731 | return false; | |||
1732 | } | |||
1733 | ||||
1734 | // Return a string that has the information about a capture. | |||
1735 | static std::string getBlockCaptureStr(const BlockCaptureManagedEntity &E, | |||
1736 | CaptureStrKind StrKind, | |||
1737 | CharUnits BlockAlignment, | |||
1738 | CodeGenModule &CGM) { | |||
1739 | std::string Str; | |||
1740 | ASTContext &Ctx = CGM.getContext(); | |||
1741 | const BlockDecl::Capture &CI = *E.CI; | |||
1742 | QualType CaptureTy = CI.getVariable()->getType(); | |||
1743 | ||||
1744 | BlockCaptureEntityKind Kind; | |||
1745 | BlockFieldFlags Flags; | |||
1746 | ||||
1747 | // CaptureStrKind::Merged should be passed only when the operations and the | |||
1748 | // flags are the same for copy and dispose. | |||
1749 | assert((StrKind != CaptureStrKind::Merged ||((void)0) | |||
1750 | (E.CopyKind == E.DisposeKind && E.CopyFlags == E.DisposeFlags)) &&((void)0) | |||
1751 | "different operations and flags")((void)0); | |||
1752 | ||||
1753 | if (StrKind == CaptureStrKind::DisposeHelper) { | |||
1754 | Kind = E.DisposeKind; | |||
1755 | Flags = E.DisposeFlags; | |||
1756 | } else { | |||
1757 | Kind = E.CopyKind; | |||
1758 | Flags = E.CopyFlags; | |||
1759 | } | |||
1760 | ||||
1761 | switch (Kind) { | |||
1762 | case BlockCaptureEntityKind::CXXRecord: { | |||
1763 | Str += "c"; | |||
1764 | SmallString<256> TyStr; | |||
1765 | llvm::raw_svector_ostream Out(TyStr); | |||
1766 | CGM.getCXXABI().getMangleContext().mangleTypeName(CaptureTy, Out); | |||
1767 | Str += llvm::to_string(TyStr.size()) + TyStr.c_str(); | |||
1768 | break; | |||
1769 | } | |||
1770 | case BlockCaptureEntityKind::ARCWeak: | |||
1771 | Str += "w"; | |||
1772 | break; | |||
1773 | case BlockCaptureEntityKind::ARCStrong: | |||
1774 | Str += "s"; | |||
1775 | break; | |||
1776 | case BlockCaptureEntityKind::BlockObject: { | |||
1777 | const VarDecl *Var = CI.getVariable(); | |||
1778 | unsigned F = Flags.getBitMask(); | |||
1779 | if (F & BLOCK_FIELD_IS_BYREF) { | |||
1780 | Str += "r"; | |||
1781 | if (F & BLOCK_FIELD_IS_WEAK) | |||
1782 | Str += "w"; | |||
1783 | else { | |||
1784 | // If CaptureStrKind::Merged is passed, check both the copy expression | |||
1785 | // and the destructor. | |||
1786 | if (StrKind != CaptureStrKind::DisposeHelper) { | |||
1787 | if (Ctx.getBlockVarCopyInit(Var).canThrow()) | |||
1788 | Str += "c"; | |||
1789 | } | |||
1790 | if (StrKind != CaptureStrKind::CopyHelper) { | |||
1791 | if (CodeGenFunction::cxxDestructorCanThrow(CaptureTy)) | |||
1792 | Str += "d"; | |||
1793 | } | |||
1794 | } | |||
1795 | } else { | |||
1796 | assert((F & BLOCK_FIELD_IS_OBJECT) && "unexpected flag value")((void)0); | |||
1797 | if (F == BLOCK_FIELD_IS_BLOCK) | |||
1798 | Str += "b"; | |||
1799 | else | |||
1800 | Str += "o"; | |||
1801 | } | |||
1802 | break; | |||
1803 | } | |||
1804 | case BlockCaptureEntityKind::NonTrivialCStruct: { | |||
1805 | bool IsVolatile = CaptureTy.isVolatileQualified(); | |||
1806 | CharUnits Alignment = | |||
1807 | BlockAlignment.alignmentAtOffset(E.Capture->getOffset()); | |||
1808 | ||||
1809 | Str += "n"; | |||
1810 | std::string FuncStr; | |||
1811 | if (StrKind == CaptureStrKind::DisposeHelper) | |||
1812 | FuncStr = CodeGenFunction::getNonTrivialDestructorStr( | |||
1813 | CaptureTy, Alignment, IsVolatile, Ctx); | |||
1814 | else | |||
1815 | // If CaptureStrKind::Merged is passed, use the copy constructor string. | |||
1816 | // It has all the information that the destructor string has. | |||
1817 | FuncStr = CodeGenFunction::getNonTrivialCopyConstructorStr( | |||
1818 | CaptureTy, Alignment, IsVolatile, Ctx); | |||
1819 | // The underscore is necessary here because non-trivial copy constructor | |||
1820 | // and destructor strings can start with a number. | |||
1821 | Str += llvm::to_string(FuncStr.size()) + "_" + FuncStr; | |||
1822 | break; | |||
1823 | } | |||
1824 | case BlockCaptureEntityKind::None: | |||
1825 | break; | |||
1826 | } | |||
1827 | ||||
1828 | return Str; | |||
1829 | } | |||
1830 | ||||
1831 | static std::string getCopyDestroyHelperFuncName( | |||
1832 | const SmallVectorImpl<BlockCaptureManagedEntity> &Captures, | |||
1833 | CharUnits BlockAlignment, CaptureStrKind StrKind, CodeGenModule &CGM) { | |||
1834 | assert((StrKind == CaptureStrKind::CopyHelper ||((void)0) | |||
1835 | StrKind == CaptureStrKind::DisposeHelper) &&((void)0) | |||
1836 | "unexpected CaptureStrKind")((void)0); | |||
1837 | std::string Name = StrKind == CaptureStrKind::CopyHelper | |||
1838 | ? "__copy_helper_block_" | |||
1839 | : "__destroy_helper_block_"; | |||
1840 | if (CGM.getLangOpts().Exceptions) | |||
1841 | Name += "e"; | |||
1842 | if (CGM.getCodeGenOpts().ObjCAutoRefCountExceptions) | |||
1843 | Name += "a"; | |||
1844 | Name += llvm::to_string(BlockAlignment.getQuantity()) + "_"; | |||
1845 | ||||
1846 | for (const BlockCaptureManagedEntity &E : Captures) { | |||
1847 | Name += llvm::to_string(E.Capture->getOffset().getQuantity()); | |||
1848 | Name += getBlockCaptureStr(E, StrKind, BlockAlignment, CGM); | |||
1849 | } | |||
1850 | ||||
1851 | return Name; | |||
1852 | } | |||
1853 | ||||
1854 | static void pushCaptureCleanup(BlockCaptureEntityKind CaptureKind, | |||
1855 | Address Field, QualType CaptureType, | |||
1856 | BlockFieldFlags Flags, bool ForCopyHelper, | |||
1857 | VarDecl *Var, CodeGenFunction &CGF) { | |||
1858 | bool EHOnly = ForCopyHelper; | |||
1859 | ||||
1860 | switch (CaptureKind) { | |||
1861 | case BlockCaptureEntityKind::CXXRecord: | |||
1862 | case BlockCaptureEntityKind::ARCWeak: | |||
1863 | case BlockCaptureEntityKind::NonTrivialCStruct: | |||
1864 | case BlockCaptureEntityKind::ARCStrong: { | |||
1865 | if (CaptureType.isDestructedType() && | |||
1866 | (!EHOnly || CGF.needsEHCleanup(CaptureType.isDestructedType()))) { | |||
1867 | CodeGenFunction::Destroyer *Destroyer = | |||
1868 | CaptureKind == BlockCaptureEntityKind::ARCStrong | |||
1869 | ? CodeGenFunction::destroyARCStrongImprecise | |||
1870 | : CGF.getDestroyer(CaptureType.isDestructedType()); | |||
1871 | CleanupKind Kind = | |||
1872 | EHOnly ? EHCleanup | |||
1873 | : CGF.getCleanupKind(CaptureType.isDestructedType()); | |||
1874 | CGF.pushDestroy(Kind, Field, CaptureType, Destroyer, Kind & EHCleanup); | |||
1875 | } | |||
1876 | break; | |||
1877 | } | |||
1878 | case BlockCaptureEntityKind::BlockObject: { | |||
1879 | if (!EHOnly || CGF.getLangOpts().Exceptions) { | |||
1880 | CleanupKind Kind = EHOnly ? EHCleanup : NormalAndEHCleanup; | |||
1881 | // Calls to _Block_object_dispose along the EH path in the copy helper | |||
1882 | // function don't throw as newly-copied __block variables always have a | |||
1883 | // reference count of 2. | |||
1884 | bool CanThrow = | |||
1885 | !ForCopyHelper && CGF.cxxDestructorCanThrow(CaptureType); | |||
1886 | CGF.enterByrefCleanup(Kind, Field, Flags, /*LoadBlockVarAddr*/ true, | |||
1887 | CanThrow); | |||
1888 | } | |||
1889 | break; | |||
1890 | } | |||
1891 | case BlockCaptureEntityKind::None: | |||
1892 | break; | |||
1893 | } | |||
1894 | } | |||
1895 | ||||
1896 | static void setBlockHelperAttributesVisibility(bool CapturesNonExternalType, | |||
1897 | llvm::Function *Fn, | |||
1898 | const CGFunctionInfo &FI, | |||
1899 | CodeGenModule &CGM) { | |||
1900 | if (CapturesNonExternalType) { | |||
1901 | CGM.SetInternalFunctionAttributes(GlobalDecl(), Fn, FI); | |||
1902 | } else { | |||
1903 | Fn->setVisibility(llvm::GlobalValue::HiddenVisibility); | |||
1904 | Fn->setUnnamedAddr(llvm::GlobalValue::UnnamedAddr::Global); | |||
1905 | CGM.SetLLVMFunctionAttributes(GlobalDecl(), FI, Fn, /*IsThunk=*/false); | |||
1906 | CGM.SetLLVMFunctionAttributesForDefinition(nullptr, Fn); | |||
1907 | } | |||
1908 | } | |||
1909 | /// Generate the copy-helper function for a block closure object: | |||
1910 | /// static void block_copy_helper(block_t *dst, block_t *src); | |||
1911 | /// The runtime will have previously initialized 'dst' by doing a | |||
1912 | /// bit-copy of 'src'. | |||
1913 | /// | |||
1914 | /// Note that this copies an entire block closure object to the heap; | |||
1915 | /// it should not be confused with a 'byref copy helper', which moves | |||
1916 | /// the contents of an individual __block variable to the heap. | |||
1917 | llvm::Constant * | |||
1918 | CodeGenFunction::GenerateCopyHelperFunction(const CGBlockInfo &blockInfo) { | |||
1919 | SmallVector<BlockCaptureManagedEntity, 4> CopiedCaptures; | |||
1920 | findBlockCapturedManagedEntities(blockInfo, getLangOpts(), CopiedCaptures); | |||
1921 | std::string FuncName = | |||
1922 | getCopyDestroyHelperFuncName(CopiedCaptures, blockInfo.BlockAlign, | |||
1923 | CaptureStrKind::CopyHelper, CGM); | |||
1924 | ||||
1925 | if (llvm::GlobalValue *Func = CGM.getModule().getNamedValue(FuncName)) | |||
1926 | return llvm::ConstantExpr::getBitCast(Func, VoidPtrTy); | |||
1927 | ||||
1928 | ASTContext &C = getContext(); | |||
1929 | ||||
1930 | QualType ReturnTy = C.VoidTy; | |||
1931 | ||||
1932 | FunctionArgList args; | |||
1933 | ImplicitParamDecl DstDecl(C, C.VoidPtrTy, ImplicitParamDecl::Other); | |||
1934 | args.push_back(&DstDecl); | |||
1935 | ImplicitParamDecl SrcDecl(C, C.VoidPtrTy, ImplicitParamDecl::Other); | |||
1936 | args.push_back(&SrcDecl); | |||
1937 | ||||
1938 | const CGFunctionInfo &FI = | |||
1939 | CGM.getTypes().arrangeBuiltinFunctionDeclaration(ReturnTy, args); | |||
1940 | ||||
1941 | // FIXME: it would be nice if these were mergeable with things with | |||
1942 | // identical semantics. | |||
1943 | llvm::FunctionType *LTy = CGM.getTypes().GetFunctionType(FI); | |||
1944 | ||||
1945 | llvm::Function *Fn = | |||
1946 | llvm::Function::Create(LTy, llvm::GlobalValue::LinkOnceODRLinkage, | |||
1947 | FuncName, &CGM.getModule()); | |||
1948 | if (CGM.supportsCOMDAT()) | |||
1949 | Fn->setComdat(CGM.getModule().getOrInsertComdat(FuncName)); | |||
1950 | ||||
1951 | SmallVector<QualType, 2> ArgTys; | |||
1952 | ArgTys.push_back(C.VoidPtrTy); | |||
1953 | ArgTys.push_back(C.VoidPtrTy); | |||
1954 | ||||
1955 | setBlockHelperAttributesVisibility(blockInfo.CapturesNonExternalType, Fn, FI, | |||
1956 | CGM); | |||
1957 | StartFunction(GlobalDecl(), ReturnTy, Fn, FI, args); | |||
1958 | auto AL = ApplyDebugLocation::CreateArtificial(*this); | |||
1959 | ||||
1960 | llvm::Type *structPtrTy = blockInfo.StructureType->getPointerTo(); | |||
1961 | ||||
1962 | Address src = GetAddrOfLocalVar(&SrcDecl); | |||
1963 | src = Address(Builder.CreateLoad(src), blockInfo.BlockAlign); | |||
1964 | src = Builder.CreateBitCast(src, structPtrTy, "block.source"); | |||
1965 | ||||
1966 | Address dst = GetAddrOfLocalVar(&DstDecl); | |||
1967 | dst = Address(Builder.CreateLoad(dst), blockInfo.BlockAlign); | |||
1968 | dst = Builder.CreateBitCast(dst, structPtrTy, "block.dest"); | |||
1969 | ||||
1970 | for (const auto &CopiedCapture : CopiedCaptures) { | |||
1971 | const BlockDecl::Capture &CI = *CopiedCapture.CI; | |||
1972 | const CGBlockInfo::Capture &capture = *CopiedCapture.Capture; | |||
1973 | QualType captureType = CI.getVariable()->getType(); | |||
1974 | BlockFieldFlags flags = CopiedCapture.CopyFlags; | |||
1975 | ||||
1976 | unsigned index = capture.getIndex(); | |||
1977 | Address srcField = Builder.CreateStructGEP(src, index); | |||
1978 | Address dstField = Builder.CreateStructGEP(dst, index); | |||
1979 | ||||
1980 | switch (CopiedCapture.CopyKind) { | |||
1981 | case BlockCaptureEntityKind::CXXRecord: | |||
1982 | // If there's an explicit copy expression, we do that. | |||
1983 | assert(CI.getCopyExpr() && "copy expression for variable is missing")((void)0); | |||
1984 | EmitSynthesizedCXXCopyCtor(dstField, srcField, CI.getCopyExpr()); | |||
1985 | break; | |||
1986 | case BlockCaptureEntityKind::ARCWeak: | |||
1987 | EmitARCCopyWeak(dstField, srcField); | |||
1988 | break; | |||
1989 | case BlockCaptureEntityKind::NonTrivialCStruct: { | |||
1990 | // If this is a C struct that requires non-trivial copy construction, | |||
1991 | // emit a call to its copy constructor. | |||
1992 | QualType varType = CI.getVariable()->getType(); | |||
1993 | callCStructCopyConstructor(MakeAddrLValue(dstField, varType), | |||
1994 | MakeAddrLValue(srcField, varType)); | |||
1995 | break; | |||
1996 | } | |||
1997 | case BlockCaptureEntityKind::ARCStrong: { | |||
1998 | llvm::Value *srcValue = Builder.CreateLoad(srcField, "blockcopy.src"); | |||
1999 | // At -O0, store null into the destination field (so that the | |||
2000 | // storeStrong doesn't over-release) and then call storeStrong. | |||
2001 | // This is a workaround to not having an initStrong call. | |||
2002 | if (CGM.getCodeGenOpts().OptimizationLevel == 0) { | |||
2003 | auto *ty = cast<llvm::PointerType>(srcValue->getType()); | |||
2004 | llvm::Value *null = llvm::ConstantPointerNull::get(ty); | |||
2005 | Builder.CreateStore(null, dstField); | |||
2006 | EmitARCStoreStrongCall(dstField, srcValue, true); | |||
2007 | ||||
2008 | // With optimization enabled, take advantage of the fact that | |||
2009 | // the blocks runtime guarantees a memcpy of the block data, and | |||
2010 | // just emit a retain of the src field. | |||
2011 | } else { | |||
2012 | EmitARCRetainNonBlock(srcValue); | |||
2013 | ||||
2014 | // Unless EH cleanup is required, we don't need this anymore, so kill | |||
2015 | // it. It's not quite worth the annoyance to avoid creating it in the | |||
2016 | // first place. | |||
2017 | if (!needsEHCleanup(captureType.isDestructedType())) | |||
2018 | cast<llvm::Instruction>(dstField.getPointer())->eraseFromParent(); | |||
2019 | } | |||
2020 | break; | |||
2021 | } | |||
2022 | case BlockCaptureEntityKind::BlockObject: { | |||
2023 | llvm::Value *srcValue = Builder.CreateLoad(srcField, "blockcopy.src"); | |||
2024 | srcValue = Builder.CreateBitCast(srcValue, VoidPtrTy); | |||
2025 | llvm::Value *dstAddr = | |||
2026 | Builder.CreateBitCast(dstField.getPointer(), VoidPtrTy); | |||
2027 | llvm::Value *args[] = { | |||
2028 | dstAddr, srcValue, llvm::ConstantInt::get(Int32Ty, flags.getBitMask()) | |||
2029 | }; | |||
2030 | ||||
2031 | if (CI.isByRef() && C.getBlockVarCopyInit(CI.getVariable()).canThrow()) | |||
2032 | EmitRuntimeCallOrInvoke(CGM.getBlockObjectAssign(), args); | |||
2033 | else | |||
2034 | EmitNounwindRuntimeCall(CGM.getBlockObjectAssign(), args); | |||
2035 | break; | |||
2036 | } | |||
2037 | case BlockCaptureEntityKind::None: | |||
2038 | continue; | |||
2039 | } | |||
2040 | ||||
2041 | // Ensure that we destroy the copied object if an exception is thrown later | |||
2042 | // in the helper function. | |||
2043 | pushCaptureCleanup(CopiedCapture.CopyKind, dstField, captureType, flags, | |||
2044 | /*ForCopyHelper*/ true, CI.getVariable(), *this); | |||
2045 | } | |||
2046 | ||||
2047 | FinishFunction(); | |||
2048 | ||||
2049 | return llvm::ConstantExpr::getBitCast(Fn, VoidPtrTy); | |||
2050 | } | |||
2051 | ||||
2052 | static BlockFieldFlags | |||
2053 | getBlockFieldFlagsForObjCObjectPointer(const BlockDecl::Capture &CI, | |||
2054 | QualType T) { | |||
2055 | BlockFieldFlags Flags = BLOCK_FIELD_IS_OBJECT; | |||
2056 | if (T->isBlockPointerType()) | |||
2057 | Flags = BLOCK_FIELD_IS_BLOCK; | |||
2058 | return Flags; | |||
2059 | } | |||
2060 | ||||
2061 | static std::pair<BlockCaptureEntityKind, BlockFieldFlags> | |||
2062 | computeDestroyInfoForBlockCapture(const BlockDecl::Capture &CI, QualType T, | |||
2063 | const LangOptions &LangOpts) { | |||
2064 | if (CI.isEscapingByref()) { | |||
2065 | BlockFieldFlags Flags = BLOCK_FIELD_IS_BYREF; | |||
2066 | if (T.isObjCGCWeak()) | |||
2067 | Flags |= BLOCK_FIELD_IS_WEAK; | |||
2068 | return std::make_pair(BlockCaptureEntityKind::BlockObject, Flags); | |||
2069 | } | |||
2070 | ||||
2071 | switch (T.isDestructedType()) { | |||
2072 | case QualType::DK_cxx_destructor: | |||
2073 | return std::make_pair(BlockCaptureEntityKind::CXXRecord, BlockFieldFlags()); | |||
2074 | case QualType::DK_objc_strong_lifetime: | |||
2075 | // Use objc_storeStrong for __strong direct captures; the | |||
2076 | // dynamic tools really like it when we do this. | |||
2077 | return std::make_pair(BlockCaptureEntityKind::ARCStrong, | |||
2078 | getBlockFieldFlagsForObjCObjectPointer(CI, T)); | |||
2079 | case QualType::DK_objc_weak_lifetime: | |||
2080 | // Support __weak direct captures. | |||
2081 | return std::make_pair(BlockCaptureEntityKind::ARCWeak, | |||
2082 | getBlockFieldFlagsForObjCObjectPointer(CI, T)); | |||
2083 | case QualType::DK_nontrivial_c_struct: | |||
2084 | return std::make_pair(BlockCaptureEntityKind::NonTrivialCStruct, | |||
2085 | BlockFieldFlags()); | |||
2086 | case QualType::DK_none: { | |||
2087 | // Non-ARC captures are strong, and we need to use _Block_object_dispose. | |||
2088 | if (T->isObjCRetainableType() && !T.getQualifiers().hasObjCLifetime() && | |||
2089 | !LangOpts.ObjCAutoRefCount) | |||
2090 | return std::make_pair(BlockCaptureEntityKind::BlockObject, | |||
2091 | getBlockFieldFlagsForObjCObjectPointer(CI, T)); | |||
2092 | // Otherwise, we have nothing to do. | |||
2093 | return std::make_pair(BlockCaptureEntityKind::None, BlockFieldFlags()); | |||
2094 | } | |||
2095 | } | |||
2096 | llvm_unreachable("after exhaustive DestructionKind switch")__builtin_unreachable(); | |||
2097 | } | |||
2098 | ||||
2099 | /// Generate the destroy-helper function for a block closure object: | |||
2100 | /// static void block_destroy_helper(block_t *theBlock); | |||
2101 | /// | |||
2102 | /// Note that this destroys a heap-allocated block closure object; | |||
2103 | /// it should not be confused with a 'byref destroy helper', which | |||
2104 | /// destroys the heap-allocated contents of an individual __block | |||
2105 | /// variable. | |||
2106 | llvm::Constant * | |||
2107 | CodeGenFunction::GenerateDestroyHelperFunction(const CGBlockInfo &blockInfo) { | |||
2108 | SmallVector<BlockCaptureManagedEntity, 4> DestroyedCaptures; | |||
2109 | findBlockCapturedManagedEntities(blockInfo, getLangOpts(), DestroyedCaptures); | |||
2110 | std::string FuncName = | |||
2111 | getCopyDestroyHelperFuncName(DestroyedCaptures, blockInfo.BlockAlign, | |||
2112 | CaptureStrKind::DisposeHelper, CGM); | |||
2113 | ||||
2114 | if (llvm::GlobalValue *Func = CGM.getModule().getNamedValue(FuncName)) | |||
2115 | return llvm::ConstantExpr::getBitCast(Func, VoidPtrTy); | |||
2116 | ||||
2117 | ASTContext &C = getContext(); | |||
2118 | ||||
2119 | QualType ReturnTy = C.VoidTy; | |||
2120 | ||||
2121 | FunctionArgList args; | |||
2122 | ImplicitParamDecl SrcDecl(C, C.VoidPtrTy, ImplicitParamDecl::Other); | |||
2123 | args.push_back(&SrcDecl); | |||
2124 | ||||
2125 | const CGFunctionInfo &FI = | |||
2126 | CGM.getTypes().arrangeBuiltinFunctionDeclaration(ReturnTy, args); | |||
2127 | ||||
2128 | // FIXME: We'd like to put these into a mergable by content, with | |||
2129 | // internal linkage. | |||
2130 | llvm::FunctionType *LTy = CGM.getTypes().GetFunctionType(FI); | |||
2131 | ||||
2132 | llvm::Function *Fn = | |||
2133 | llvm::Function::Create(LTy, llvm::GlobalValue::LinkOnceODRLinkage, | |||
2134 | FuncName, &CGM.getModule()); | |||
2135 | if (CGM.supportsCOMDAT()) | |||
2136 | Fn->setComdat(CGM.getModule().getOrInsertComdat(FuncName)); | |||
2137 | ||||
2138 | SmallVector<QualType, 1> ArgTys; | |||
2139 | ArgTys.push_back(C.VoidPtrTy); | |||
2140 | ||||
2141 | setBlockHelperAttributesVisibility(blockInfo.CapturesNonExternalType, Fn, FI, | |||
2142 | CGM); | |||
2143 | StartFunction(GlobalDecl(), ReturnTy, Fn, FI, args); | |||
2144 | markAsIgnoreThreadCheckingAtRuntime(Fn); | |||
2145 | ||||
2146 | auto AL = ApplyDebugLocation::CreateArtificial(*this); | |||
2147 | ||||
2148 | llvm::Type *structPtrTy = blockInfo.StructureType->getPointerTo(); | |||
2149 | ||||
2150 | Address src = GetAddrOfLocalVar(&SrcDecl); | |||
2151 | src = Address(Builder.CreateLoad(src), blockInfo.BlockAlign); | |||
2152 | src = Builder.CreateBitCast(src, structPtrTy, "block"); | |||
2153 | ||||
2154 | CodeGenFunction::RunCleanupsScope cleanups(*this); | |||
2155 | ||||
2156 | for (const auto &DestroyedCapture : DestroyedCaptures) { | |||
2157 | const BlockDecl::Capture &CI = *DestroyedCapture.CI; | |||
2158 | const CGBlockInfo::Capture &capture = *DestroyedCapture.Capture; | |||
2159 | BlockFieldFlags flags = DestroyedCapture.DisposeFlags; | |||
2160 | ||||
2161 | Address srcField = Builder.CreateStructGEP(src, capture.getIndex()); | |||
2162 | ||||
2163 | pushCaptureCleanup(DestroyedCapture.DisposeKind, srcField, | |||
2164 | CI.getVariable()->getType(), flags, | |||
2165 | /*ForCopyHelper*/ false, CI.getVariable(), *this); | |||
2166 | } | |||
2167 | ||||
2168 | cleanups.ForceCleanup(); | |||
2169 | ||||
2170 | FinishFunction(); | |||
2171 | ||||
2172 | return llvm::ConstantExpr::getBitCast(Fn, VoidPtrTy); | |||
2173 | } | |||
2174 | ||||
2175 | namespace { | |||
2176 | ||||
2177 | /// Emits the copy/dispose helper functions for a __block object of id type. | |||
2178 | class ObjectByrefHelpers final : public BlockByrefHelpers { | |||
2179 | BlockFieldFlags Flags; | |||
2180 | ||||
2181 | public: | |||
2182 | ObjectByrefHelpers(CharUnits alignment, BlockFieldFlags flags) | |||
2183 | : BlockByrefHelpers(alignment), Flags(flags) {} | |||
2184 | ||||
2185 | void emitCopy(CodeGenFunction &CGF, Address destField, | |||
2186 | Address srcField) override { | |||
2187 | destField = CGF.Builder.CreateBitCast(destField, CGF.VoidPtrTy); | |||
2188 | ||||
2189 | srcField = CGF.Builder.CreateBitCast(srcField, CGF.VoidPtrPtrTy); | |||
2190 | llvm::Value *srcValue = CGF.Builder.CreateLoad(srcField); | |||
2191 | ||||
2192 | unsigned flags = (Flags | BLOCK_BYREF_CALLER).getBitMask(); | |||
2193 | ||||
2194 | llvm::Value *flagsVal = llvm::ConstantInt::get(CGF.Int32Ty, flags); | |||
2195 | llvm::FunctionCallee fn = CGF.CGM.getBlockObjectAssign(); | |||
2196 | ||||
2197 | llvm::Value *args[] = { destField.getPointer(), srcValue, flagsVal }; | |||
2198 | CGF.EmitNounwindRuntimeCall(fn, args); | |||
2199 | } | |||
2200 | ||||
2201 | void emitDispose(CodeGenFunction &CGF, Address field) override { | |||
2202 | field = CGF.Builder.CreateBitCast(field, CGF.Int8PtrTy->getPointerTo(0)); | |||
2203 | llvm::Value *value = CGF.Builder.CreateLoad(field); | |||
2204 | ||||
2205 | CGF.BuildBlockRelease(value, Flags | BLOCK_BYREF_CALLER, false); | |||
2206 | } | |||
2207 | ||||
2208 | void profileImpl(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &id) const override { | |||
2209 | id.AddInteger(Flags.getBitMask()); | |||
2210 | } | |||
2211 | }; | |||
2212 | ||||
2213 | /// Emits the copy/dispose helpers for an ARC __block __weak variable. | |||
2214 | class ARCWeakByrefHelpers final : public BlockByrefHelpers { | |||
2215 | public: | |||
2216 | ARCWeakByrefHelpers(CharUnits alignment) : BlockByrefHelpers(alignment) {} | |||
2217 | ||||
2218 | void emitCopy(CodeGenFunction &CGF, Address destField, | |||
2219 | Address srcField) override { | |||
2220 | CGF.EmitARCMoveWeak(destField, srcField); | |||
2221 | } | |||
2222 | ||||
2223 | void emitDispose(CodeGenFunction &CGF, Address field) override { | |||
2224 | CGF.EmitARCDestroyWeak(field); | |||
2225 | } | |||
2226 | ||||
2227 | void profileImpl(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &id) const override { | |||
2228 | // 0 is distinguishable from all pointers and byref flags | |||
2229 | id.AddInteger(0); | |||
2230 | } | |||
2231 | }; | |||
2232 | ||||
2233 | /// Emits the copy/dispose helpers for an ARC __block __strong variable | |||
2234 | /// that's not of block-pointer type. | |||
2235 | class ARCStrongByrefHelpers final : public BlockByrefHelpers { | |||
2236 | public: | |||
2237 | ARCStrongByrefHelpers(CharUnits alignment) : BlockByrefHelpers(alignment) {} | |||
2238 | ||||
2239 | void emitCopy(CodeGenFunction &CGF, Address destField, | |||
2240 | Address srcField) override { | |||
2241 | // Do a "move" by copying the value and then zeroing out the old | |||
2242 | // variable. | |||
2243 | ||||
2244 | llvm::Value *value = CGF.Builder.CreateLoad(srcField); | |||
2245 | ||||
2246 | llvm::Value *null = | |||
2247 | llvm::ConstantPointerNull::get(cast<llvm::PointerType>(value->getType())); | |||
2248 | ||||
2249 | if (CGF.CGM.getCodeGenOpts().OptimizationLevel == 0) { | |||
2250 | CGF.Builder.CreateStore(null, destField); | |||
2251 | CGF.EmitARCStoreStrongCall(destField, value, /*ignored*/ true); | |||
2252 | CGF.EmitARCStoreStrongCall(srcField, null, /*ignored*/ true); | |||
2253 | return; | |||
2254 | } | |||
2255 | CGF.Builder.CreateStore(value, destField); | |||
2256 | CGF.Builder.CreateStore(null, srcField); | |||
2257 | } | |||
2258 | ||||
2259 | void emitDispose(CodeGenFunction &CGF, Address field) override { | |||
2260 | CGF.EmitARCDestroyStrong(field, ARCImpreciseLifetime); | |||
2261 | } | |||
2262 | ||||
2263 | void profileImpl(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &id) const override { | |||
2264 | // 1 is distinguishable from all pointers and byref flags | |||
2265 | id.AddInteger(1); | |||
2266 | } | |||
2267 | }; | |||
2268 | ||||
2269 | /// Emits the copy/dispose helpers for an ARC __block __strong | |||
2270 | /// variable that's of block-pointer type. | |||
2271 | class ARCStrongBlockByrefHelpers final : public BlockByrefHelpers { | |||
2272 | public: | |||
2273 | ARCStrongBlockByrefHelpers(CharUnits alignment) | |||
2274 | : BlockByrefHelpers(alignment) {} | |||
2275 | ||||
2276 | void emitCopy(CodeGenFunction &CGF, Address destField, | |||
2277 | Address srcField) override { | |||
2278 | // Do the copy with objc_retainBlock; that's all that | |||
2279 | // _Block_object_assign would do anyway, and we'd have to pass the | |||
2280 | // right arguments to make sure it doesn't get no-op'ed. | |||
2281 | llvm::Value *oldValue = CGF.Builder.CreateLoad(srcField); | |||
2282 | llvm::Value *copy = CGF.EmitARCRetainBlock(oldValue, /*mandatory*/ true); | |||
2283 | CGF.Builder.CreateStore(copy, destField); | |||
2284 | } | |||
2285 | ||||
2286 | void emitDispose(CodeGenFunction &CGF, Address field) override { | |||
2287 | CGF.EmitARCDestroyStrong(field, ARCImpreciseLifetime); | |||
2288 | } | |||
2289 | ||||
2290 | void profileImpl(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &id) const override { | |||
2291 | // 2 is distinguishable from all pointers and byref flags | |||
2292 | id.AddInteger(2); | |||
2293 | } | |||
2294 | }; | |||
2295 | ||||
2296 | /// Emits the copy/dispose helpers for a __block variable with a | |||
2297 | /// nontrivial copy constructor or destructor. | |||
2298 | class CXXByrefHelpers final : public BlockByrefHelpers { | |||
2299 | QualType VarType; | |||
2300 | const Expr *CopyExpr; | |||
2301 | ||||
2302 | public: | |||
2303 | CXXByrefHelpers(CharUnits alignment, QualType type, | |||
2304 | const Expr *copyExpr) | |||
2305 | : BlockByrefHelpers(alignment), VarType(type), CopyExpr(copyExpr) {} | |||
2306 | ||||
2307 | bool needsCopy() const override { return CopyExpr != nullptr; } | |||
2308 | void emitCopy(CodeGenFunction &CGF, Address destField, | |||
2309 | Address srcField) override { | |||
2310 | if (!CopyExpr) return; | |||
2311 | CGF.EmitSynthesizedCXXCopyCtor(destField, srcField, CopyExpr); | |||
2312 | } | |||
2313 | ||||
2314 | void emitDispose(CodeGenFunction &CGF, Address field) override { | |||
2315 | EHScopeStack::stable_iterator cleanupDepth = CGF.EHStack.stable_begin(); | |||
2316 | CGF.PushDestructorCleanup(VarType, field); | |||
2317 | CGF.PopCleanupBlocks(cleanupDepth); | |||
2318 | } | |||
2319 | ||||
2320 | void profileImpl(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &id) const override { | |||
2321 | id.AddPointer(VarType.getCanonicalType().getAsOpaquePtr()); | |||
2322 | } | |||
2323 | }; | |||
2324 | ||||
2325 | /// Emits the copy/dispose helpers for a __block variable that is a non-trivial | |||
2326 | /// C struct. | |||
2327 | class NonTrivialCStructByrefHelpers final : public BlockByrefHelpers { | |||
2328 | QualType VarType; | |||
2329 | ||||
2330 | public: | |||
2331 | NonTrivialCStructByrefHelpers(CharUnits alignment, QualType type) | |||
2332 | : BlockByrefHelpers(alignment), VarType(type) {} | |||
2333 | ||||
2334 | void emitCopy(CodeGenFunction &CGF, Address destField, | |||
2335 | Address srcField) override { | |||
2336 | CGF.callCStructMoveConstructor(CGF.MakeAddrLValue(destField, VarType), | |||
2337 | CGF.MakeAddrLValue(srcField, VarType)); | |||
2338 | } | |||
2339 | ||||
2340 | bool needsDispose() const override { | |||
2341 | return VarType.isDestructedType(); | |||
2342 | } | |||
2343 | ||||
2344 | void emitDispose(CodeGenFunction &CGF, Address field) override { | |||
2345 | EHScopeStack::stable_iterator cleanupDepth = CGF.EHStack.stable_begin(); | |||
2346 | CGF.pushDestroy(VarType.isDestructedType(), field, VarType); | |||
2347 | CGF.PopCleanupBlocks(cleanupDepth); | |||
2348 | } | |||
2349 | ||||
2350 | void profileImpl(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &id) const override { | |||
2351 | id.AddPointer(VarType.getCanonicalType().getAsOpaquePtr()); | |||
2352 | } | |||
2353 | }; | |||
2354 | } // end anonymous namespace | |||
2355 | ||||
2356 | static llvm::Constant * | |||
2357 | generateByrefCopyHelper(CodeGenFunction &CGF, const BlockByrefInfo &byrefInfo, | |||
2358 | BlockByrefHelpers &generator) { | |||
2359 | ASTContext &Context = CGF.getContext(); | |||
2360 | ||||
2361 | QualType ReturnTy = Context.VoidTy; | |||
2362 | ||||
2363 | FunctionArgList args; | |||
2364 | ImplicitParamDecl Dst(Context, Context.VoidPtrTy, ImplicitParamDecl::Other); | |||
2365 | args.push_back(&Dst); | |||
2366 | ||||
2367 | ImplicitParamDecl Src(Context, Context.VoidPtrTy, ImplicitParamDecl::Other); | |||
2368 | args.push_back(&Src); | |||
2369 | ||||
2370 | const CGFunctionInfo &FI = | |||
2371 | CGF.CGM.getTypes().arrangeBuiltinFunctionDeclaration(ReturnTy, args); | |||
2372 | ||||
2373 | llvm::FunctionType *LTy = CGF.CGM.getTypes().GetFunctionType(FI); | |||
2374 | ||||
2375 | // FIXME: We'd like to put these into a mergable by content, with | |||
2376 | // internal linkage. | |||
2377 | llvm::Function *Fn = | |||
2378 | llvm::Function::Create(LTy, llvm::GlobalValue::InternalLinkage, | |||
2379 | "__Block_byref_object_copy_", &CGF.CGM.getModule()); | |||
2380 | ||||
2381 | SmallVector<QualType, 2> ArgTys; | |||
2382 | ArgTys.push_back(Context.VoidPtrTy); | |||
2383 | ArgTys.push_back(Context.VoidPtrTy); | |||
2384 | ||||
2385 | CGF.CGM.SetInternalFunctionAttributes(GlobalDecl(), Fn, FI); | |||
2386 | ||||
2387 | CGF.StartFunction(GlobalDecl(), ReturnTy, Fn, FI, args); | |||
2388 | // Create a scope with an artificial location for the body of this function. | |||
2389 | auto AL = ApplyDebugLocation::CreateArtificial(CGF); | |||
2390 | ||||
2391 | if (generator.needsCopy()) { | |||
2392 | llvm::Type *byrefPtrType = byrefInfo.Type->getPointerTo(0); | |||
2393 | ||||
2394 | // dst->x | |||
2395 | Address destField = CGF.GetAddrOfLocalVar(&Dst); | |||
2396 | destField = Address(CGF.Builder.CreateLoad(destField), | |||
2397 | byrefInfo.ByrefAlignment); | |||
2398 | destField = CGF.Builder.CreateBitCast(destField, byrefPtrType); | |||
2399 | destField = CGF.emitBlockByrefAddress(destField, byrefInfo, false, | |||
2400 | "dest-object"); | |||
2401 | ||||
2402 | // src->x | |||
2403 | Address srcField = CGF.GetAddrOfLocalVar(&Src); | |||
2404 | srcField = Address(CGF.Builder.CreateLoad(srcField), | |||
2405 | byrefInfo.ByrefAlignment); | |||
2406 | srcField = CGF.Builder.CreateBitCast(srcField, byrefPtrType); | |||
2407 | srcField = CGF.emitBlockByrefAddress(srcField, byrefInfo, false, | |||
2408 | "src-object"); | |||
2409 | ||||
2410 | generator.emitCopy(CGF, destField, srcField); | |||
2411 | } | |||
2412 | ||||
2413 | CGF.FinishFunction(); | |||
2414 | ||||
2415 | return llvm::ConstantExpr::getBitCast(Fn, CGF.Int8PtrTy); | |||
2416 | } | |||
2417 | ||||
2418 | /// Build the copy helper for a __block variable. | |||
2419 | static llvm::Constant *buildByrefCopyHelper(CodeGenModule &CGM, | |||
2420 | const BlockByrefInfo &byrefInfo, | |||
2421 | BlockByrefHelpers &generator) { | |||
2422 | CodeGenFunction CGF(CGM); | |||
2423 | return generateByrefCopyHelper(CGF, byrefInfo, generator); | |||
2424 | } | |||
2425 | ||||
2426 | /// Generate code for a __block variable's dispose helper. | |||
2427 | static llvm::Constant * | |||
2428 | generateByrefDisposeHelper(CodeGenFunction &CGF, | |||
2429 | const BlockByrefInfo &byrefInfo, | |||
2430 | BlockByrefHelpers &generator) { | |||
2431 | ASTContext &Context = CGF.getContext(); | |||
2432 | QualType R = Context.VoidTy; | |||
2433 | ||||
2434 | FunctionArgList args; | |||
2435 | ImplicitParamDecl Src(CGF.getContext(), Context.VoidPtrTy, | |||
2436 | ImplicitParamDecl::Other); | |||
2437 | args.push_back(&Src); | |||
2438 | ||||
2439 | const CGFunctionInfo &FI = | |||
2440 | CGF.CGM.getTypes().arrangeBuiltinFunctionDeclaration(R, args); | |||
2441 | ||||
2442 | llvm::FunctionType *LTy = CGF.CGM.getTypes().GetFunctionType(FI); | |||
2443 | ||||
2444 | // FIXME: We'd like to put these into a mergable by content, with | |||
2445 | // internal linkage. | |||
2446 | llvm::Function *Fn = | |||
2447 | llvm::Function::Create(LTy, llvm::GlobalValue::InternalLinkage, | |||
2448 | "__Block_byref_object_dispose_", | |||
2449 | &CGF.CGM.getModule()); | |||
2450 | ||||
2451 | SmallVector<QualType, 1> ArgTys; | |||
2452 | ArgTys.push_back(Context.VoidPtrTy); | |||
2453 | ||||
2454 | CGF.CGM.SetInternalFunctionAttributes(GlobalDecl(), Fn, FI); | |||
2455 | ||||
2456 | CGF.StartFunction(GlobalDecl(), R, Fn, FI, args); | |||
2457 | // Create a scope with an artificial location for the body of this function. | |||
2458 | auto AL = ApplyDebugLocation::CreateArtificial(CGF); | |||
2459 | ||||
2460 | if (generator.needsDispose()) { | |||
2461 | Address addr = CGF.GetAddrOfLocalVar(&Src); | |||
2462 | addr = Address(CGF.Builder.CreateLoad(addr), byrefInfo.ByrefAlignment); | |||
2463 | auto byrefPtrType = byrefInfo.Type->getPointerTo(0); | |||
2464 | addr = CGF.Builder.CreateBitCast(addr, byrefPtrType); | |||
2465 | addr = CGF.emitBlockByrefAddress(addr, byrefInfo, false, "object"); | |||
2466 | ||||
2467 | generator.emitDispose(CGF, addr); | |||
2468 | } | |||
2469 | ||||
2470 | CGF.FinishFunction(); | |||
2471 | ||||
2472 | return llvm::ConstantExpr::getBitCast(Fn, CGF.Int8PtrTy); | |||
2473 | } | |||
2474 | ||||
2475 | /// Build the dispose helper for a __block variable. | |||
2476 | static llvm::Constant *buildByrefDisposeHelper(CodeGenModule &CGM, | |||
2477 | const BlockByrefInfo &byrefInfo, | |||
2478 | BlockByrefHelpers &generator) { | |||
2479 | CodeGenFunction CGF(CGM); | |||
2480 | return generateByrefDisposeHelper(CGF, byrefInfo, generator); | |||
2481 | } | |||
2482 | ||||
2483 | /// Lazily build the copy and dispose helpers for a __block variable | |||
2484 | /// with the given information. | |||
2485 | template <class T> | |||
2486 | static T *buildByrefHelpers(CodeGenModule &CGM, const BlockByrefInfo &byrefInfo, | |||
2487 | T &&generator) { | |||
2488 | llvm::FoldingSetNodeID id; | |||
2489 | generator.Profile(id); | |||
2490 | ||||
2491 | void *insertPos; | |||
2492 | BlockByrefHelpers *node | |||
2493 | = CGM.ByrefHelpersCache.FindNodeOrInsertPos(id, insertPos); | |||
2494 | if (node) return static_cast<T*>(node); | |||
2495 | ||||
2496 | generator.CopyHelper = buildByrefCopyHelper(CGM, byrefInfo, generator); | |||
2497 | generator.DisposeHelper = buildByrefDisposeHelper(CGM, byrefInfo, generator); | |||
2498 | ||||
2499 | T *copy = new (CGM.getContext()) T(std::forward<T>(generator)); | |||
2500 | CGM.ByrefHelpersCache.InsertNode(copy, insertPos); | |||
2501 | return copy; | |||
2502 | } | |||
2503 | ||||
2504 | /// Build the copy and dispose helpers for the given __block variable | |||
2505 | /// emission. Places the helpers in the global cache. Returns null | |||
2506 | /// if no helpers are required. | |||
2507 | BlockByrefHelpers * | |||
2508 | CodeGenFunction::buildByrefHelpers(llvm::StructType &byrefType, | |||
2509 | const AutoVarEmission &emission) { | |||
2510 | const VarDecl &var = *emission.Variable; | |||
2511 | assert(var.isEscapingByref() &&((void)0) | |||
2512 | "only escaping __block variables need byref helpers")((void)0); | |||
2513 | ||||
2514 | QualType type = var.getType(); | |||
2515 | ||||
2516 | auto &byrefInfo = getBlockByrefInfo(&var); | |||
2517 | ||||
2518 | // The alignment we care about for the purposes of uniquing byref | |||
2519 | // helpers is the alignment of the actual byref value field. | |||
2520 | CharUnits valueAlignment = | |||
2521 | byrefInfo.ByrefAlignment.alignmentAtOffset(byrefInfo.FieldOffset); | |||
2522 | ||||
2523 | if (const CXXRecordDecl *record = type->getAsCXXRecordDecl()) { | |||
2524 | const Expr *copyExpr = | |||
2525 | CGM.getContext().getBlockVarCopyInit(&var).getCopyExpr(); | |||
2526 | if (!copyExpr && record->hasTrivialDestructor()) return nullptr; | |||
2527 | ||||
2528 | return ::buildByrefHelpers( | |||
2529 | CGM, byrefInfo, CXXByrefHelpers(valueAlignment, type, copyExpr)); | |||
2530 | } | |||
2531 | ||||
2532 | // If type is a non-trivial C struct type that is non-trivial to | |||
2533 | // destructly move or destroy, build the copy and dispose helpers. | |||
2534 | if (type.isNonTrivialToPrimitiveDestructiveMove() == QualType::PCK_Struct || | |||
2535 | type.isDestructedType() == QualType::DK_nontrivial_c_struct) | |||
2536 | return ::buildByrefHelpers( | |||
2537 | CGM, byrefInfo, NonTrivialCStructByrefHelpers(valueAlignment, type)); | |||
2538 | ||||
2539 | // Otherwise, if we don't have a retainable type, there's nothing to do. | |||
2540 | // that the runtime does extra copies. | |||
2541 | if (!type->isObjCRetainableType()) return nullptr; | |||
2542 | ||||
2543 | Qualifiers qs = type.getQualifiers(); | |||
2544 | ||||
2545 | // If we have lifetime, that dominates. | |||
2546 | if (Qualifiers::ObjCLifetime lifetime = qs.getObjCLifetime()) { | |||
2547 | switch (lifetime) { | |||
2548 | case Qualifiers::OCL_None: llvm_unreachable("impossible")__builtin_unreachable(); | |||
2549 | ||||
2550 | // These are just bits as far as the runtime is concerned. | |||
2551 | case Qualifiers::OCL_ExplicitNone: | |||
2552 | case Qualifiers::OCL_Autoreleasing: | |||
2553 | return nullptr; | |||
2554 | ||||
2555 | // Tell the runtime that this is ARC __weak, called by the | |||
2556 | // byref routines. | |||
2557 | case Qualifiers::OCL_Weak: | |||
2558 | return ::buildByrefHelpers(CGM, byrefInfo, | |||
2559 | ARCWeakByrefHelpers(valueAlignment)); | |||
2560 | ||||
2561 | // ARC __strong __block variables need to be retained. | |||
2562 | case Qualifiers::OCL_Strong: | |||
2563 | // Block pointers need to be copied, and there's no direct | |||
2564 | // transfer possible. | |||
2565 | if (type->isBlockPointerType()) { | |||
2566 | return ::buildByrefHelpers(CGM, byrefInfo, | |||
2567 | ARCStrongBlockByrefHelpers(valueAlignment)); | |||
2568 | ||||
2569 | // Otherwise, we transfer ownership of the retain from the stack | |||
2570 | // to the heap. | |||
2571 | } else { | |||
2572 | return ::buildByrefHelpers(CGM, byrefInfo, | |||
2573 | ARCStrongByrefHelpers(valueAlignment)); | |||
2574 | } | |||
2575 | } | |||
2576 | llvm_unreachable("fell out of lifetime switch!")__builtin_unreachable(); | |||
2577 | } | |||
2578 | ||||
2579 | BlockFieldFlags flags; | |||
2580 | if (type->isBlockPointerType()) { | |||
2581 | flags |= BLOCK_FIELD_IS_BLOCK; | |||
2582 | } else if (CGM.getContext().isObjCNSObjectType(type) || | |||
2583 | type->isObjCObjectPointerType()) { | |||
2584 | flags |= BLOCK_FIELD_IS_OBJECT; | |||
2585 | } else { | |||
2586 | return nullptr; | |||
2587 | } | |||
2588 | ||||
2589 | if (type.isObjCGCWeak()) | |||
2590 | flags |= BLOCK_FIELD_IS_WEAK; | |||
2591 | ||||
2592 | return ::buildByrefHelpers(CGM, byrefInfo, | |||
2593 | ObjectByrefHelpers(valueAlignment, flags)); | |||
2594 | } | |||
2595 | ||||
2596 | Address CodeGenFunction::emitBlockByrefAddress(Address baseAddr, | |||
2597 | const VarDecl *var, | |||
2598 | bool followForward) { | |||
2599 | auto &info = getBlockByrefInfo(var); | |||
2600 | return emitBlockByrefAddress(baseAddr, info, followForward, var->getName()); | |||
2601 | } | |||
2602 | ||||
2603 | Address CodeGenFunction::emitBlockByrefAddress(Address baseAddr, | |||
2604 | const BlockByrefInfo &info, | |||
2605 | bool followForward, | |||
2606 | const llvm::Twine &name) { | |||
2607 | // Chase the forwarding address if requested. | |||
2608 | if (followForward) { | |||
2609 | Address forwardingAddr = Builder.CreateStructGEP(baseAddr, 1, "forwarding"); | |||
2610 | baseAddr = Address(Builder.CreateLoad(forwardingAddr), info.ByrefAlignment); | |||
2611 | } | |||
2612 | ||||
2613 | return Builder.CreateStructGEP(baseAddr, info.FieldIndex, name); | |||
2614 | } | |||
2615 | ||||
2616 | /// BuildByrefInfo - This routine changes a __block variable declared as T x | |||
2617 | /// into: | |||
2618 | /// | |||
2619 | /// struct { | |||
2620 | /// void *__isa; | |||
2621 | /// void *__forwarding; | |||
2622 | /// int32_t __flags; | |||
2623 | /// int32_t __size; | |||
2624 | /// void *__copy_helper; // only if needed | |||
2625 | /// void *__destroy_helper; // only if needed | |||
2626 | /// void *__byref_variable_layout;// only if needed | |||
2627 | /// char padding[X]; // only if needed | |||
2628 | /// T x; | |||
2629 | /// } x | |||
2630 | /// | |||
2631 | const BlockByrefInfo &CodeGenFunction::getBlockByrefInfo(const VarDecl *D) { | |||
2632 | auto it = BlockByrefInfos.find(D); | |||
2633 | if (it != BlockByrefInfos.end()) | |||
2634 | return it->second; | |||
2635 | ||||
2636 | llvm::StructType *byrefType = | |||
2637 | llvm::StructType::create(getLLVMContext(), | |||
2638 | "struct.__block_byref_" + D->getNameAsString()); | |||
2639 | ||||
2640 | QualType Ty = D->getType(); | |||
2641 | ||||
2642 | CharUnits size; | |||
2643 | SmallVector<llvm::Type *, 8> types; | |||
2644 | ||||
2645 | // void *__isa; | |||
2646 | types.push_back(Int8PtrTy); | |||
2647 | size += getPointerSize(); | |||
2648 | ||||
2649 | // void *__forwarding; | |||
2650 | types.push_back(llvm::PointerType::getUnqual(byrefType)); | |||
2651 | size += getPointerSize(); | |||
2652 | ||||
2653 | // int32_t __flags; | |||
2654 | types.push_back(Int32Ty); | |||
2655 | size += CharUnits::fromQuantity(4); | |||
2656 | ||||
2657 | // int32_t __size; | |||
2658 | types.push_back(Int32Ty); | |||
2659 | size += CharUnits::fromQuantity(4); | |||
2660 | ||||
2661 | // Note that this must match *exactly* the logic in buildByrefHelpers. | |||
2662 | bool hasCopyAndDispose = getContext().BlockRequiresCopying(Ty, D); | |||
2663 | if (hasCopyAndDispose) { | |||
2664 | /// void *__copy_helper; | |||
2665 | types.push_back(Int8PtrTy); | |||
2666 | size += getPointerSize(); | |||
2667 | ||||
2668 | /// void *__destroy_helper; | |||
2669 | types.push_back(Int8PtrTy); | |||
2670 | size += getPointerSize(); | |||
2671 | } | |||
2672 | ||||
2673 | bool HasByrefExtendedLayout = false; | |||
2674 | Qualifiers::ObjCLifetime Lifetime = Qualifiers::OCL_None; | |||
2675 | if (getContext().getByrefLifetime(Ty, Lifetime, HasByrefExtendedLayout) && | |||
2676 | HasByrefExtendedLayout) { | |||
2677 | /// void *__byref_variable_layout; | |||
2678 | types.push_back(Int8PtrTy); | |||
2679 | size += CharUnits::fromQuantity(PointerSizeInBytes); | |||
2680 | } | |||
2681 | ||||
2682 | // T x; | |||
2683 | llvm::Type *varTy = ConvertTypeForMem(Ty); | |||
2684 | ||||
2685 | bool packed = false; | |||
2686 | CharUnits varAlign = getContext().getDeclAlign(D); | |||
2687 | CharUnits varOffset = size.alignTo(varAlign); | |||
2688 | ||||
2689 | // We may have to insert padding. | |||
2690 | if (varOffset != size) { | |||
2691 | llvm::Type *paddingTy = | |||
2692 | llvm::ArrayType::get(Int8Ty, (varOffset - size).getQuantity()); | |||
2693 | ||||
2694 | types.push_back(paddingTy); | |||
2695 | size = varOffset; | |||
2696 | ||||
2697 | // Conversely, we might have to prevent LLVM from inserting padding. | |||
2698 | } else if (CGM.getDataLayout().getABITypeAlignment(varTy) | |||
2699 | > varAlign.getQuantity()) { | |||
2700 | packed = true; | |||
2701 | } | |||
2702 | types.push_back(varTy); | |||
2703 | ||||
2704 | byrefType->setBody(types, packed); | |||
2705 | ||||
2706 | BlockByrefInfo info; | |||
2707 | info.Type = byrefType; | |||
2708 | info.FieldIndex = types.size() - 1; | |||
2709 | info.FieldOffset = varOffset; | |||
2710 | info.ByrefAlignment = std::max(varAlign, getPointerAlign()); | |||
2711 | ||||
2712 | auto pair = BlockByrefInfos.insert({D, info}); | |||
2713 | assert(pair.second && "info was inserted recursively?")((void)0); | |||
2714 | return pair.first->second; | |||
2715 | } | |||
2716 | ||||
2717 | /// Initialize the structural components of a __block variable, i.e. | |||
2718 | /// everything but the actual object. | |||
2719 | void CodeGenFunction::emitByrefStructureInit(const AutoVarEmission &emission) { | |||
2720 | // Find the address of the local. | |||
2721 | Address addr = emission.Addr; | |||
2722 | ||||
2723 | // That's an alloca of the byref structure type. | |||
2724 | llvm::StructType *byrefType = cast<llvm::StructType>( | |||
2725 | cast<llvm::PointerType>(addr.getPointer()->getType())->getElementType()); | |||
2726 | ||||
2727 | unsigned nextHeaderIndex = 0; | |||
2728 | CharUnits nextHeaderOffset; | |||
2729 | auto storeHeaderField = [&](llvm::Value *value, CharUnits fieldSize, | |||
2730 | const Twine &name) { | |||
2731 | auto fieldAddr = Builder.CreateStructGEP(addr, nextHeaderIndex, name); | |||
2732 | Builder.CreateStore(value, fieldAddr); | |||
2733 | ||||
2734 | nextHeaderIndex++; | |||
2735 | nextHeaderOffset += fieldSize; | |||
2736 | }; | |||
2737 | ||||
2738 | // Build the byref helpers if necessary. This is null if we don't need any. | |||
2739 | BlockByrefHelpers *helpers = buildByrefHelpers(*byrefType, emission); | |||
2740 | ||||
2741 | const VarDecl &D = *emission.Variable; | |||
2742 | QualType type = D.getType(); | |||
2743 | ||||
2744 | bool HasByrefExtendedLayout = false; | |||
2745 | Qualifiers::ObjCLifetime ByrefLifetime = Qualifiers::OCL_None; | |||
2746 | bool ByRefHasLifetime = | |||
2747 | getContext().getByrefLifetime(type, ByrefLifetime, HasByrefExtendedLayout); | |||
2748 | ||||
2749 | llvm::Value *V; | |||
2750 | ||||
2751 | // Initialize the 'isa', which is just 0 or 1. | |||
2752 | int isa = 0; | |||
2753 | if (type.isObjCGCWeak()) | |||
2754 | isa = 1; | |||
2755 | V = Builder.CreateIntToPtr(Builder.getInt32(isa), Int8PtrTy, "isa"); | |||
2756 | storeHeaderField(V, getPointerSize(), "byref.isa"); | |||
2757 | ||||
2758 | // Store the address of the variable into its own forwarding pointer. | |||
2759 | storeHeaderField(addr.getPointer(), getPointerSize(), "byref.forwarding"); | |||
2760 | ||||
2761 | // Blocks ABI: | |||
2762 | // c) the flags field is set to either 0 if no helper functions are | |||
2763 | // needed or BLOCK_BYREF_HAS_COPY_DISPOSE if they are, | |||
2764 | BlockFlags flags; | |||
2765 | if (helpers) flags |= BLOCK_BYREF_HAS_COPY_DISPOSE; | |||
2766 | if (ByRefHasLifetime) { | |||
2767 | if (HasByrefExtendedLayout) flags |= BLOCK_BYREF_LAYOUT_EXTENDED; | |||
2768 | else switch (ByrefLifetime) { | |||
2769 | case Qualifiers::OCL_Strong: | |||
2770 | flags |= BLOCK_BYREF_LAYOUT_STRONG; | |||
2771 | break; | |||
2772 | case Qualifiers::OCL_Weak: | |||
2773 | flags |= BLOCK_BYREF_LAYOUT_WEAK; | |||
2774 | break; | |||
2775 | case Qualifiers::OCL_ExplicitNone: | |||
2776 | flags |= BLOCK_BYREF_LAYOUT_UNRETAINED; | |||
2777 | break; | |||
2778 | case Qualifiers::OCL_None: | |||
2779 | if (!type->isObjCObjectPointerType() && !type->isBlockPointerType()) | |||
2780 | flags |= BLOCK_BYREF_LAYOUT_NON_OBJECT; | |||
2781 | break; | |||
2782 | default: | |||
2783 | break; | |||
2784 | } | |||
2785 | if (CGM.getLangOpts().ObjCGCBitmapPrint) { | |||
2786 | printf("\n Inline flag for BYREF variable layout (%d):", flags.getBitMask()); | |||
2787 | if (flags & BLOCK_BYREF_HAS_COPY_DISPOSE) | |||
2788 | printf(" BLOCK_BYREF_HAS_COPY_DISPOSE"); | |||
2789 | if (flags & BLOCK_BYREF_LAYOUT_MASK) { | |||
2790 | BlockFlags ThisFlag(flags.getBitMask() & BLOCK_BYREF_LAYOUT_MASK); | |||
2791 | if (ThisFlag == BLOCK_BYREF_LAYOUT_EXTENDED) | |||
2792 | printf(" BLOCK_BYREF_LAYOUT_EXTENDED"); | |||
2793 | if (ThisFlag == BLOCK_BYREF_LAYOUT_STRONG) | |||
2794 | printf(" BLOCK_BYREF_LAYOUT_STRONG"); | |||
2795 | if (ThisFlag == BLOCK_BYREF_LAYOUT_WEAK) | |||
2796 | printf(" BLOCK_BYREF_LAYOUT_WEAK"); | |||
2797 | if (ThisFlag == BLOCK_BYREF_LAYOUT_UNRETAINED) | |||
2798 | printf(" BLOCK_BYREF_LAYOUT_UNRETAINED"); | |||
2799 | if (ThisFlag == BLOCK_BYREF_LAYOUT_NON_OBJECT) | |||
2800 | printf(" BLOCK_BYREF_LAYOUT_NON_OBJECT"); | |||
2801 | } | |||
2802 | printf("\n"); | |||
2803 | } | |||
2804 | } | |||
2805 | storeHeaderField(llvm::ConstantInt::get(IntTy, flags.getBitMask()), | |||
2806 | getIntSize(), "byref.flags"); | |||
2807 | ||||
2808 | CharUnits byrefSize = CGM.GetTargetTypeStoreSize(byrefType); | |||
2809 | V = llvm::ConstantInt::get(IntTy, byrefSize.getQuantity()); | |||
2810 | storeHeaderField(V, getIntSize(), "byref.size"); | |||
2811 | ||||
2812 | if (helpers) { | |||
2813 | storeHeaderField(helpers->CopyHelper, getPointerSize(), | |||
2814 | "byref.copyHelper"); | |||
2815 | storeHeaderField(helpers->DisposeHelper, getPointerSize(), | |||
2816 | "byref.disposeHelper"); | |||
2817 | } | |||
2818 | ||||
2819 | if (ByRefHasLifetime && HasByrefExtendedLayout) { | |||
2820 | auto layoutInfo = CGM.getObjCRuntime().BuildByrefLayout(CGM, type); | |||
2821 | storeHeaderField(layoutInfo, getPointerSize(), "byref.layout"); | |||
2822 | } | |||
2823 | } | |||
2824 | ||||
2825 | void CodeGenFunction::BuildBlockRelease(llvm::Value *V, BlockFieldFlags flags, | |||
2826 | bool CanThrow) { | |||
2827 | llvm::FunctionCallee F = CGM.getBlockObjectDispose(); | |||
2828 | llvm::Value *args[] = { | |||
2829 | Builder.CreateBitCast(V, Int8PtrTy), | |||
2830 | llvm::ConstantInt::get(Int32Ty, flags.getBitMask()) | |||
2831 | }; | |||
2832 | ||||
2833 | if (CanThrow) | |||
2834 | EmitRuntimeCallOrInvoke(F, args); | |||
2835 | else | |||
2836 | EmitNounwindRuntimeCall(F, args); | |||
2837 | } | |||
2838 | ||||
2839 | void CodeGenFunction::enterByrefCleanup(CleanupKind Kind, Address Addr, | |||
2840 | BlockFieldFlags Flags, | |||
2841 | bool LoadBlockVarAddr, bool CanThrow) { | |||
2842 | EHStack.pushCleanup<CallBlockRelease>(Kind, Addr, Flags, LoadBlockVarAddr, | |||
2843 | CanThrow); | |||
2844 | } | |||
2845 | ||||
2846 | /// Adjust the declaration of something from the blocks API. | |||
2847 | static void configureBlocksRuntimeObject(CodeGenModule &CGM, | |||
2848 | llvm::Constant *C) { | |||
2849 | auto *GV = cast<llvm::GlobalValue>(C->stripPointerCasts()); | |||
2850 | ||||
2851 | if (CGM.getTarget().getTriple().isOSBinFormatCOFF()) { | |||
2852 | IdentifierInfo &II = CGM.getContext().Idents.get(C->getName()); | |||
2853 | TranslationUnitDecl *TUDecl = CGM.getContext().getTranslationUnitDecl(); | |||
2854 | DeclContext *DC = TranslationUnitDecl::castToDeclContext(TUDecl); | |||
2855 | ||||
2856 | assert((isa<llvm::Function>(C->stripPointerCasts()) ||((void)0) | |||
2857 | isa<llvm::GlobalVariable>(C->stripPointerCasts())) &&((void)0) | |||
2858 | "expected Function or GlobalVariable")((void)0); | |||
2859 | ||||
2860 | const NamedDecl *ND = nullptr; | |||
2861 | for (const auto *Result : DC->lookup(&II)) | |||
2862 | if ((ND = dyn_cast<FunctionDecl>(Result)) || | |||
2863 | (ND = dyn_cast<VarDecl>(Result))) | |||
2864 | break; | |||
2865 | ||||
2866 | // TODO: support static blocks runtime | |||
2867 | if (GV->isDeclaration() && (!ND || !ND->hasAttr<DLLExportAttr>())) { | |||
2868 | GV->setDLLStorageClass(llvm::GlobalValue::DLLImportStorageClass); | |||
2869 | GV->setLinkage(llvm::GlobalValue::ExternalLinkage); | |||
2870 | } else { | |||
2871 | GV->setDLLStorageClass(llvm::GlobalValue::DLLExportStorageClass); | |||
2872 | GV->setLinkage(llvm::GlobalValue::ExternalLinkage); | |||
2873 | } | |||
2874 | } | |||
2875 | ||||
2876 | if (CGM.getLangOpts().BlocksRuntimeOptional && GV->isDeclaration() && | |||
2877 | GV->hasExternalLinkage()) | |||
2878 | GV->setLinkage(llvm::GlobalValue::ExternalWeakLinkage); | |||
2879 | ||||
2880 | CGM.setDSOLocal(GV); | |||
2881 | } | |||
2882 | ||||
2883 | llvm::FunctionCallee CodeGenModule::getBlockObjectDispose() { | |||
2884 | if (BlockObjectDispose) | |||
2885 | return BlockObjectDispose; | |||
2886 | ||||
2887 | llvm::Type *args[] = { Int8PtrTy, Int32Ty }; | |||
2888 | llvm::FunctionType *fty | |||
2889 | = llvm::FunctionType::get(VoidTy, args, false); | |||
2890 | BlockObjectDispose = CreateRuntimeFunction(fty, "_Block_object_dispose"); | |||
2891 | configureBlocksRuntimeObject( | |||
2892 | *this, cast<llvm::Constant>(BlockObjectDispose.getCallee())); | |||
2893 | return BlockObjectDispose; | |||
2894 | } | |||
2895 | ||||
2896 | llvm::FunctionCallee CodeGenModule::getBlockObjectAssign() { | |||
2897 | if (BlockObjectAssign) | |||
2898 | return BlockObjectAssign; | |||
2899 | ||||
2900 | llvm::Type *args[] = { Int8PtrTy, Int8PtrTy, Int32Ty }; | |||
2901 | llvm::FunctionType *fty | |||
2902 | = llvm::FunctionType::get(VoidTy, args, false); | |||
2903 | BlockObjectAssign = CreateRuntimeFunction(fty, "_Block_object_assign"); | |||
2904 | configureBlocksRuntimeObject( | |||
2905 | *this, cast<llvm::Constant>(BlockObjectAssign.getCallee())); | |||
2906 | return BlockObjectAssign; | |||
2907 | } | |||
2908 | ||||
2909 | llvm::Constant *CodeGenModule::getNSConcreteGlobalBlock() { | |||
2910 | if (NSConcreteGlobalBlock) | |||
2911 | return NSConcreteGlobalBlock; | |||
2912 | ||||
2913 | NSConcreteGlobalBlock = | |||
2914 | GetOrCreateLLVMGlobal("_NSConcreteGlobalBlock", Int8PtrTy, 0, nullptr); | |||
2915 | configureBlocksRuntimeObject(*this, NSConcreteGlobalBlock); | |||
2916 | return NSConcreteGlobalBlock; | |||
2917 | } | |||
2918 | ||||
2919 | llvm::Constant *CodeGenModule::getNSConcreteStackBlock() { | |||
2920 | if (NSConcreteStackBlock) | |||
2921 | return NSConcreteStackBlock; | |||
2922 | ||||
2923 | NSConcreteStackBlock = | |||
2924 | GetOrCreateLLVMGlobal("_NSConcreteStackBlock", Int8PtrTy, 0, nullptr); | |||
2925 | configureBlocksRuntimeObject(*this, NSConcreteStackBlock); | |||
2926 | return NSConcreteStackBlock; | |||
2927 | } |
1 | //===- Decl.h - Classes for representing declarations -----------*- C++ -*-===// |
2 | // |
3 | // Part of the LLVM Project, under the Apache License v2.0 with LLVM Exceptions. |
4 | // See https://llvm.org/LICENSE.txt for license information. |
5 | // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0 WITH LLVM-exception |
6 | // |
7 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
8 | // |
9 | // This file defines the Decl subclasses. |
10 | // |
11 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
12 | |
13 | #ifndef LLVM_CLANG_AST_DECL_H |
14 | #define LLVM_CLANG_AST_DECL_H |
15 | |
16 | #include "clang/AST/APValue.h" |
17 | #include "clang/AST/ASTContextAllocate.h" |
18 | #include "clang/AST/DeclAccessPair.h" |
19 | #include "clang/AST/DeclBase.h" |
20 | #include "clang/AST/DeclarationName.h" |
21 | #include "clang/AST/ExternalASTSource.h" |
22 | #include "clang/AST/NestedNameSpecifier.h" |
23 | #include "clang/AST/Redeclarable.h" |
24 | #include "clang/AST/Type.h" |
25 | #include "clang/Basic/AddressSpaces.h" |
26 | #include "clang/Basic/Diagnostic.h" |
27 | #include "clang/Basic/IdentifierTable.h" |
28 | #include "clang/Basic/LLVM.h" |
29 | #include "clang/Basic/Linkage.h" |
30 | #include "clang/Basic/OperatorKinds.h" |
31 | #include "clang/Basic/PartialDiagnostic.h" |
32 | #include "clang/Basic/PragmaKinds.h" |
33 | #include "clang/Basic/SourceLocation.h" |
34 | #include "clang/Basic/Specifiers.h" |
35 | #include "clang/Basic/Visibility.h" |
36 | #include "llvm/ADT/APSInt.h" |
37 | #include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h" |
38 | #include "llvm/ADT/Optional.h" |
39 | #include "llvm/ADT/PointerIntPair.h" |
40 | #include "llvm/ADT/PointerUnion.h" |
41 | #include "llvm/ADT/StringRef.h" |
42 | #include "llvm/ADT/iterator_range.h" |
43 | #include "llvm/Support/Casting.h" |
44 | #include "llvm/Support/Compiler.h" |
45 | #include "llvm/Support/TrailingObjects.h" |
46 | #include <cassert> |
47 | #include <cstddef> |
48 | #include <cstdint> |
49 | #include <string> |
50 | #include <utility> |
51 | |
52 | namespace clang { |
53 | |
54 | class ASTContext; |
55 | struct ASTTemplateArgumentListInfo; |
56 | class Attr; |
57 | class CompoundStmt; |
58 | class DependentFunctionTemplateSpecializationInfo; |
59 | class EnumDecl; |
60 | class Expr; |
61 | class FunctionTemplateDecl; |
62 | class FunctionTemplateSpecializationInfo; |
63 | class FunctionTypeLoc; |
64 | class LabelStmt; |
65 | class MemberSpecializationInfo; |
66 | class Module; |
67 | class NamespaceDecl; |
68 | class ParmVarDecl; |
69 | class RecordDecl; |
70 | class Stmt; |
71 | class StringLiteral; |
72 | class TagDecl; |
73 | class TemplateArgumentList; |
74 | class TemplateArgumentListInfo; |
75 | class TemplateParameterList; |
76 | class TypeAliasTemplateDecl; |
77 | class TypeLoc; |
78 | class UnresolvedSetImpl; |
79 | class VarTemplateDecl; |
80 | |
81 | /// The top declaration context. |
82 | class TranslationUnitDecl : public Decl, |
83 | public DeclContext, |
84 | public Redeclarable<TranslationUnitDecl> { |
85 | using redeclarable_base = Redeclarable<TranslationUnitDecl>; |
86 | |
87 | TranslationUnitDecl *getNextRedeclarationImpl() override { |
88 | return getNextRedeclaration(); |
89 | } |
90 | |
91 | TranslationUnitDecl *getPreviousDeclImpl() override { |
92 | return getPreviousDecl(); |
93 | } |
94 | |
95 | TranslationUnitDecl *getMostRecentDeclImpl() override { |
96 | return getMostRecentDecl(); |
97 | } |
98 | |
99 | ASTContext &Ctx; |
100 | |
101 | /// The (most recently entered) anonymous namespace for this |
102 | /// translation unit, if one has been created. |
103 | NamespaceDecl *AnonymousNamespace = nullptr; |
104 | |
105 | explicit TranslationUnitDecl(ASTContext &ctx); |
106 | |
107 | virtual void anchor(); |
108 | |
109 | public: |
110 | using redecl_range = redeclarable_base::redecl_range; |
111 | using redecl_iterator = redeclarable_base::redecl_iterator; |
112 | |
113 | using redeclarable_base::getMostRecentDecl; |
114 | using redeclarable_base::getPreviousDecl; |
115 | using redeclarable_base::isFirstDecl; |
116 | using redeclarable_base::redecls; |
117 | using redeclarable_base::redecls_begin; |
118 | using redeclarable_base::redecls_end; |
119 | |
120 | ASTContext &getASTContext() const { return Ctx; } |
121 | |
122 | NamespaceDecl *getAnonymousNamespace() const { return AnonymousNamespace; } |
123 | void setAnonymousNamespace(NamespaceDecl *D) { AnonymousNamespace = D; } |
124 | |
125 | static TranslationUnitDecl *Create(ASTContext &C); |
126 | |
127 | // Implement isa/cast/dyncast/etc. |
128 | static bool classof(const Decl *D) { return classofKind(D->getKind()); } |
129 | static bool classofKind(Kind K) { return K == TranslationUnit; } |
130 | static DeclContext *castToDeclContext(const TranslationUnitDecl *D) { |
131 | return static_cast<DeclContext *>(const_cast<TranslationUnitDecl*>(D)); |
132 | } |
133 | static TranslationUnitDecl *castFromDeclContext(const DeclContext *DC) { |
134 | return static_cast<TranslationUnitDecl *>(const_cast<DeclContext*>(DC)); |
135 | } |
136 | }; |
137 | |
138 | /// Represents a `#pragma comment` line. Always a child of |
139 | /// TranslationUnitDecl. |
140 | class PragmaCommentDecl final |
141 | : public Decl, |
142 | private llvm::TrailingObjects<PragmaCommentDecl, char> { |
143 | friend class ASTDeclReader; |
144 | friend class ASTDeclWriter; |
145 | friend TrailingObjects; |
146 | |
147 | PragmaMSCommentKind CommentKind; |
148 | |
149 | PragmaCommentDecl(TranslationUnitDecl *TU, SourceLocation CommentLoc, |
150 | PragmaMSCommentKind CommentKind) |
151 | : Decl(PragmaComment, TU, CommentLoc), CommentKind(CommentKind) {} |
152 | |
153 | virtual void anchor(); |
154 | |
155 | public: |
156 | static PragmaCommentDecl *Create(const ASTContext &C, TranslationUnitDecl *DC, |
157 | SourceLocation CommentLoc, |
158 | PragmaMSCommentKind CommentKind, |
159 | StringRef Arg); |
160 | static PragmaCommentDecl *CreateDeserialized(ASTContext &C, unsigned ID, |
161 | unsigned ArgSize); |
162 | |
163 | PragmaMSCommentKind getCommentKind() const { return CommentKind; } |
164 | |
165 | StringRef getArg() const { return getTrailingObjects<char>(); } |
166 | |
167 | // Implement isa/cast/dyncast/etc. |
168 | static bool classof(const Decl *D) { return classofKind(D->getKind()); } |
169 | static bool classofKind(Kind K) { return K == PragmaComment; } |
170 | }; |
171 | |
172 | /// Represents a `#pragma detect_mismatch` line. Always a child of |
173 | /// TranslationUnitDecl. |
174 | class PragmaDetectMismatchDecl final |
175 | : public Decl, |
176 | private llvm::TrailingObjects<PragmaDetectMismatchDecl, char> { |
177 | friend class ASTDeclReader; |
178 | friend class ASTDeclWriter; |
179 | friend TrailingObjects; |
180 | |
181 | size_t ValueStart; |
182 | |
183 | PragmaDetectMismatchDecl(TranslationUnitDecl *TU, SourceLocation Loc, |
184 | size_t ValueStart) |
185 | : Decl(PragmaDetectMismatch, TU, Loc), ValueStart(ValueStart) {} |
186 | |
187 | virtual void anchor(); |
188 | |
189 | public: |
190 | static PragmaDetectMismatchDecl *Create(const ASTContext &C, |
191 | TranslationUnitDecl *DC, |
192 | SourceLocation Loc, StringRef Name, |
193 | StringRef Value); |
194 | static PragmaDetectMismatchDecl * |
195 | CreateDeserialized(ASTContext &C, unsigned ID, unsigned NameValueSize); |
196 | |
197 | StringRef getName() const { return getTrailingObjects<char>(); } |
198 | StringRef getValue() const { return getTrailingObjects<char>() + ValueStart; } |
199 | |
200 | // Implement isa/cast/dyncast/etc. |
201 | static bool classof(const Decl *D) { return classofKind(D->getKind()); } |
202 | static bool classofKind(Kind K) { return K == PragmaDetectMismatch; } |
203 | }; |
204 | |
205 | /// Declaration context for names declared as extern "C" in C++. This |
206 | /// is neither the semantic nor lexical context for such declarations, but is |
207 | /// used to check for conflicts with other extern "C" declarations. Example: |
208 | /// |
209 | /// \code |
210 | /// namespace N { extern "C" void f(); } // #1 |
211 | /// void N::f() {} // #2 |
212 | /// namespace M { extern "C" void f(); } // #3 |
213 | /// \endcode |
214 | /// |
215 | /// The semantic context of #1 is namespace N and its lexical context is the |
216 | /// LinkageSpecDecl; the semantic context of #2 is namespace N and its lexical |
217 | /// context is the TU. However, both declarations are also visible in the |
218 | /// extern "C" context. |
219 | /// |
220 | /// The declaration at #3 finds it is a redeclaration of \c N::f through |
221 | /// lookup in the extern "C" context. |
222 | class ExternCContextDecl : public Decl, public DeclContext { |
223 | explicit ExternCContextDecl(TranslationUnitDecl *TU) |
224 | : Decl(ExternCContext, TU, SourceLocation()), |
225 | DeclContext(ExternCContext) {} |
226 | |
227 | virtual void anchor(); |
228 | |
229 | public: |
230 | static ExternCContextDecl *Create(const ASTContext &C, |
231 | TranslationUnitDecl *TU); |
232 | |
233 | // Implement isa/cast/dyncast/etc. |
234 | static bool classof(const Decl *D) { return classofKind(D->getKind()); } |
235 | static bool classofKind(Kind K) { return K == ExternCContext; } |
236 | static DeclContext *castToDeclContext(const ExternCContextDecl *D) { |
237 | return static_cast<DeclContext *>(const_cast<ExternCContextDecl*>(D)); |
238 | } |
239 | static ExternCContextDecl *castFromDeclContext(const DeclContext *DC) { |
240 | return static_cast<ExternCContextDecl *>(const_cast<DeclContext*>(DC)); |
241 | } |
242 | }; |
243 | |
244 | /// This represents a decl that may have a name. Many decls have names such |
245 | /// as ObjCMethodDecl, but not \@class, etc. |
246 | /// |
247 | /// Note that not every NamedDecl is actually named (e.g., a struct might |
248 | /// be anonymous), and not every name is an identifier. |
249 | class NamedDecl : public Decl { |
250 | /// The name of this declaration, which is typically a normal |
251 | /// identifier but may also be a special kind of name (C++ |
252 | /// constructor, Objective-C selector, etc.) |
253 | DeclarationName Name; |
254 | |
255 | virtual void anchor(); |
256 | |
257 | private: |
258 | NamedDecl *getUnderlyingDeclImpl() LLVM_READONLY__attribute__((__pure__)); |
259 | |
260 | protected: |
261 | NamedDecl(Kind DK, DeclContext *DC, SourceLocation L, DeclarationName N) |
262 | : Decl(DK, DC, L), Name(N) {} |
263 | |
264 | public: |
265 | /// Get the identifier that names this declaration, if there is one. |
266 | /// |
267 | /// This will return NULL if this declaration has no name (e.g., for |
268 | /// an unnamed class) or if the name is a special name (C++ constructor, |
269 | /// Objective-C selector, etc.). |
270 | IdentifierInfo *getIdentifier() const { return Name.getAsIdentifierInfo(); } |
271 | |
272 | /// Get the name of identifier for this declaration as a StringRef. |
273 | /// |
274 | /// This requires that the declaration have a name and that it be a simple |
275 | /// identifier. |
276 | StringRef getName() const { |
277 | assert(Name.isIdentifier() && "Name is not a simple identifier")((void)0); |
278 | return getIdentifier() ? getIdentifier()->getName() : ""; |
279 | } |
280 | |
281 | /// Get a human-readable name for the declaration, even if it is one of the |
282 | /// special kinds of names (C++ constructor, Objective-C selector, etc). |
283 | /// |
284 | /// Creating this name requires expensive string manipulation, so it should |
285 | /// be called only when performance doesn't matter. For simple declarations, |
286 | /// getNameAsCString() should suffice. |
287 | // |
288 | // FIXME: This function should be renamed to indicate that it is not just an |
289 | // alternate form of getName(), and clients should move as appropriate. |
290 | // |
291 | // FIXME: Deprecated, move clients to getName(). |
292 | std::string getNameAsString() const { return Name.getAsString(); } |
293 | |
294 | /// Pretty-print the unqualified name of this declaration. Can be overloaded |
295 | /// by derived classes to provide a more user-friendly name when appropriate. |
296 | virtual void printName(raw_ostream &os) const; |
297 | |
298 | /// Get the actual, stored name of the declaration, which may be a special |
299 | /// name. |
300 | /// |
301 | /// Note that generally in diagnostics, the non-null \p NamedDecl* itself |
302 | /// should be sent into the diagnostic instead of using the result of |
303 | /// \p getDeclName(). |
304 | /// |
305 | /// A \p DeclarationName in a diagnostic will just be streamed to the output, |
306 | /// which will directly result in a call to \p DeclarationName::print. |
307 | /// |
308 | /// A \p NamedDecl* in a diagnostic will also ultimately result in a call to |
309 | /// \p DeclarationName::print, but with two customisation points along the |
310 | /// way (\p getNameForDiagnostic and \p printName). These are used to print |
311 | /// the template arguments if any, and to provide a user-friendly name for |
312 | /// some entities (such as unnamed variables and anonymous records). |
313 | DeclarationName getDeclName() const { return Name; } |
314 | |
315 | /// Set the name of this declaration. |
316 | void setDeclName(DeclarationName N) { Name = N; } |
317 | |
318 | /// Returns a human-readable qualified name for this declaration, like |
319 | /// A::B::i, for i being member of namespace A::B. |
320 | /// |
321 | /// If the declaration is not a member of context which can be named (record, |
322 | /// namespace), it will return the same result as printName(). |
323 | /// |
324 | /// Creating this name is expensive, so it should be called only when |
325 | /// performance doesn't matter. |
326 | void printQualifiedName(raw_ostream &OS) const; |
327 | void printQualifiedName(raw_ostream &OS, const PrintingPolicy &Policy) const; |
328 | |
329 | /// Print only the nested name specifier part of a fully-qualified name, |
330 | /// including the '::' at the end. E.g. |
331 | /// when `printQualifiedName(D)` prints "A::B::i", |
332 | /// this function prints "A::B::". |
333 | void printNestedNameSpecifier(raw_ostream &OS) const; |
334 | void printNestedNameSpecifier(raw_ostream &OS, |
335 | const PrintingPolicy &Policy) const; |
336 | |
337 | // FIXME: Remove string version. |
338 | std::string getQualifiedNameAsString() const; |
339 | |
340 | /// Appends a human-readable name for this declaration into the given stream. |
341 | /// |
342 | /// This is the method invoked by Sema when displaying a NamedDecl |
343 | /// in a diagnostic. It does not necessarily produce the same |
344 | /// result as printName(); for example, class template |
345 | /// specializations are printed with their template arguments. |
346 | virtual void getNameForDiagnostic(raw_ostream &OS, |
347 | const PrintingPolicy &Policy, |
348 | bool Qualified) const; |
349 | |
350 | /// Determine whether this declaration, if known to be well-formed within |
351 | /// its context, will replace the declaration OldD if introduced into scope. |
352 | /// |
353 | /// A declaration will replace another declaration if, for example, it is |
354 | /// a redeclaration of the same variable or function, but not if it is a |
355 | /// declaration of a different kind (function vs. class) or an overloaded |
356 | /// function. |
357 | /// |
358 | /// \param IsKnownNewer \c true if this declaration is known to be newer |
359 | /// than \p OldD (for instance, if this declaration is newly-created). |
360 | bool declarationReplaces(NamedDecl *OldD, bool IsKnownNewer = true) const; |
361 | |
362 | /// Determine whether this declaration has linkage. |
363 | bool hasLinkage() const; |
364 | |
365 | using Decl::isModulePrivate; |
366 | using Decl::setModulePrivate; |
367 | |
368 | /// Determine whether this declaration is a C++ class member. |
369 | bool isCXXClassMember() const { |
370 | const DeclContext *DC = getDeclContext(); |
371 | |
372 | // C++0x [class.mem]p1: |
373 | // The enumerators of an unscoped enumeration defined in |
374 | // the class are members of the class. |
375 | if (isa<EnumDecl>(DC)) |
376 | DC = DC->getRedeclContext(); |
377 | |
378 | return DC->isRecord(); |
379 | } |
380 | |
381 | /// Determine whether the given declaration is an instance member of |
382 | /// a C++ class. |
383 | bool isCXXInstanceMember() const; |
384 | |
385 | /// Determine if the declaration obeys the reserved identifier rules of the |
386 | /// given language. |
387 | ReservedIdentifierStatus isReserved(const LangOptions &LangOpts) const; |
388 | |
389 | /// Determine what kind of linkage this entity has. |
390 | /// |
391 | /// This is not the linkage as defined by the standard or the codegen notion |
392 | /// of linkage. It is just an implementation detail that is used to compute |
393 | /// those. |
394 | Linkage getLinkageInternal() const; |
395 | |
396 | /// Get the linkage from a semantic point of view. Entities in |
397 | /// anonymous namespaces are external (in c++98). |
398 | Linkage getFormalLinkage() const { |
399 | return clang::getFormalLinkage(getLinkageInternal()); |
400 | } |
401 | |
402 | /// True if this decl has external linkage. |
403 | bool hasExternalFormalLinkage() const { |
404 | return isExternalFormalLinkage(getLinkageInternal()); |
405 | } |
406 | |
407 | bool isExternallyVisible() const { |
408 | return clang::isExternallyVisible(getLinkageInternal()); |
409 | } |
410 | |
411 | /// Determine whether this declaration can be redeclared in a |
412 | /// different translation unit. |
413 | bool isExternallyDeclarable() const { |
414 | return isExternallyVisible() && !getOwningModuleForLinkage(); |
415 | } |
416 | |
417 | /// Determines the visibility of this entity. |
418 | Visibility getVisibility() const { |
419 | return getLinkageAndVisibility().getVisibility(); |
420 | } |
421 | |
422 | /// Determines the linkage and visibility of this entity. |
423 | LinkageInfo getLinkageAndVisibility() const; |
424 | |
425 | /// Kinds of explicit visibility. |
426 | enum ExplicitVisibilityKind { |
427 | /// Do an LV computation for, ultimately, a type. |
428 | /// Visibility may be restricted by type visibility settings and |
429 | /// the visibility of template arguments. |
430 | VisibilityForType, |
431 | |
432 | /// Do an LV computation for, ultimately, a non-type declaration. |
433 | /// Visibility may be restricted by value visibility settings and |
434 | /// the visibility of template arguments. |
435 | VisibilityForValue |
436 | }; |
437 | |
438 | /// If visibility was explicitly specified for this |
439 | /// declaration, return that visibility. |
440 | Optional<Visibility> |
441 | getExplicitVisibility(ExplicitVisibilityKind kind) const; |
442 | |
443 | /// True if the computed linkage is valid. Used for consistency |
444 | /// checking. Should always return true. |
445 | bool isLinkageValid() const; |
446 | |
447 | /// True if something has required us to compute the linkage |
448 | /// of this declaration. |
449 | /// |
450 | /// Language features which can retroactively change linkage (like a |
451 | /// typedef name for linkage purposes) may need to consider this, |
452 | /// but hopefully only in transitory ways during parsing. |
453 | bool hasLinkageBeenComputed() const { |
454 | return hasCachedLinkage(); |
455 | } |
456 | |
457 | /// Looks through UsingDecls and ObjCCompatibleAliasDecls for |
458 | /// the underlying named decl. |
459 | NamedDecl *getUnderlyingDecl() { |
460 | // Fast-path the common case. |
461 | if (this->getKind() != UsingShadow && |
462 | this->getKind() != ConstructorUsingShadow && |
463 | this->getKind() != ObjCCompatibleAlias && |
464 | this->getKind() != NamespaceAlias) |
465 | return this; |
466 | |
467 | return getUnderlyingDeclImpl(); |
468 | } |
469 | const NamedDecl *getUnderlyingDecl() const { |
470 | return const_cast<NamedDecl*>(this)->getUnderlyingDecl(); |
471 | } |
472 | |
473 | NamedDecl *getMostRecentDecl() { |
474 | return cast<NamedDecl>(static_cast<Decl *>(this)->getMostRecentDecl()); |
475 | } |
476 | const NamedDecl *getMostRecentDecl() const { |
477 | return const_cast<NamedDecl*>(this)->getMostRecentDecl(); |
478 | } |
479 | |
480 | ObjCStringFormatFamily getObjCFStringFormattingFamily() const; |
481 | |
482 | static bool classof(const Decl *D) { return classofKind(D->getKind()); } |
483 | static bool classofKind(Kind K) { return K >= firstNamed && K <= lastNamed; } |
484 | }; |
485 | |
486 | inline raw_ostream &operator<<(raw_ostream &OS, const NamedDecl &ND) { |
487 | ND.printName(OS); |
488 | return OS; |
489 | } |
490 | |
491 | /// Represents the declaration of a label. Labels also have a |
492 | /// corresponding LabelStmt, which indicates the position that the label was |
493 | /// defined at. For normal labels, the location of the decl is the same as the |
494 | /// location of the statement. For GNU local labels (__label__), the decl |
495 | /// location is where the __label__ is. |
496 | class LabelDecl : public NamedDecl { |
497 | LabelStmt *TheStmt; |
498 | StringRef MSAsmName; |
499 | bool MSAsmNameResolved = false; |
500 | |
501 | /// For normal labels, this is the same as the main declaration |
502 | /// label, i.e., the location of the identifier; for GNU local labels, |
503 | /// this is the location of the __label__ keyword. |
504 | SourceLocation LocStart; |
505 | |
506 | LabelDecl(DeclContext *DC, SourceLocation IdentL, IdentifierInfo *II, |
507 | LabelStmt *S, SourceLocation StartL) |
508 | : NamedDecl(Label, DC, IdentL, II), TheStmt(S), LocStart(StartL) {} |
509 | |
510 | void anchor() override; |
511 | |
512 | public: |
513 | static LabelDecl *Create(ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, |
514 | SourceLocation IdentL, IdentifierInfo *II); |
515 | static LabelDecl *Create(ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, |
516 | SourceLocation IdentL, IdentifierInfo *II, |
517 | SourceLocation GnuLabelL); |
518 | static LabelDecl *CreateDeserialized(ASTContext &C, unsigned ID); |
519 | |
520 | LabelStmt *getStmt() const { return TheStmt; } |
521 | void setStmt(LabelStmt *T) { TheStmt = T; } |
522 | |
523 | bool isGnuLocal() const { return LocStart != getLocation(); } |
524 | void setLocStart(SourceLocation L) { LocStart = L; } |
525 | |
526 | SourceRange getSourceRange() const override LLVM_READONLY__attribute__((__pure__)) { |
527 | return SourceRange(LocStart, getLocation()); |
528 | } |
529 | |
530 | bool isMSAsmLabel() const { return !MSAsmName.empty(); } |
531 | bool isResolvedMSAsmLabel() const { return isMSAsmLabel() && MSAsmNameResolved; } |
532 | void setMSAsmLabel(StringRef Name); |
533 | StringRef getMSAsmLabel() const { return MSAsmName; } |
534 | void setMSAsmLabelResolved() { MSAsmNameResolved = true; } |
535 | |
536 | // Implement isa/cast/dyncast/etc. |
537 | static bool classof(const Decl *D) { return classofKind(D->getKind()); } |
538 | static bool classofKind(Kind K) { return K == Label; } |
539 | }; |
540 | |
541 | /// Represent a C++ namespace. |
542 | class NamespaceDecl : public NamedDecl, public DeclContext, |
543 | public Redeclarable<NamespaceDecl> |
544 | { |
545 | /// The starting location of the source range, pointing |
546 | /// to either the namespace or the inline keyword. |
547 | SourceLocation LocStart; |
548 | |
549 | /// The ending location of the source range. |
550 | SourceLocation RBraceLoc; |
551 | |
552 | /// A pointer to either the anonymous namespace that lives just inside |
553 | /// this namespace or to the first namespace in the chain (the latter case |
554 | /// only when this is not the first in the chain), along with a |
555 | /// boolean value indicating whether this is an inline namespace. |
556 | llvm::PointerIntPair<NamespaceDecl *, 1, bool> AnonOrFirstNamespaceAndInline; |
557 | |
558 | NamespaceDecl(ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, bool Inline, |
559 | SourceLocation StartLoc, SourceLocation IdLoc, |
560 | IdentifierInfo *Id, NamespaceDecl *PrevDecl); |
561 | |
562 | using redeclarable_base = Redeclarable<NamespaceDecl>; |
563 | |
564 | NamespaceDecl *getNextRedeclarationImpl() override; |
565 | NamespaceDecl *getPreviousDeclImpl() override; |
566 | NamespaceDecl *getMostRecentDeclImpl() override; |
567 | |
568 | public: |
569 | friend class ASTDeclReader; |
570 | friend class ASTDeclWriter; |
571 | |
572 | static NamespaceDecl *Create(ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, |
573 | bool Inline, SourceLocation StartLoc, |
574 | SourceLocation IdLoc, IdentifierInfo *Id, |
575 | NamespaceDecl *PrevDecl); |
576 | |
577 | static NamespaceDecl *CreateDeserialized(ASTContext &C, unsigned ID); |
578 | |
579 | using redecl_range = redeclarable_base::redecl_range; |
580 | using redecl_iterator = redeclarable_base::redecl_iterator; |
581 | |
582 | using redeclarable_base::redecls_begin; |
583 | using redeclarable_base::redecls_end; |
584 | using redeclarable_base::redecls; |
585 | using redeclarable_base::getPreviousDecl; |
586 | using redeclarable_base::getMostRecentDecl; |
587 | using redeclarable_base::isFirstDecl; |
588 | |
589 | /// Returns true if this is an anonymous namespace declaration. |
590 | /// |
591 | /// For example: |
592 | /// \code |
593 | /// namespace { |
594 | /// ... |
595 | /// }; |
596 | /// \endcode |
597 | /// q.v. C++ [namespace.unnamed] |
598 | bool isAnonymousNamespace() const { |
599 | return !getIdentifier(); |
600 | } |
601 | |
602 | /// Returns true if this is an inline namespace declaration. |
603 | bool isInline() const { |
604 | return AnonOrFirstNamespaceAndInline.getInt(); |
605 | } |
606 | |
607 | /// Set whether this is an inline namespace declaration. |
608 | void setInline(bool Inline) { |
609 | AnonOrFirstNamespaceAndInline.setInt(Inline); |
610 | } |
611 | |
612 | /// Returns true if the inline qualifier for \c Name is redundant. |
613 | bool isRedundantInlineQualifierFor(DeclarationName Name) const { |
614 | if (!isInline()) |
615 | return false; |
616 | auto X = lookup(Name); |
617 | auto Y = getParent()->lookup(Name); |
618 | return std::distance(X.begin(), X.end()) == |
619 | std::distance(Y.begin(), Y.end()); |
620 | } |
621 | |
622 | /// Get the original (first) namespace declaration. |
623 | NamespaceDecl *getOriginalNamespace(); |
624 | |
625 | /// Get the original (first) namespace declaration. |
626 | const NamespaceDecl *getOriginalNamespace() const; |
627 | |
628 | /// Return true if this declaration is an original (first) declaration |
629 | /// of the namespace. This is false for non-original (subsequent) namespace |
630 | /// declarations and anonymous namespaces. |
631 | bool isOriginalNamespace() const; |
632 | |
633 | /// Retrieve the anonymous namespace nested inside this namespace, |
634 | /// if any. |
635 | NamespaceDecl *getAnonymousNamespace() const { |
636 | return getOriginalNamespace()->AnonOrFirstNamespaceAndInline.getPointer(); |
637 | } |
638 | |
639 | void setAnonymousNamespace(NamespaceDecl *D) { |
640 | getOriginalNamespace()->AnonOrFirstNamespaceAndInline.setPointer(D); |
641 | } |
642 | |
643 | /// Retrieves the canonical declaration of this namespace. |
644 | NamespaceDecl *getCanonicalDecl() override { |
645 | return getOriginalNamespace(); |
646 | } |
647 | const NamespaceDecl *getCanonicalDecl() const { |
648 | return getOriginalNamespace(); |
649 | } |
650 | |
651 | SourceRange getSourceRange() const override LLVM_READONLY__attribute__((__pure__)) { |
652 | return SourceRange(LocStart, RBraceLoc); |
653 | } |
654 | |
655 | SourceLocation getBeginLoc() const LLVM_READONLY__attribute__((__pure__)) { return LocStart; } |
656 | SourceLocation getRBraceLoc() const { return RBraceLoc; } |
657 | void setLocStart(SourceLocation L) { LocStart = L; } |
658 | void setRBraceLoc(SourceLocation L) { RBraceLoc = L; } |
659 | |
660 | // Implement isa/cast/dyncast/etc. |
661 | static bool classof(const Decl *D) { return classofKind(D->getKind()); } |
662 | static bool classofKind(Kind K) { return K == Namespace; } |
663 | static DeclContext *castToDeclContext(const NamespaceDecl *D) { |
664 | return static_cast<DeclContext *>(const_cast<NamespaceDecl*>(D)); |
665 | } |
666 | static NamespaceDecl *castFromDeclContext(const DeclContext *DC) { |
667 | return static_cast<NamespaceDecl *>(const_cast<DeclContext*>(DC)); |
668 | } |
669 | }; |
670 | |
671 | /// Represent the declaration of a variable (in which case it is |
672 | /// an lvalue) a function (in which case it is a function designator) or |
673 | /// an enum constant. |
674 | class ValueDecl : public NamedDecl { |
675 | QualType DeclType; |
676 | |
677 | void anchor() override; |
678 | |
679 | protected: |
680 | ValueDecl(Kind DK, DeclContext *DC, SourceLocation L, |
681 | DeclarationName N, QualType T) |
682 | : NamedDecl(DK, DC, L, N), DeclType(T) {} |
683 | |
684 | public: |
685 | QualType getType() const { return DeclType; } |
686 | void setType(QualType newType) { DeclType = newType; } |
687 | |
688 | /// Determine whether this symbol is weakly-imported, |
689 | /// or declared with the weak or weak-ref attr. |
690 | bool isWeak() const; |
691 | |
692 | // Implement isa/cast/dyncast/etc. |
693 | static bool classof(const Decl *D) { return classofKind(D->getKind()); } |
694 | static bool classofKind(Kind K) { return K >= firstValue && K <= lastValue; } |
695 | }; |
696 | |
697 | /// A struct with extended info about a syntactic |
698 | /// name qualifier, to be used for the case of out-of-line declarations. |
699 | struct QualifierInfo { |
700 | NestedNameSpecifierLoc QualifierLoc; |
701 | |
702 | /// The number of "outer" template parameter lists. |
703 | /// The count includes all of the template parameter lists that were matched |
704 | /// against the template-ids occurring into the NNS and possibly (in the |
705 | /// case of an explicit specialization) a final "template <>". |
706 | unsigned NumTemplParamLists = 0; |
707 | |
708 | /// A new-allocated array of size NumTemplParamLists, |
709 | /// containing pointers to the "outer" template parameter lists. |
710 | /// It includes all of the template parameter lists that were matched |
711 | /// against the template-ids occurring into the NNS and possibly (in the |
712 | /// case of an explicit specialization) a final "template <>". |
713 | TemplateParameterList** TemplParamLists = nullptr; |
714 | |
715 | QualifierInfo() = default; |
716 | QualifierInfo(const QualifierInfo &) = delete; |
717 | QualifierInfo& operator=(const QualifierInfo &) = delete; |
718 | |
719 | /// Sets info about "outer" template parameter lists. |
720 | void setTemplateParameterListsInfo(ASTContext &Context, |
721 | ArrayRef<TemplateParameterList *> TPLists); |
722 | }; |
723 | |
724 | /// Represents a ValueDecl that came out of a declarator. |
725 | /// Contains type source information through TypeSourceInfo. |
726 | class DeclaratorDecl : public ValueDecl { |
727 | // A struct representing a TInfo, a trailing requires-clause and a syntactic |
728 | // qualifier, to be used for the (uncommon) case of out-of-line declarations |
729 | // and constrained function decls. |
730 | struct ExtInfo : public QualifierInfo { |
731 | TypeSourceInfo *TInfo; |
732 | Expr *TrailingRequiresClause = nullptr; |
733 | }; |
734 | |
735 | llvm::PointerUnion<TypeSourceInfo *, ExtInfo *> DeclInfo; |
736 | |
737 | /// The start of the source range for this declaration, |
738 | /// ignoring outer template declarations. |
739 | SourceLocation InnerLocStart; |
740 | |
741 | bool hasExtInfo() const { return DeclInfo.is<ExtInfo*>(); } |
742 | ExtInfo *getExtInfo() { return DeclInfo.get<ExtInfo*>(); } |
743 | const ExtInfo *getExtInfo() const { return DeclInfo.get<ExtInfo*>(); } |
744 | |
745 | protected: |
746 | DeclaratorDecl(Kind DK, DeclContext *DC, SourceLocation L, |
747 | DeclarationName N, QualType T, TypeSourceInfo *TInfo, |
748 | SourceLocation StartL) |
749 | : ValueDecl(DK, DC, L, N, T), DeclInfo(TInfo), InnerLocStart(StartL) {} |
750 | |
751 | public: |
752 | friend class ASTDeclReader; |
753 | friend class ASTDeclWriter; |
754 | |
755 | TypeSourceInfo *getTypeSourceInfo() const { |
756 | return hasExtInfo() |
757 | ? getExtInfo()->TInfo |
758 | : DeclInfo.get<TypeSourceInfo*>(); |
759 | } |
760 | |
761 | void setTypeSourceInfo(TypeSourceInfo *TI) { |
762 | if (hasExtInfo()) |
763 | getExtInfo()->TInfo = TI; |
764 | else |
765 | DeclInfo = TI; |
766 | } |
767 | |
768 | /// Return start of source range ignoring outer template declarations. |
769 | SourceLocation getInnerLocStart() const { return InnerLocStart; } |
770 | void setInnerLocStart(SourceLocation L) { InnerLocStart = L; } |
771 | |
772 | /// Return start of source range taking into account any outer template |
773 | /// declarations. |
774 | SourceLocation getOuterLocStart() const; |
775 | |
776 | SourceRange getSourceRange() const override LLVM_READONLY__attribute__((__pure__)); |
777 | |
778 | SourceLocation getBeginLoc() const LLVM_READONLY__attribute__((__pure__)) { |
779 | return getOuterLocStart(); |
780 | } |
781 | |
782 | /// Retrieve the nested-name-specifier that qualifies the name of this |
783 | /// declaration, if it was present in the source. |
784 | NestedNameSpecifier *getQualifier() const { |
785 | return hasExtInfo() ? getExtInfo()->QualifierLoc.getNestedNameSpecifier() |
786 | : nullptr; |
787 | } |
788 | |
789 | /// Retrieve the nested-name-specifier (with source-location |
790 | /// information) that qualifies the name of this declaration, if it was |
791 | /// present in the source. |
792 | NestedNameSpecifierLoc getQualifierLoc() const { |
793 | return hasExtInfo() ? getExtInfo()->QualifierLoc |
794 | : NestedNameSpecifierLoc(); |
795 | } |
796 | |
797 | void setQualifierInfo(NestedNameSpecifierLoc QualifierLoc); |
798 | |
799 | /// \brief Get the constraint-expression introduced by the trailing |
800 | /// requires-clause in the function/member declaration, or null if no |
801 | /// requires-clause was provided. |
802 | Expr *getTrailingRequiresClause() { |
803 | return hasExtInfo() ? getExtInfo()->TrailingRequiresClause |
804 | : nullptr; |
805 | } |
806 | |
807 | const Expr *getTrailingRequiresClause() const { |
808 | return hasExtInfo() ? getExtInfo()->TrailingRequiresClause |
809 | : nullptr; |
810 | } |
811 | |
812 | void setTrailingRequiresClause(Expr *TrailingRequiresClause); |
813 | |
814 | unsigned getNumTemplateParameterLists() const { |
815 | return hasExtInfo() ? getExtInfo()->NumTemplParamLists : 0; |
816 | } |
817 | |
818 | TemplateParameterList *getTemplateParameterList(unsigned index) const { |
819 | assert(index < getNumTemplateParameterLists())((void)0); |
820 | return getExtInfo()->TemplParamLists[index]; |
821 | } |
822 | |
823 | void setTemplateParameterListsInfo(ASTContext &Context, |
824 | ArrayRef<TemplateParameterList *> TPLists); |
825 | |
826 | SourceLocation getTypeSpecStartLoc() const; |
827 | SourceLocation getTypeSpecEndLoc() const; |
828 | |
829 | // Implement isa/cast/dyncast/etc. |
830 | static bool classof(const Decl *D) { return classofKind(D->getKind()); } |
831 | static bool classofKind(Kind K) { |
832 | return K >= firstDeclarator && K <= lastDeclarator; |
833 | } |
834 | }; |
835 | |
836 | /// Structure used to store a statement, the constant value to |
837 | /// which it was evaluated (if any), and whether or not the statement |
838 | /// is an integral constant expression (if known). |
839 | struct EvaluatedStmt { |
840 | /// Whether this statement was already evaluated. |
841 | bool WasEvaluated : 1; |
842 | |
843 | /// Whether this statement is being evaluated. |
844 | bool IsEvaluating : 1; |
845 | |
846 | /// Whether this variable is known to have constant initialization. This is |
847 | /// currently only computed in C++, for static / thread storage duration |
848 | /// variables that might have constant initialization and for variables that |
849 | /// are usable in constant expressions. |
850 | bool HasConstantInitialization : 1; |
851 | |
852 | /// Whether this variable is known to have constant destruction. That is, |
853 | /// whether running the destructor on the initial value is a side-effect |
854 | /// (and doesn't inspect any state that might have changed during program |
855 | /// execution). This is currently only computed if the destructor is |
856 | /// non-trivial. |
857 | bool HasConstantDestruction : 1; |
858 | |
859 | /// In C++98, whether the initializer is an ICE. This affects whether the |
860 | /// variable is usable in constant expressions. |
861 | bool HasICEInit : 1; |
862 | bool CheckedForICEInit : 1; |
863 | |
864 | Stmt *Value; |
865 | APValue Evaluated; |
866 | |
867 | EvaluatedStmt() |
868 | : WasEvaluated(false), IsEvaluating(false), |
869 | HasConstantInitialization(false), HasConstantDestruction(false), |
870 | HasICEInit(false), CheckedForICEInit(false) {} |
871 | }; |
872 | |
873 | /// Represents a variable declaration or definition. |
874 | class VarDecl : public DeclaratorDecl, public Redeclarable<VarDecl> { |
875 | public: |
876 | /// Initialization styles. |
877 | enum InitializationStyle { |
878 | /// C-style initialization with assignment |
879 | CInit, |
880 | |
881 | /// Call-style initialization (C++98) |
882 | CallInit, |
883 | |
884 | /// Direct list-initialization (C++11) |
885 | ListInit |
886 | }; |
887 | |
888 | /// Kinds of thread-local storage. |
889 | enum TLSKind { |
890 | /// Not a TLS variable. |
891 | TLS_None, |
892 | |
893 | /// TLS with a known-constant initializer. |
894 | TLS_Static, |
895 | |
896 | /// TLS with a dynamic initializer. |
897 | TLS_Dynamic |
898 | }; |
899 | |
900 | /// Return the string used to specify the storage class \p SC. |
901 | /// |
902 | /// It is illegal to call this function with SC == None. |
903 | static const char *getStorageClassSpecifierString(StorageClass SC); |
904 | |
905 | protected: |
906 | // A pointer union of Stmt * and EvaluatedStmt *. When an EvaluatedStmt, we |
907 | // have allocated the auxiliary struct of information there. |
908 | // |
909 | // TODO: It is a bit unfortunate to use a PointerUnion inside the VarDecl for |
910 | // this as *many* VarDecls are ParmVarDecls that don't have default |
911 | // arguments. We could save some space by moving this pointer union to be |
912 | // allocated in trailing space when necessary. |
913 | using InitType = llvm::PointerUnion<Stmt *, EvaluatedStmt *>; |
914 | |
915 | /// The initializer for this variable or, for a ParmVarDecl, the |
916 | /// C++ default argument. |
917 | mutable InitType Init; |
918 | |
919 | private: |
920 | friend class ASTDeclReader; |
921 | friend class ASTNodeImporter; |
922 | friend class StmtIteratorBase; |
923 | |
924 | class VarDeclBitfields { |
925 | friend class ASTDeclReader; |
926 | friend class VarDecl; |
927 | |
928 | unsigned SClass : 3; |
929 | unsigned TSCSpec : 2; |
930 | unsigned InitStyle : 2; |
931 | |
932 | /// Whether this variable is an ARC pseudo-__strong variable; see |
933 | /// isARCPseudoStrong() for details. |
934 | unsigned ARCPseudoStrong : 1; |
935 | }; |
936 | enum { NumVarDeclBits = 8 }; |
937 | |
938 | protected: |
939 | enum { NumParameterIndexBits = 8 }; |
940 | |
941 | enum DefaultArgKind { |
942 | DAK_None, |
943 | DAK_Unparsed, |
944 | DAK_Uninstantiated, |
945 | DAK_Normal |
946 | }; |
947 | |
948 | enum { NumScopeDepthOrObjCQualsBits = 7 }; |
949 | |
950 | class ParmVarDeclBitfields { |
951 | friend class ASTDeclReader; |
952 | friend class ParmVarDecl; |
953 | |
954 | unsigned : NumVarDeclBits; |
955 | |
956 | /// Whether this parameter inherits a default argument from a |
957 | /// prior declaration. |
958 | unsigned HasInheritedDefaultArg : 1; |
959 | |
960 | /// Describes the kind of default argument for this parameter. By default |
961 | /// this is none. If this is normal, then the default argument is stored in |
962 | /// the \c VarDecl initializer expression unless we were unable to parse |
963 | /// (even an invalid) expression for the default argument. |
964 | unsigned DefaultArgKind : 2; |
965 | |
966 | /// Whether this parameter undergoes K&R argument promotion. |
967 | unsigned IsKNRPromoted : 1; |
968 | |
969 | /// Whether this parameter is an ObjC method parameter or not. |
970 | unsigned IsObjCMethodParam : 1; |
971 | |
972 | /// If IsObjCMethodParam, a Decl::ObjCDeclQualifier. |
973 | /// Otherwise, the number of function parameter scopes enclosing |
974 | /// the function parameter scope in which this parameter was |
975 | /// declared. |
976 | unsigned ScopeDepthOrObjCQuals : NumScopeDepthOrObjCQualsBits; |
977 | |
978 | /// The number of parameters preceding this parameter in the |
979 | /// function parameter scope in which it was declared. |
980 | unsigned ParameterIndex : NumParameterIndexBits; |
981 | }; |
982 | |
983 | class NonParmVarDeclBitfields { |
984 | friend class ASTDeclReader; |
985 | friend class ImplicitParamDecl; |
986 | friend class VarDecl; |
987 | |
988 | unsigned : NumVarDeclBits; |
989 | |
990 | // FIXME: We need something similar to CXXRecordDecl::DefinitionData. |
991 | /// Whether this variable is a definition which was demoted due to |
992 | /// module merge. |
993 | unsigned IsThisDeclarationADemotedDefinition : 1; |
994 | |
995 | /// Whether this variable is the exception variable in a C++ catch |
996 | /// or an Objective-C @catch statement. |
997 | unsigned ExceptionVar : 1; |
998 | |
999 | /// Whether this local variable could be allocated in the return |
1000 | /// slot of its function, enabling the named return value optimization |
1001 | /// (NRVO). |
1002 | unsigned NRVOVariable : 1; |
1003 | |
1004 | /// Whether this variable is the for-range-declaration in a C++0x |
1005 | /// for-range statement. |
1006 | unsigned CXXForRangeDecl : 1; |
1007 | |
1008 | /// Whether this variable is the for-in loop declaration in Objective-C. |
1009 | unsigned ObjCForDecl : 1; |
1010 | |
1011 | /// Whether this variable is (C++1z) inline. |
1012 | unsigned IsInline : 1; |
1013 | |
1014 | /// Whether this variable has (C++1z) inline explicitly specified. |
1015 | unsigned IsInlineSpecified : 1; |
1016 | |
1017 | /// Whether this variable is (C++0x) constexpr. |
1018 | unsigned IsConstexpr : 1; |
1019 | |
1020 | /// Whether this variable is the implicit variable for a lambda |
1021 | /// init-capture. |
1022 | unsigned IsInitCapture : 1; |
1023 | |
1024 | /// Whether this local extern variable's previous declaration was |
1025 | /// declared in the same block scope. This controls whether we should merge |
1026 | /// the type of this declaration with its previous declaration. |
1027 | unsigned PreviousDeclInSameBlockScope : 1; |
1028 | |
1029 | /// Defines kind of the ImplicitParamDecl: 'this', 'self', 'vtt', '_cmd' or |
1030 | /// something else. |
1031 | unsigned ImplicitParamKind : 3; |
1032 | |
1033 | unsigned EscapingByref : 1; |
1034 | }; |
1035 | |
1036 | union { |
1037 | unsigned AllBits; |
1038 | VarDeclBitfields VarDeclBits; |
1039 | ParmVarDeclBitfields ParmVarDeclBits; |
1040 | NonParmVarDeclBitfields NonParmVarDeclBits; |
1041 | }; |
1042 | |
1043 | VarDecl(Kind DK, ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, SourceLocation StartLoc, |
1044 | SourceLocation IdLoc, IdentifierInfo *Id, QualType T, |
1045 | TypeSourceInfo *TInfo, StorageClass SC); |
1046 | |
1047 | using redeclarable_base = Redeclarable<VarDecl>; |
1048 | |
1049 | VarDecl *getNextRedeclarationImpl() override { |
1050 | return getNextRedeclaration(); |
1051 | } |
1052 | |
1053 | VarDecl *getPreviousDeclImpl() override { |
1054 | return getPreviousDecl(); |
1055 | } |
1056 | |
1057 | VarDecl *getMostRecentDeclImpl() override { |
1058 | return getMostRecentDecl(); |
1059 | } |
1060 | |
1061 | public: |
1062 | using redecl_range = redeclarable_base::redecl_range; |
1063 | using redecl_iterator = redeclarable_base::redecl_iterator; |
1064 | |
1065 | using redeclarable_base::redecls_begin; |
1066 | using redeclarable_base::redecls_end; |
1067 | using redeclarable_base::redecls; |
1068 | using redeclarable_base::getPreviousDecl; |
1069 | using redeclarable_base::getMostRecentDecl; |
1070 | using redeclarable_base::isFirstDecl; |
1071 | |
1072 | static VarDecl *Create(ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, |
1073 | SourceLocation StartLoc, SourceLocation IdLoc, |
1074 | IdentifierInfo *Id, QualType T, TypeSourceInfo *TInfo, |
1075 | StorageClass S); |
1076 | |
1077 | static VarDecl *CreateDeserialized(ASTContext &C, unsigned ID); |
1078 | |
1079 | SourceRange getSourceRange() const override LLVM_READONLY__attribute__((__pure__)); |
1080 | |
1081 | /// Returns the storage class as written in the source. For the |
1082 | /// computed linkage of symbol, see getLinkage. |
1083 | StorageClass getStorageClass() const { |
1084 | return (StorageClass) VarDeclBits.SClass; |
1085 | } |
1086 | void setStorageClass(StorageClass SC); |
1087 | |
1088 | void setTSCSpec(ThreadStorageClassSpecifier TSC) { |
1089 | VarDeclBits.TSCSpec = TSC; |
1090 | assert(VarDeclBits.TSCSpec == TSC && "truncation")((void)0); |
1091 | } |
1092 | ThreadStorageClassSpecifier getTSCSpec() const { |
1093 | return static_cast<ThreadStorageClassSpecifier>(VarDeclBits.TSCSpec); |
1094 | } |
1095 | TLSKind getTLSKind() const; |
1096 | |
1097 | /// Returns true if a variable with function scope is a non-static local |
1098 | /// variable. |
1099 | bool hasLocalStorage() const { |
1100 | if (getStorageClass() == SC_None) { |
1101 | // OpenCL v1.2 s6.5.3: The __constant or constant address space name is |
1102 | // used to describe variables allocated in global memory and which are |
1103 | // accessed inside a kernel(s) as read-only variables. As such, variables |
1104 | // in constant address space cannot have local storage. |
1105 | if (getType().getAddressSpace() == LangAS::opencl_constant) |
1106 | return false; |
1107 | // Second check is for C++11 [dcl.stc]p4. |
1108 | return !isFileVarDecl() && getTSCSpec() == TSCS_unspecified; |
1109 | } |
1110 | |
1111 | // Global Named Register (GNU extension) |
1112 | if (getStorageClass() == SC_Register && !isLocalVarDeclOrParm()) |
1113 | return false; |
1114 | |
1115 | // Return true for: Auto, Register. |
1116 | // Return false for: Extern, Static, PrivateExtern, OpenCLWorkGroupLocal. |
1117 | |
1118 | return getStorageClass() >= SC_Auto; |
1119 | } |
1120 | |
1121 | /// Returns true if a variable with function scope is a static local |
1122 | /// variable. |
1123 | bool isStaticLocal() const { |
1124 | return (getStorageClass() == SC_Static || |
1125 | // C++11 [dcl.stc]p4 |
1126 | (getStorageClass() == SC_None && getTSCSpec() == TSCS_thread_local)) |
1127 | && !isFileVarDecl(); |
1128 | } |
1129 | |
1130 | /// Returns true if a variable has extern or __private_extern__ |
1131 | /// storage. |
1132 | bool hasExternalStorage() const { |
1133 | return getStorageClass() == SC_Extern || |
1134 | getStorageClass() == SC_PrivateExtern; |
1135 | } |
1136 | |
1137 | /// Returns true for all variables that do not have local storage. |
1138 | /// |
1139 | /// This includes all global variables as well as static variables declared |
1140 | /// within a function. |
1141 | bool hasGlobalStorage() const { return !hasLocalStorage(); } |
1142 | |
1143 | /// Get the storage duration of this variable, per C++ [basic.stc]. |
1144 | StorageDuration getStorageDuration() const { |
1145 | return hasLocalStorage() ? SD_Automatic : |
1146 | getTSCSpec() ? SD_Thread : SD_Static; |
1147 | } |
1148 | |
1149 | /// Compute the language linkage. |
1150 | LanguageLinkage getLanguageLinkage() const; |
1151 | |
1152 | /// Determines whether this variable is a variable with external, C linkage. |
1153 | bool isExternC() const; |
1154 | |
1155 | /// Determines whether this variable's context is, or is nested within, |
1156 | /// a C++ extern "C" linkage spec. |
1157 | bool isInExternCContext() const; |
1158 | |
1159 | /// Determines whether this variable's context is, or is nested within, |
1160 | /// a C++ extern "C++" linkage spec. |
1161 | bool isInExternCXXContext() const; |
1162 | |
1163 | /// Returns true for local variable declarations other than parameters. |
1164 | /// Note that this includes static variables inside of functions. It also |
1165 | /// includes variables inside blocks. |
1166 | /// |
1167 | /// void foo() { int x; static int y; extern int z; } |
1168 | bool isLocalVarDecl() const { |
1169 | if (getKind() != Decl::Var && getKind() != Decl::Decomposition) |
1170 | return false; |
1171 | if (const DeclContext *DC = getLexicalDeclContext()) |
1172 | return DC->getRedeclContext()->isFunctionOrMethod(); |
1173 | return false; |
1174 | } |
1175 | |
1176 | /// Similar to isLocalVarDecl but also includes parameters. |
1177 | bool isLocalVarDeclOrParm() const { |
1178 | return isLocalVarDecl() || getKind() == Decl::ParmVar; |
1179 | } |
1180 | |
1181 | /// Similar to isLocalVarDecl, but excludes variables declared in blocks. |
1182 | bool isFunctionOrMethodVarDecl() const { |
1183 | if (getKind() != Decl::Var && getKind() != Decl::Decomposition) |
1184 | return false; |
1185 | const DeclContext *DC = getLexicalDeclContext()->getRedeclContext(); |
1186 | return DC->isFunctionOrMethod() && DC->getDeclKind() != Decl::Block; |
1187 | } |
1188 | |
1189 | /// Determines whether this is a static data member. |
1190 | /// |
1191 | /// This will only be true in C++, and applies to, e.g., the |
1192 | /// variable 'x' in: |
1193 | /// \code |
1194 | /// struct S { |
1195 | /// static int x; |
1196 | /// }; |
1197 | /// \endcode |
1198 | bool isStaticDataMember() const { |
1199 | // If it wasn't static, it would be a FieldDecl. |
1200 | return getKind() != Decl::ParmVar && getDeclContext()->isRecord(); |
1201 | } |
1202 | |
1203 | VarDecl *getCanonicalDecl() override; |
1204 | const VarDecl *getCanonicalDecl() const { |
1205 | return const_cast<VarDecl*>(this)->getCanonicalDecl(); |
1206 | } |
1207 | |
1208 | enum DefinitionKind { |
1209 | /// This declaration is only a declaration. |
1210 | DeclarationOnly, |
1211 | |
1212 | /// This declaration is a tentative definition. |
1213 | TentativeDefinition, |
1214 | |
1215 | /// This declaration is definitely a definition. |
1216 | Definition |
1217 | }; |
1218 | |
1219 | /// Check whether this declaration is a definition. If this could be |
1220 | /// a tentative definition (in C), don't check whether there's an overriding |
1221 | /// definition. |
1222 | DefinitionKind isThisDeclarationADefinition(ASTContext &) const; |
1223 | DefinitionKind isThisDeclarationADefinition() const { |
1224 | return isThisDeclarationADefinition(getASTContext()); |
1225 | } |
1226 | |
1227 | /// Check whether this variable is defined in this translation unit. |
1228 | DefinitionKind hasDefinition(ASTContext &) const; |
1229 | DefinitionKind hasDefinition() const { |
1230 | return hasDefinition(getASTContext()); |
1231 | } |
1232 | |
1233 | /// Get the tentative definition that acts as the real definition in a TU. |
1234 | /// Returns null if there is a proper definition available. |
1235 | VarDecl *getActingDefinition(); |
1236 | const VarDecl *getActingDefinition() const { |
1237 | return const_cast<VarDecl*>(this)->getActingDefinition(); |
1238 | } |
1239 | |
1240 | /// Get the real (not just tentative) definition for this declaration. |
1241 | VarDecl *getDefinition(ASTContext &); |
1242 | const VarDecl *getDefinition(ASTContext &C) const { |
1243 | return const_cast<VarDecl*>(this)->getDefinition(C); |
1244 | } |
1245 | VarDecl *getDefinition() { |
1246 | return getDefinition(getASTContext()); |
1247 | } |
1248 | const VarDecl *getDefinition() const { |
1249 | return const_cast<VarDecl*>(this)->getDefinition(); |
1250 | } |
1251 | |
1252 | /// Determine whether this is or was instantiated from an out-of-line |
1253 | /// definition of a static data member. |
1254 | bool isOutOfLine() const override; |
1255 | |
1256 | /// Returns true for file scoped variable declaration. |
1257 | bool isFileVarDecl() const { |
1258 | Kind K = getKind(); |
1259 | if (K == ParmVar || K == ImplicitParam) |
1260 | return false; |
1261 | |
1262 | if (getLexicalDeclContext()->getRedeclContext()->isFileContext()) |
1263 | return true; |
1264 | |
1265 | if (isStaticDataMember()) |
1266 | return true; |
1267 | |
1268 | return false; |
1269 | } |
1270 | |
1271 | /// Get the initializer for this variable, no matter which |
1272 | /// declaration it is attached to. |
1273 | const Expr *getAnyInitializer() const { |
1274 | const VarDecl *D; |
1275 | return getAnyInitializer(D); |
1276 | } |
1277 | |
1278 | /// Get the initializer for this variable, no matter which |
1279 | /// declaration it is attached to. Also get that declaration. |
1280 | const Expr *getAnyInitializer(const VarDecl *&D) const; |
1281 | |
1282 | bool hasInit() const; |
1283 | const Expr *getInit() const { |
1284 | return const_cast<VarDecl *>(this)->getInit(); |
1285 | } |
1286 | Expr *getInit(); |
1287 | |
1288 | /// Retrieve the address of the initializer expression. |
1289 | Stmt **getInitAddress(); |
1290 | |
1291 | void setInit(Expr *I); |
1292 | |
1293 | /// Get the initializing declaration of this variable, if any. This is |
1294 | /// usually the definition, except that for a static data member it can be |
1295 | /// the in-class declaration. |
1296 | VarDecl *getInitializingDeclaration(); |
1297 | const VarDecl *getInitializingDeclaration() const { |
1298 | return const_cast<VarDecl *>(this)->getInitializingDeclaration(); |
1299 | } |
1300 | |
1301 | /// Determine whether this variable's value might be usable in a |
1302 | /// constant expression, according to the relevant language standard. |
1303 | /// This only checks properties of the declaration, and does not check |
1304 | /// whether the initializer is in fact a constant expression. |
1305 | /// |
1306 | /// This corresponds to C++20 [expr.const]p3's notion of a |
1307 | /// "potentially-constant" variable. |
1308 | bool mightBeUsableInConstantExpressions(const ASTContext &C) const; |
1309 | |
1310 | /// Determine whether this variable's value can be used in a |
1311 | /// constant expression, according to the relevant language standard, |
1312 | /// including checking whether it was initialized by a constant expression. |
1313 | bool isUsableInConstantExpressions(const ASTContext &C) const; |
1314 | |
1315 | EvaluatedStmt *ensureEvaluatedStmt() const; |
1316 | EvaluatedStmt *getEvaluatedStmt() const; |
1317 | |
1318 | /// Attempt to evaluate the value of the initializer attached to this |
1319 | /// declaration, and produce notes explaining why it cannot be evaluated. |
1320 | /// Returns a pointer to the value if evaluation succeeded, 0 otherwise. |
1321 | APValue *evaluateValue() const; |
1322 | |
1323 | private: |
1324 | APValue *evaluateValueImpl(SmallVectorImpl<PartialDiagnosticAt> &Notes, |
1325 | bool IsConstantInitialization) const; |
1326 | |
1327 | public: |
1328 | /// Return the already-evaluated value of this variable's |
1329 | /// initializer, or NULL if the value is not yet known. Returns pointer |
1330 | /// to untyped APValue if the value could not be evaluated. |
1331 | APValue *getEvaluatedValue() const; |
1332 | |
1333 | /// Evaluate the destruction of this variable to determine if it constitutes |
1334 | /// constant destruction. |
1335 | /// |
1336 | /// \pre hasConstantInitialization() |
1337 | /// \return \c true if this variable has constant destruction, \c false if |
1338 | /// not. |
1339 | bool evaluateDestruction(SmallVectorImpl<PartialDiagnosticAt> &Notes) const; |
1340 | |
1341 | /// Determine whether this variable has constant initialization. |
1342 | /// |
1343 | /// This is only set in two cases: when the language semantics require |
1344 | /// constant initialization (globals in C and some globals in C++), and when |
1345 | /// the variable is usable in constant expressions (constexpr, const int, and |
1346 | /// reference variables in C++). |
1347 | bool hasConstantInitialization() const; |
1348 | |
1349 | /// Determine whether the initializer of this variable is an integer constant |
1350 | /// expression. For use in C++98, where this affects whether the variable is |
1351 | /// usable in constant expressions. |
1352 | bool hasICEInitializer(const ASTContext &Context) const; |
1353 | |
1354 | /// Evaluate the initializer of this variable to determine whether it's a |
1355 | /// constant initializer. Should only be called once, after completing the |
1356 | /// definition of the variable. |
1357 | bool checkForConstantInitialization( |
1358 | SmallVectorImpl<PartialDiagnosticAt> &Notes) const; |
1359 | |
1360 | void setInitStyle(InitializationStyle Style) { |
1361 | VarDeclBits.InitStyle = Style; |
1362 | } |
1363 | |
1364 | /// The style of initialization for this declaration. |
1365 | /// |
1366 | /// C-style initialization is "int x = 1;". Call-style initialization is |
1367 | /// a C++98 direct-initializer, e.g. "int x(1);". The Init expression will be |
1368 | /// the expression inside the parens or a "ClassType(a,b,c)" class constructor |
1369 | /// expression for class types. List-style initialization is C++11 syntax, |
1370 | /// e.g. "int x{1};". Clients can distinguish between different forms of |
1371 | /// initialization by checking this value. In particular, "int x = {1};" is |
1372 | /// C-style, "int x({1})" is call-style, and "int x{1};" is list-style; the |
1373 | /// Init expression in all three cases is an InitListExpr. |
1374 | InitializationStyle getInitStyle() const { |
1375 | return static_cast<InitializationStyle>(VarDeclBits.InitStyle); |
1376 | } |
1377 | |
1378 | /// Whether the initializer is a direct-initializer (list or call). |
1379 | bool isDirectInit() const { |
1380 | return getInitStyle() != CInit; |
1381 | } |
1382 | |
1383 | /// If this definition should pretend to be a declaration. |
1384 | bool isThisDeclarationADemotedDefinition() const { |
1385 | return isa<ParmVarDecl>(this) ? false : |
1386 | NonParmVarDeclBits.IsThisDeclarationADemotedDefinition; |
1387 | } |
1388 | |
1389 | /// This is a definition which should be demoted to a declaration. |
1390 | /// |
1391 | /// In some cases (mostly module merging) we can end up with two visible |
1392 | /// definitions one of which needs to be demoted to a declaration to keep |
1393 | /// the AST invariants. |
1394 | void demoteThisDefinitionToDeclaration() { |
1395 | assert(isThisDeclarationADefinition() && "Not a definition!")((void)0); |
1396 | assert(!isa<ParmVarDecl>(this) && "Cannot demote ParmVarDecls!")((void)0); |
1397 | NonParmVarDeclBits.IsThisDeclarationADemotedDefinition = 1; |
1398 | } |
1399 | |
1400 | /// Determine whether this variable is the exception variable in a |
1401 | /// C++ catch statememt or an Objective-C \@catch statement. |
1402 | bool isExceptionVariable() const { |
1403 | return isa<ParmVarDecl>(this) ? false : NonParmVarDeclBits.ExceptionVar; |
1404 | } |
1405 | void setExceptionVariable(bool EV) { |
1406 | assert(!isa<ParmVarDecl>(this))((void)0); |
1407 | NonParmVarDeclBits.ExceptionVar = EV; |
1408 | } |
1409 | |
1410 | /// Determine whether this local variable can be used with the named |
1411 | /// return value optimization (NRVO). |
1412 | /// |
1413 | /// The named return value optimization (NRVO) works by marking certain |
1414 | /// non-volatile local variables of class type as NRVO objects. These |
1415 | /// locals can be allocated within the return slot of their containing |
1416 | /// function, in which case there is no need to copy the object to the |
1417 | /// return slot when returning from the function. Within the function body, |
1418 | /// each return that returns the NRVO object will have this variable as its |
1419 | /// NRVO candidate. |
1420 | bool isNRVOVariable() const { |
1421 | return isa<ParmVarDecl>(this) ? false : NonParmVarDeclBits.NRVOVariable; |
1422 | } |
1423 | void setNRVOVariable(bool NRVO) { |
1424 | assert(!isa<ParmVarDecl>(this))((void)0); |
1425 | NonParmVarDeclBits.NRVOVariable = NRVO; |
1426 | } |
1427 | |
1428 | /// Determine whether this variable is the for-range-declaration in |
1429 | /// a C++0x for-range statement. |
1430 | bool isCXXForRangeDecl() const { |
1431 | return isa<ParmVarDecl>(this) ? false : NonParmVarDeclBits.CXXForRangeDecl; |
1432 | } |
1433 | void setCXXForRangeDecl(bool FRD) { |
1434 | assert(!isa<ParmVarDecl>(this))((void)0); |
1435 | NonParmVarDeclBits.CXXForRangeDecl = FRD; |
1436 | } |
1437 | |
1438 | /// Determine whether this variable is a for-loop declaration for a |
1439 | /// for-in statement in Objective-C. |
1440 | bool isObjCForDecl() const { |
1441 | return NonParmVarDeclBits.ObjCForDecl; |
1442 | } |
1443 | |
1444 | void setObjCForDecl(bool FRD) { |
1445 | NonParmVarDeclBits.ObjCForDecl = FRD; |
1446 | } |
1447 | |
1448 | /// Determine whether this variable is an ARC pseudo-__strong variable. A |
1449 | /// pseudo-__strong variable has a __strong-qualified type but does not |
1450 | /// actually retain the object written into it. Generally such variables are |
1451 | /// also 'const' for safety. There are 3 cases where this will be set, 1) if |
1452 | /// the variable is annotated with the objc_externally_retained attribute, 2) |
1453 | /// if its 'self' in a non-init method, or 3) if its the variable in an for-in |
1454 | /// loop. |
1455 | bool isARCPseudoStrong() const { return VarDeclBits.ARCPseudoStrong; } |
1456 | void setARCPseudoStrong(bool PS) { VarDeclBits.ARCPseudoStrong = PS; } |
1457 | |
1458 | /// Whether this variable is (C++1z) inline. |
1459 | bool isInline() const { |
1460 | return isa<ParmVarDecl>(this) ? false : NonParmVarDeclBits.IsInline; |
1461 | } |
1462 | bool isInlineSpecified() const { |
1463 | return isa<ParmVarDecl>(this) ? false |
1464 | : NonParmVarDeclBits.IsInlineSpecified; |
1465 | } |
1466 | void setInlineSpecified() { |
1467 | assert(!isa<ParmVarDecl>(this))((void)0); |
1468 | NonParmVarDeclBits.IsInline = true; |
1469 | NonParmVarDeclBits.IsInlineSpecified = true; |
1470 | } |
1471 | void setImplicitlyInline() { |
1472 | assert(!isa<ParmVarDecl>(this))((void)0); |
1473 | NonParmVarDeclBits.IsInline = true; |
1474 | } |
1475 | |
1476 | /// Whether this variable is (C++11) constexpr. |
1477 | bool isConstexpr() const { |
1478 | return isa<ParmVarDecl>(this) ? false : NonParmVarDeclBits.IsConstexpr; |
1479 | } |
1480 | void setConstexpr(bool IC) { |
1481 | assert(!isa<ParmVarDecl>(this))((void)0); |
1482 | NonParmVarDeclBits.IsConstexpr = IC; |
1483 | } |
1484 | |
1485 | /// Whether this variable is the implicit variable for a lambda init-capture. |
1486 | bool isInitCapture() const { |
1487 | return isa<ParmVarDecl>(this) ? false : NonParmVarDeclBits.IsInitCapture; |
1488 | } |
1489 | void setInitCapture(bool IC) { |
1490 | assert(!isa<ParmVarDecl>(this))((void)0); |
1491 | NonParmVarDeclBits.IsInitCapture = IC; |
1492 | } |
1493 | |
1494 | /// Determine whether this variable is actually a function parameter pack or |
1495 | /// init-capture pack. |
1496 | bool isParameterPack() const; |
1497 | |
1498 | /// Whether this local extern variable declaration's previous declaration |
1499 | /// was declared in the same block scope. Only correct in C++. |
1500 | bool isPreviousDeclInSameBlockScope() const { |
1501 | return isa<ParmVarDecl>(this) |
1502 | ? false |
1503 | : NonParmVarDeclBits.PreviousDeclInSameBlockScope; |
1504 | } |
1505 | void setPreviousDeclInSameBlockScope(bool Same) { |
1506 | assert(!isa<ParmVarDecl>(this))((void)0); |
1507 | NonParmVarDeclBits.PreviousDeclInSameBlockScope = Same; |
1508 | } |
1509 | |
1510 | /// Indicates the capture is a __block variable that is captured by a block |
1511 | /// that can potentially escape (a block for which BlockDecl::doesNotEscape |
1512 | /// returns false). |
1513 | bool isEscapingByref() const; |
1514 | |
1515 | /// Indicates the capture is a __block variable that is never captured by an |
1516 | /// escaping block. |
1517 | bool isNonEscapingByref() const; |
1518 | |
1519 | void setEscapingByref() { |
1520 | NonParmVarDeclBits.EscapingByref = true; |
1521 | } |
1522 | |
1523 | /// Determines if this variable's alignment is dependent. |
1524 | bool hasDependentAlignment() const; |
1525 | |
1526 | /// Retrieve the variable declaration from which this variable could |
1527 | /// be instantiated, if it is an instantiation (rather than a non-template). |
1528 | VarDecl *getTemplateInstantiationPattern() const; |
1529 | |
1530 | /// If this variable is an instantiated static data member of a |
1531 | /// class template specialization, returns the templated static data member |
1532 | /// from which it was instantiated. |
1533 | VarDecl *getInstantiatedFromStaticDataMember() const; |
1534 | |
1535 | /// If this variable is an instantiation of a variable template or a |
1536 | /// static data member of a class template, determine what kind of |
1537 | /// template specialization or instantiation this is. |
1538 | TemplateSpecializationKind getTemplateSpecializationKind() const; |
1539 | |
1540 | /// Get the template specialization kind of this variable for the purposes of |
1541 | /// template instantiation. This differs from getTemplateSpecializationKind() |
1542 | /// for an instantiation of a class-scope explicit specialization. |
1543 | TemplateSpecializationKind |
1544 | getTemplateSpecializationKindForInstantiation() const; |
1545 | |
1546 | /// If this variable is an instantiation of a variable template or a |
1547 | /// static data member of a class template, determine its point of |
1548 | /// instantiation. |
1549 | SourceLocation getPointOfInstantiation() const; |
1550 | |
1551 | /// If this variable is an instantiation of a static data member of a |
1552 | /// class template specialization, retrieves the member specialization |
1553 | /// information. |
1554 | MemberSpecializationInfo *getMemberSpecializationInfo() const; |
1555 | |
1556 | /// For a static data member that was instantiated from a static |
1557 | /// data member of a class template, set the template specialiation kind. |
1558 | void setTemplateSpecializationKind(TemplateSpecializationKind TSK, |
1559 | SourceLocation PointOfInstantiation = SourceLocation()); |
1560 | |
1561 | /// Specify that this variable is an instantiation of the |
1562 | /// static data member VD. |
1563 | void setInstantiationOfStaticDataMember(VarDecl *VD, |
1564 | TemplateSpecializationKind TSK); |
1565 | |
1566 | /// Retrieves the variable template that is described by this |
1567 | /// variable declaration. |
1568 | /// |
1569 | /// Every variable template is represented as a VarTemplateDecl and a |
1570 | /// VarDecl. The former contains template properties (such as |
1571 | /// the template parameter lists) while the latter contains the |
1572 | /// actual description of the template's |
1573 | /// contents. VarTemplateDecl::getTemplatedDecl() retrieves the |
1574 | /// VarDecl that from a VarTemplateDecl, while |
1575 | /// getDescribedVarTemplate() retrieves the VarTemplateDecl from |
1576 | /// a VarDecl. |
1577 | VarTemplateDecl *getDescribedVarTemplate() const; |
1578 | |
1579 | void setDescribedVarTemplate(VarTemplateDecl *Template); |
1580 | |
1581 | // Is this variable known to have a definition somewhere in the complete |
1582 | // program? This may be true even if the declaration has internal linkage and |
1583 | // has no definition within this source file. |
1584 | bool isKnownToBeDefined() const; |
1585 | |
1586 | /// Is destruction of this variable entirely suppressed? If so, the variable |
1587 | /// need not have a usable destructor at all. |
1588 | bool isNoDestroy(const ASTContext &) const; |
1589 | |
1590 | /// Would the destruction of this variable have any effect, and if so, what |
1591 | /// kind? |
1592 | QualType::DestructionKind needsDestruction(const ASTContext &Ctx) const; |
1593 | |
1594 | // Implement isa/cast/dyncast/etc. |
1595 | static bool classof(const Decl *D) { return classofKind(D->getKind()); } |
1596 | static bool classofKind(Kind K) { return K >= firstVar && K <= lastVar; } |
1597 | }; |
1598 | |
1599 | class ImplicitParamDecl : public VarDecl { |
1600 | void anchor() override; |
1601 | |
1602 | public: |
1603 | /// Defines the kind of the implicit parameter: is this an implicit parameter |
1604 | /// with pointer to 'this', 'self', '_cmd', virtual table pointers, captured |
1605 | /// context or something else. |
1606 | enum ImplicitParamKind : unsigned { |
1607 | /// Parameter for Objective-C 'self' argument |
1608 | ObjCSelf, |
1609 | |
1610 | /// Parameter for Objective-C '_cmd' argument |
1611 | ObjCCmd, |
1612 | |
1613 | /// Parameter for C++ 'this' argument |
1614 | CXXThis, |
1615 | |
1616 | /// Parameter for C++ virtual table pointers |
1617 | CXXVTT, |
1618 | |
1619 | /// Parameter for captured context |
1620 | CapturedContext, |
1621 | |
1622 | /// Other implicit parameter |
1623 | Other, |
1624 | }; |
1625 | |
1626 | /// Create implicit parameter. |
1627 | static ImplicitParamDecl *Create(ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, |
1628 | SourceLocation IdLoc, IdentifierInfo *Id, |
1629 | QualType T, ImplicitParamKind ParamKind); |
1630 | static ImplicitParamDecl *Create(ASTContext &C, QualType T, |
1631 | ImplicitParamKind ParamKind); |
1632 | |
1633 | static ImplicitParamDecl *CreateDeserialized(ASTContext &C, unsigned ID); |
1634 | |
1635 | ImplicitParamDecl(ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, SourceLocation IdLoc, |
1636 | IdentifierInfo *Id, QualType Type, |
1637 | ImplicitParamKind ParamKind) |
1638 | : VarDecl(ImplicitParam, C, DC, IdLoc, IdLoc, Id, Type, |
1639 | /*TInfo=*/nullptr, SC_None) { |
1640 | NonParmVarDeclBits.ImplicitParamKind = ParamKind; |
1641 | setImplicit(); |
1642 | } |
1643 | |
1644 | ImplicitParamDecl(ASTContext &C, QualType Type, ImplicitParamKind ParamKind) |
1645 | : VarDecl(ImplicitParam, C, /*DC=*/nullptr, SourceLocation(), |
1646 | SourceLocation(), /*Id=*/nullptr, Type, |
1647 | /*TInfo=*/nullptr, SC_None) { |
1648 | NonParmVarDeclBits.ImplicitParamKind = ParamKind; |
1649 | setImplicit(); |
1650 | } |
1651 | |
1652 | /// Returns the implicit parameter kind. |
1653 | ImplicitParamKind getParameterKind() const { |
1654 | return static_cast<ImplicitParamKind>(NonParmVarDeclBits.ImplicitParamKind); |
1655 | } |
1656 | |
1657 | // Implement isa/cast/dyncast/etc. |
1658 | static bool classof(const Decl *D) { return classofKind(D->getKind()); } |
1659 | static bool classofKind(Kind K) { return K == ImplicitParam; } |
1660 | }; |
1661 | |
1662 | /// Represents a parameter to a function. |
1663 | class ParmVarDecl : public VarDecl { |
1664 | public: |
1665 | enum { MaxFunctionScopeDepth = 255 }; |
1666 | enum { MaxFunctionScopeIndex = 255 }; |
1667 | |
1668 | protected: |
1669 | ParmVarDecl(Kind DK, ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, SourceLocation StartLoc, |
1670 | SourceLocation IdLoc, IdentifierInfo *Id, QualType T, |
1671 | TypeSourceInfo *TInfo, StorageClass S, Expr *DefArg) |
1672 | : VarDecl(DK, C, DC, StartLoc, IdLoc, Id, T, TInfo, S) { |
1673 | assert(ParmVarDeclBits.HasInheritedDefaultArg == false)((void)0); |
1674 | assert(ParmVarDeclBits.DefaultArgKind == DAK_None)((void)0); |
1675 | assert(ParmVarDeclBits.IsKNRPromoted == false)((void)0); |
1676 | assert(ParmVarDeclBits.IsObjCMethodParam == false)((void)0); |
1677 | setDefaultArg(DefArg); |
1678 | } |
1679 | |
1680 | public: |
1681 | static ParmVarDecl *Create(ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, |
1682 | SourceLocation StartLoc, |
1683 | SourceLocation IdLoc, IdentifierInfo *Id, |
1684 | QualType T, TypeSourceInfo *TInfo, |
1685 | StorageClass S, Expr *DefArg); |
1686 | |
1687 | static ParmVarDecl *CreateDeserialized(ASTContext &C, unsigned ID); |
1688 | |
1689 | SourceRange getSourceRange() const override LLVM_READONLY__attribute__((__pure__)); |
1690 | |
1691 | void setObjCMethodScopeInfo(unsigned parameterIndex) { |
1692 | ParmVarDeclBits.IsObjCMethodParam = true; |
1693 | setParameterIndex(parameterIndex); |
1694 | } |
1695 | |
1696 | void setScopeInfo(unsigned scopeDepth, unsigned parameterIndex) { |
1697 | assert(!ParmVarDeclBits.IsObjCMethodParam)((void)0); |
1698 | |
1699 | ParmVarDeclBits.ScopeDepthOrObjCQuals = scopeDepth; |
1700 | assert(ParmVarDeclBits.ScopeDepthOrObjCQuals == scopeDepth((void)0) |
1701 | && "truncation!")((void)0); |
1702 | |
1703 | setParameterIndex(parameterIndex); |
1704 | } |
1705 | |
1706 | bool isObjCMethodParameter() const { |
1707 | return ParmVarDeclBits.IsObjCMethodParam; |
1708 | } |
1709 | |
1710 | /// Determines whether this parameter is destroyed in the callee function. |
1711 | bool isDestroyedInCallee() const; |
1712 | |
1713 | unsigned getFunctionScopeDepth() const { |
1714 | if (ParmVarDeclBits.IsObjCMethodParam) return 0; |
1715 | return ParmVarDeclBits.ScopeDepthOrObjCQuals; |
1716 | } |
1717 | |
1718 | static constexpr unsigned getMaxFunctionScopeDepth() { |
1719 | return (1u << NumScopeDepthOrObjCQualsBits) - 1; |
1720 | } |
1721 | |
1722 | /// Returns the index of this parameter in its prototype or method scope. |
1723 | unsigned getFunctionScopeIndex() const { |
1724 | return getParameterIndex(); |
1725 | } |
1726 | |
1727 | ObjCDeclQualifier getObjCDeclQualifier() const { |
1728 | if (!ParmVarDeclBits.IsObjCMethodParam) return OBJC_TQ_None; |
1729 | return ObjCDeclQualifier(ParmVarDeclBits.ScopeDepthOrObjCQuals); |
1730 | } |
1731 | void setObjCDeclQualifier(ObjCDeclQualifier QTVal) { |
1732 | assert(ParmVarDeclBits.IsObjCMethodParam)((void)0); |
1733 | ParmVarDeclBits.ScopeDepthOrObjCQuals = QTVal; |
1734 | } |
1735 | |
1736 | /// True if the value passed to this parameter must undergo |
1737 | /// K&R-style default argument promotion: |
1738 | /// |
1739 | /// C99 6.5.2.2. |
1740 | /// If the expression that denotes the called function has a type |
1741 | /// that does not include a prototype, the integer promotions are |
1742 | /// performed on each argument, and arguments that have type float |
1743 | /// are promoted to double. |
1744 | bool isKNRPromoted() const { |
1745 | return ParmVarDeclBits.IsKNRPromoted; |
1746 | } |
1747 | void setKNRPromoted(bool promoted) { |
1748 | ParmVarDeclBits.IsKNRPromoted = promoted; |
1749 | } |
1750 | |
1751 | Expr *getDefaultArg(); |
1752 | const Expr *getDefaultArg() const { |
1753 | return const_cast<ParmVarDecl *>(this)->getDefaultArg(); |
1754 | } |
1755 | |
1756 | void setDefaultArg(Expr *defarg); |
1757 | |
1758 | /// Retrieve the source range that covers the entire default |
1759 | /// argument. |
1760 | SourceRange getDefaultArgRange() const; |
1761 | void setUninstantiatedDefaultArg(Expr *arg); |
1762 | Expr *getUninstantiatedDefaultArg(); |
1763 | const Expr *getUninstantiatedDefaultArg() const { |
1764 | return const_cast<ParmVarDecl *>(this)->getUninstantiatedDefaultArg(); |
1765 | } |
1766 | |
1767 | /// Determines whether this parameter has a default argument, |
1768 | /// either parsed or not. |
1769 | bool hasDefaultArg() const; |
1770 | |
1771 | /// Determines whether this parameter has a default argument that has not |
1772 | /// yet been parsed. This will occur during the processing of a C++ class |
1773 | /// whose member functions have default arguments, e.g., |
1774 | /// @code |
1775 | /// class X { |
1776 | /// public: |
1777 | /// void f(int x = 17); // x has an unparsed default argument now |
1778 | /// }; // x has a regular default argument now |
1779 | /// @endcode |
1780 | bool hasUnparsedDefaultArg() const { |
1781 | return ParmVarDeclBits.DefaultArgKind == DAK_Unparsed; |
1782 | } |
1783 | |
1784 | bool hasUninstantiatedDefaultArg() const { |
1785 | return ParmVarDeclBits.DefaultArgKind == DAK_Uninstantiated; |
1786 | } |
1787 | |
1788 | /// Specify that this parameter has an unparsed default argument. |
1789 | /// The argument will be replaced with a real default argument via |
1790 | /// setDefaultArg when the class definition enclosing the function |
1791 | /// declaration that owns this default argument is completed. |
1792 | void setUnparsedDefaultArg() { |
1793 | ParmVarDeclBits.DefaultArgKind = DAK_Unparsed; |
1794 | } |
1795 | |
1796 | bool hasInheritedDefaultArg() const { |
1797 | return ParmVarDeclBits.HasInheritedDefaultArg; |
1798 | } |
1799 | |
1800 | void setHasInheritedDefaultArg(bool I = true) { |
1801 | ParmVarDeclBits.HasInheritedDefaultArg = I; |
1802 | } |
1803 | |
1804 | QualType getOriginalType() const; |
1805 | |
1806 | /// Sets the function declaration that owns this |
1807 | /// ParmVarDecl. Since ParmVarDecls are often created before the |
1808 | /// FunctionDecls that own them, this routine is required to update |
1809 | /// the DeclContext appropriately. |
1810 | void setOwningFunction(DeclContext *FD) { setDeclContext(FD); } |
1811 | |
1812 | // Implement isa/cast/dyncast/etc. |
1813 | static bool classof(const Decl *D) { return classofKind(D->getKind()); } |
1814 | static bool classofKind(Kind K) { return K == ParmVar; } |
1815 | |
1816 | private: |
1817 | enum { ParameterIndexSentinel = (1 << NumParameterIndexBits) - 1 }; |
1818 | |
1819 | void setParameterIndex(unsigned parameterIndex) { |
1820 | if (parameterIndex >= ParameterIndexSentinel) { |
1821 | setParameterIndexLarge(parameterIndex); |
1822 | return; |
1823 | } |
1824 | |
1825 | ParmVarDeclBits.ParameterIndex = parameterIndex; |
1826 | assert(ParmVarDeclBits.ParameterIndex == parameterIndex && "truncation!")((void)0); |
1827 | } |
1828 | unsigned getParameterIndex() const { |
1829 | unsigned d = ParmVarDeclBits.ParameterIndex; |
1830 | return d == ParameterIndexSentinel ? getParameterIndexLarge() : d; |
1831 | } |
1832 | |
1833 | void setParameterIndexLarge(unsigned parameterIndex); |
1834 | unsigned getParameterIndexLarge() const; |
1835 | }; |
1836 | |
1837 | enum class MultiVersionKind { |
1838 | None, |
1839 | Target, |
1840 | CPUSpecific, |
1841 | CPUDispatch |
1842 | }; |
1843 | |
1844 | /// Represents a function declaration or definition. |
1845 | /// |
1846 | /// Since a given function can be declared several times in a program, |
1847 | /// there may be several FunctionDecls that correspond to that |
1848 | /// function. Only one of those FunctionDecls will be found when |
1849 | /// traversing the list of declarations in the context of the |
1850 | /// FunctionDecl (e.g., the translation unit); this FunctionDecl |
1851 | /// contains all of the information known about the function. Other, |
1852 | /// previous declarations of the function are available via the |
1853 | /// getPreviousDecl() chain. |
1854 | class FunctionDecl : public DeclaratorDecl, |
1855 | public DeclContext, |
1856 | public Redeclarable<FunctionDecl> { |
1857 | // This class stores some data in DeclContext::FunctionDeclBits |
1858 | // to save some space. Use the provided accessors to access it. |
1859 | public: |
1860 | /// The kind of templated function a FunctionDecl can be. |
1861 | enum TemplatedKind { |
1862 | // Not templated. |
1863 | TK_NonTemplate, |
1864 | // The pattern in a function template declaration. |
1865 | TK_FunctionTemplate, |
1866 | // A non-template function that is an instantiation or explicit |
1867 | // specialization of a member of a templated class. |
1868 | TK_MemberSpecialization, |
1869 | // An instantiation or explicit specialization of a function template. |
1870 | // Note: this might have been instantiated from a templated class if it |
1871 | // is a class-scope explicit specialization. |
1872 | TK_FunctionTemplateSpecialization, |
1873 | // A function template specialization that hasn't yet been resolved to a |
1874 | // particular specialized function template. |
1875 | TK_DependentFunctionTemplateSpecialization |
1876 | }; |
1877 | |
1878 | /// Stashed information about a defaulted function definition whose body has |
1879 | /// not yet been lazily generated. |
1880 | class DefaultedFunctionInfo final |
1881 | : llvm::TrailingObjects<DefaultedFunctionInfo, DeclAccessPair> { |
1882 | friend TrailingObjects; |
1883 | unsigned NumLookups; |
1884 | |
1885 | public: |
1886 | static DefaultedFunctionInfo *Create(ASTContext &Context, |
1887 | ArrayRef<DeclAccessPair> Lookups); |
1888 | /// Get the unqualified lookup results that should be used in this |
1889 | /// defaulted function definition. |
1890 | ArrayRef<DeclAccessPair> getUnqualifiedLookups() const { |
1891 | return {getTrailingObjects<DeclAccessPair>(), NumLookups}; |
1892 | } |
1893 | }; |
1894 | |
1895 | private: |
1896 | /// A new[]'d array of pointers to VarDecls for the formal |
1897 | /// parameters of this function. This is null if a prototype or if there are |
1898 | /// no formals. |
1899 | ParmVarDecl **ParamInfo = nullptr; |
1900 | |
1901 | /// The active member of this union is determined by |
1902 | /// FunctionDeclBits.HasDefaultedFunctionInfo. |
1903 | union { |
1904 | /// The body of the function. |
1905 | LazyDeclStmtPtr Body; |
1906 | /// Information about a future defaulted function definition. |
1907 | DefaultedFunctionInfo *DefaultedInfo; |
1908 | }; |
1909 | |
1910 | unsigned ODRHash; |
1911 | |
1912 | /// End part of this FunctionDecl's source range. |
1913 | /// |
1914 | /// We could compute the full range in getSourceRange(). However, when we're |
1915 | /// dealing with a function definition deserialized from a PCH/AST file, |
1916 | /// we can only compute the full range once the function body has been |
1917 | /// de-serialized, so it's far better to have the (sometimes-redundant) |
1918 | /// EndRangeLoc. |
1919 | SourceLocation EndRangeLoc; |
1920 | |
1921 | /// The template or declaration that this declaration |
1922 | /// describes or was instantiated from, respectively. |
1923 | /// |
1924 | /// For non-templates, this value will be NULL. For function |
1925 | /// declarations that describe a function template, this will be a |
1926 | /// pointer to a FunctionTemplateDecl. For member functions |
1927 | /// of class template specializations, this will be a MemberSpecializationInfo |
1928 | /// pointer containing information about the specialization. |
1929 | /// For function template specializations, this will be a |
1930 | /// FunctionTemplateSpecializationInfo, which contains information about |
1931 | /// the template being specialized and the template arguments involved in |
1932 | /// that specialization. |
1933 | llvm::PointerUnion<FunctionTemplateDecl *, |
1934 | MemberSpecializationInfo *, |
1935 | FunctionTemplateSpecializationInfo *, |
1936 | DependentFunctionTemplateSpecializationInfo *> |
1937 | TemplateOrSpecialization; |
1938 | |
1939 | /// Provides source/type location info for the declaration name embedded in |
1940 | /// the DeclaratorDecl base class. |
1941 | DeclarationNameLoc DNLoc; |
1942 | |
1943 | /// Specify that this function declaration is actually a function |
1944 | /// template specialization. |
1945 | /// |
1946 | /// \param C the ASTContext. |
1947 | /// |
1948 | /// \param Template the function template that this function template |
1949 | /// specialization specializes. |
1950 | /// |
1951 | /// \param TemplateArgs the template arguments that produced this |
1952 | /// function template specialization from the template. |
1953 | /// |
1954 | /// \param InsertPos If non-NULL, the position in the function template |
1955 | /// specialization set where the function template specialization data will |
1956 | /// be inserted. |
1957 | /// |
1958 | /// \param TSK the kind of template specialization this is. |
1959 | /// |
1960 | /// \param TemplateArgsAsWritten location info of template arguments. |
1961 | /// |
1962 | /// \param PointOfInstantiation point at which the function template |
1963 | /// specialization was first instantiated. |
1964 | void setFunctionTemplateSpecialization(ASTContext &C, |
1965 | FunctionTemplateDecl *Template, |
1966 | const TemplateArgumentList *TemplateArgs, |
1967 | void *InsertPos, |
1968 | TemplateSpecializationKind TSK, |
1969 | const TemplateArgumentListInfo *TemplateArgsAsWritten, |
1970 | SourceLocation PointOfInstantiation); |
1971 | |
1972 | /// Specify that this record is an instantiation of the |
1973 | /// member function FD. |
1974 | void setInstantiationOfMemberFunction(ASTContext &C, FunctionDecl *FD, |
1975 | TemplateSpecializationKind TSK); |
1976 | |
1977 | void setParams(ASTContext &C, ArrayRef<ParmVarDecl *> NewParamInfo); |
1978 | |
1979 | // This is unfortunately needed because ASTDeclWriter::VisitFunctionDecl |
1980 | // need to access this bit but we want to avoid making ASTDeclWriter |
1981 | // a friend of FunctionDeclBitfields just for this. |
1982 | bool isDeletedBit() const { return FunctionDeclBits.IsDeleted; } |
1983 | |
1984 | /// Whether an ODRHash has been stored. |
1985 | bool hasODRHash() const { return FunctionDeclBits.HasODRHash; } |
1986 | |
1987 | /// State that an ODRHash has been stored. |
1988 | void setHasODRHash(bool B = true) { FunctionDeclBits.HasODRHash = B; } |
1989 | |
1990 | protected: |
1991 | FunctionDecl(Kind DK, ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, SourceLocation StartLoc, |
1992 | const DeclarationNameInfo &NameInfo, QualType T, |
1993 | TypeSourceInfo *TInfo, StorageClass S, bool isInlineSpecified, |
1994 | ConstexprSpecKind ConstexprKind, |
1995 | Expr *TrailingRequiresClause = nullptr); |
1996 | |
1997 | using redeclarable_base = Redeclarable<FunctionDecl>; |
1998 | |
1999 | FunctionDecl *getNextRedeclarationImpl() override { |
2000 | return getNextRedeclaration(); |
2001 | } |
2002 | |
2003 | FunctionDecl *getPreviousDeclImpl() override { |
2004 | return getPreviousDecl(); |
2005 | } |
2006 | |
2007 | FunctionDecl *getMostRecentDeclImpl() override { |
2008 | return getMostRecentDecl(); |
2009 | } |
2010 | |
2011 | public: |
2012 | friend class ASTDeclReader; |
2013 | friend class ASTDeclWriter; |
2014 | |
2015 | using redecl_range = redeclarable_base::redecl_range; |
2016 | using redecl_iterator = redeclarable_base::redecl_iterator; |
2017 | |
2018 | using redeclarable_base::redecls_begin; |
2019 | using redeclarable_base::redecls_end; |
2020 | using redeclarable_base::redecls; |
2021 | using redeclarable_base::getPreviousDecl; |
2022 | using redeclarable_base::getMostRecentDecl; |
2023 | using redeclarable_base::isFirstDecl; |
2024 | |
2025 | static FunctionDecl * |
2026 | Create(ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, SourceLocation StartLoc, |
2027 | SourceLocation NLoc, DeclarationName N, QualType T, |
2028 | TypeSourceInfo *TInfo, StorageClass SC, bool isInlineSpecified = false, |
2029 | bool hasWrittenPrototype = true, |
2030 | ConstexprSpecKind ConstexprKind = ConstexprSpecKind::Unspecified, |
2031 | Expr *TrailingRequiresClause = nullptr) { |
2032 | DeclarationNameInfo NameInfo(N, NLoc); |
2033 | return FunctionDecl::Create(C, DC, StartLoc, NameInfo, T, TInfo, SC, |
2034 | isInlineSpecified, hasWrittenPrototype, |
2035 | ConstexprKind, TrailingRequiresClause); |
2036 | } |
2037 | |
2038 | static FunctionDecl *Create(ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, |
2039 | SourceLocation StartLoc, |
2040 | const DeclarationNameInfo &NameInfo, QualType T, |
2041 | TypeSourceInfo *TInfo, StorageClass SC, |
2042 | bool isInlineSpecified, bool hasWrittenPrototype, |
2043 | ConstexprSpecKind ConstexprKind, |
2044 | Expr *TrailingRequiresClause); |
2045 | |
2046 | static FunctionDecl *CreateDeserialized(ASTContext &C, unsigned ID); |
2047 | |
2048 | DeclarationNameInfo getNameInfo() const { |
2049 | return DeclarationNameInfo(getDeclName(), getLocation(), DNLoc); |
2050 | } |
2051 | |
2052 | void getNameForDiagnostic(raw_ostream &OS, const PrintingPolicy &Policy, |
2053 | bool Qualified) const override; |
2054 | |
2055 | void setRangeEnd(SourceLocation E) { EndRangeLoc = E; } |
2056 | |
2057 | /// Returns the location of the ellipsis of a variadic function. |
2058 | SourceLocation getEllipsisLoc() const { |
2059 | const auto *FPT = getType()->getAs<FunctionProtoType>(); |
2060 | if (FPT && FPT->isVariadic()) |
2061 | return FPT->getEllipsisLoc(); |
2062 | return SourceLocation(); |
2063 | } |
2064 | |
2065 | SourceRange getSourceRange() const override LLVM_READONLY__attribute__((__pure__)); |
2066 | |
2067 | // Function definitions. |
2068 | // |
2069 | // A function declaration may be: |
2070 | // - a non defining declaration, |
2071 | // - a definition. A function may be defined because: |
2072 | // - it has a body, or will have it in the case of late parsing. |
2073 | // - it has an uninstantiated body. The body does not exist because the |
2074 | // function is not used yet, but the declaration is considered a |
2075 | // definition and does not allow other definition of this function. |
2076 | // - it does not have a user specified body, but it does not allow |
2077 | // redefinition, because it is deleted/defaulted or is defined through |
2078 | // some other mechanism (alias, ifunc). |
2079 | |
2080 | /// Returns true if the function has a body. |
2081 | /// |
2082 | /// The function body might be in any of the (re-)declarations of this |
2083 | /// function. The variant that accepts a FunctionDecl pointer will set that |
2084 | /// function declaration to the actual declaration containing the body (if |
2085 | /// there is one). |
2086 | bool hasBody(const FunctionDecl *&Definition) const; |
2087 | |
2088 | bool hasBody() const override { |
2089 | const FunctionDecl* Definition; |
2090 | return hasBody(Definition); |
2091 | } |
2092 | |
2093 | /// Returns whether the function has a trivial body that does not require any |
2094 | /// specific codegen. |
2095 | bool hasTrivialBody() const; |
2096 | |
2097 | /// Returns true if the function has a definition that does not need to be |
2098 | /// instantiated. |
2099 | /// |
2100 | /// The variant that accepts a FunctionDecl pointer will set that function |
2101 | /// declaration to the declaration that is a definition (if there is one). |
2102 | /// |
2103 | /// \param CheckForPendingFriendDefinition If \c true, also check for friend |
2104 | /// declarations that were instantiataed from function definitions. |
2105 | /// Such a declaration behaves as if it is a definition for the |
2106 | /// purpose of redefinition checking, but isn't actually a "real" |
2107 | /// definition until its body is instantiated. |
2108 | bool isDefined(const FunctionDecl *&Definition, |
2109 | bool CheckForPendingFriendDefinition = false) const; |
2110 | |
2111 | bool isDefined() const { |
2112 | const FunctionDecl* Definition; |
2113 | return isDefined(Definition); |
2114 | } |
2115 | |
2116 | /// Get the definition for this declaration. |
2117 | FunctionDecl *getDefinition() { |
2118 | const FunctionDecl *Definition; |
2119 | if (isDefined(Definition)) |
2120 | return const_cast<FunctionDecl *>(Definition); |
2121 | return nullptr; |
2122 | } |
2123 | const FunctionDecl *getDefinition() const { |
2124 | return const_cast<FunctionDecl *>(this)->getDefinition(); |
2125 | } |
2126 | |
2127 | /// Retrieve the body (definition) of the function. The function body might be |
2128 | /// in any of the (re-)declarations of this function. The variant that accepts |
2129 | /// a FunctionDecl pointer will set that function declaration to the actual |
2130 | /// declaration containing the body (if there is one). |
2131 | /// NOTE: For checking if there is a body, use hasBody() instead, to avoid |
2132 | /// unnecessary AST de-serialization of the body. |
2133 | Stmt *getBody(const FunctionDecl *&Definition) const; |
2134 | |
2135 | Stmt *getBody() const override { |
2136 | const FunctionDecl* Definition; |
2137 | return getBody(Definition); |
2138 | } |
2139 | |
2140 | /// Returns whether this specific declaration of the function is also a |
2141 | /// definition that does not contain uninstantiated body. |
2142 | /// |
2143 | /// This does not determine whether the function has been defined (e.g., in a |
2144 | /// previous definition); for that information, use isDefined. |
2145 | /// |
2146 | /// Note: the function declaration does not become a definition until the |
2147 | /// parser reaches the definition, if called before, this function will return |
2148 | /// `false`. |
2149 | bool isThisDeclarationADefinition() const { |
2150 | return isDeletedAsWritten() || isDefaulted() || |
2151 | doesThisDeclarationHaveABody() || hasSkippedBody() || |
2152 | willHaveBody() || hasDefiningAttr(); |
2153 | } |
2154 | |
2155 | /// Determine whether this specific declaration of the function is a friend |
2156 | /// declaration that was instantiated from a function definition. Such |
2157 | /// declarations behave like definitions in some contexts. |
2158 | bool isThisDeclarationInstantiatedFromAFriendDefinition() const; |
2159 | |
2160 | /// Returns whether this specific declaration of the function has a body. |
2161 | bool doesThisDeclarationHaveABody() const { |
2162 | return (!FunctionDeclBits.HasDefaultedFunctionInfo && Body) || |
2163 | isLateTemplateParsed(); |
2164 | } |
2165 | |
2166 | void setBody(Stmt *B); |
2167 | void setLazyBody(uint64_t Offset) { |
2168 | FunctionDeclBits.HasDefaultedFunctionInfo = false; |
2169 | Body = LazyDeclStmtPtr(Offset); |
2170 | } |
2171 | |
2172 | void setDefaultedFunctionInfo(DefaultedFunctionInfo *Info); |
2173 | DefaultedFunctionInfo *getDefaultedFunctionInfo() const; |
2174 | |
2175 | /// Whether this function is variadic. |
2176 | bool isVariadic() const; |
2177 | |
2178 | /// Whether this function is marked as virtual explicitly. |
2179 | bool isVirtualAsWritten() const { |
2180 | return FunctionDeclBits.IsVirtualAsWritten; |
2181 | } |
2182 | |
2183 | /// State that this function is marked as virtual explicitly. |
2184 | void setVirtualAsWritten(bool V) { FunctionDeclBits.IsVirtualAsWritten = V; } |
2185 | |
2186 | /// Whether this virtual function is pure, i.e. makes the containing class |
2187 | /// abstract. |
2188 | bool isPure() const { return FunctionDeclBits.IsPure; } |
2189 | void setPure(bool P = true); |
2190 | |
2191 | /// Whether this templated function will be late parsed. |
2192 | bool isLateTemplateParsed() const { |
2193 | return FunctionDeclBits.IsLateTemplateParsed; |
2194 | } |
2195 | |
2196 | /// State that this templated function will be late parsed. |
2197 | void setLateTemplateParsed(bool ILT = true) { |
2198 | FunctionDeclBits.IsLateTemplateParsed = ILT; |
2199 | } |
2200 | |
2201 | /// Whether this function is "trivial" in some specialized C++ senses. |
2202 | /// Can only be true for default constructors, copy constructors, |
2203 | /// copy assignment operators, and destructors. Not meaningful until |
2204 | /// the class has been fully built by Sema. |
2205 | bool isTrivial() const { return FunctionDeclBits.IsTrivial; } |
2206 | void setTrivial(bool IT) { FunctionDeclBits.IsTrivial = IT; } |
2207 | |
2208 | bool isTrivialForCall() const { return FunctionDeclBits.IsTrivialForCall; } |
2209 | void setTrivialForCall(bool IT) { FunctionDeclBits.IsTrivialForCall = IT; } |
2210 | |
2211 | /// Whether this function is defaulted. Valid for e.g. |
2212 | /// special member functions, defaulted comparisions (not methods!). |
2213 | bool isDefaulted() const { return FunctionDeclBits.IsDefaulted; } |
2214 | void setDefaulted(bool D = true) { FunctionDeclBits.IsDefaulted = D; } |
2215 | |
2216 | /// Whether this function is explicitly defaulted. |
2217 | bool isExplicitlyDefaulted() const { |
2218 | return FunctionDeclBits.IsExplicitlyDefaulted; |
2219 | } |
2220 | |
2221 | /// State that this function is explicitly defaulted. |
2222 | void setExplicitlyDefaulted(bool ED = true) { |
2223 | FunctionDeclBits.IsExplicitlyDefaulted = ED; |
2224 | } |
2225 | |
2226 | /// True if this method is user-declared and was not |
2227 | /// deleted or defaulted on its first declaration. |
2228 | bool isUserProvided() const { |
2229 | auto *DeclAsWritten = this; |
2230 | if (FunctionDecl *Pattern = getTemplateInstantiationPattern()) |
2231 | DeclAsWritten = Pattern; |
2232 | return !(DeclAsWritten->isDeleted() || |
2233 | DeclAsWritten->getCanonicalDecl()->isDefaulted()); |
2234 | } |
2235 | |
2236 | /// Whether falling off this function implicitly returns null/zero. |
2237 | /// If a more specific implicit return value is required, front-ends |
2238 | /// should synthesize the appropriate return statements. |
2239 | bool hasImplicitReturnZero() const { |
2240 | return FunctionDeclBits.HasImplicitReturnZero; |
2241 | } |
2242 | |
2243 | /// State that falling off this function implicitly returns null/zero. |
2244 | /// If a more specific implicit return value is required, front-ends |
2245 | /// should synthesize the appropriate return statements. |
2246 | void setHasImplicitReturnZero(bool IRZ) { |
2247 | FunctionDeclBits.HasImplicitReturnZero = IRZ; |
2248 | } |
2249 | |
2250 | /// Whether this function has a prototype, either because one |
2251 | /// was explicitly written or because it was "inherited" by merging |
2252 | /// a declaration without a prototype with a declaration that has a |
2253 | /// prototype. |
2254 | bool hasPrototype() const { |
2255 | return hasWrittenPrototype() || hasInheritedPrototype(); |
2256 | } |
2257 | |
2258 | /// Whether this function has a written prototype. |
2259 | bool hasWrittenPrototype() const { |
2260 | return FunctionDeclBits.HasWrittenPrototype; |
2261 | } |
2262 | |
2263 | /// State that this function has a written prototype. |
2264 | void setHasWrittenPrototype(bool P = true) { |
2265 | FunctionDeclBits.HasWrittenPrototype = P; |
2266 | } |
2267 | |
2268 | /// Whether this function inherited its prototype from a |
2269 | /// previous declaration. |
2270 | bool hasInheritedPrototype() const { |
2271 | return FunctionDeclBits.HasInheritedPrototype; |
2272 | } |
2273 | |
2274 | /// State that this function inherited its prototype from a |
2275 | /// previous declaration. |
2276 | void setHasInheritedPrototype(bool P = true) { |
2277 | FunctionDeclBits.HasInheritedPrototype = P; |
2278 | } |
2279 | |
2280 | /// Whether this is a (C++11) constexpr function or constexpr constructor. |
2281 | bool isConstexpr() const { |
2282 | return getConstexprKind() != ConstexprSpecKind::Unspecified; |
2283 | } |
2284 | void setConstexprKind(ConstexprSpecKind CSK) { |
2285 | FunctionDeclBits.ConstexprKind = static_cast<uint64_t>(CSK); |
2286 | } |
2287 | ConstexprSpecKind getConstexprKind() const { |
2288 | return static_cast<ConstexprSpecKind>(FunctionDeclBits.ConstexprKind); |
2289 | } |
2290 | bool isConstexprSpecified() const { |
2291 | return getConstexprKind() == ConstexprSpecKind::Constexpr; |
2292 | } |
2293 | bool isConsteval() const { |
2294 | return getConstexprKind() == ConstexprSpecKind::Consteval; |
2295 | } |
2296 | |
2297 | /// Whether the instantiation of this function is pending. |
2298 | /// This bit is set when the decision to instantiate this function is made |
2299 | /// and unset if and when the function body is created. That leaves out |
2300 | /// cases where instantiation did not happen because the template definition |
2301 | /// was not seen in this TU. This bit remains set in those cases, under the |
2302 | /// assumption that the instantiation will happen in some other TU. |
2303 | bool instantiationIsPending() const { |
2304 | return FunctionDeclBits.InstantiationIsPending; |
2305 | } |
2306 | |
2307 | /// State that the instantiation of this function is pending. |
2308 | /// (see instantiationIsPending) |
2309 | void setInstantiationIsPending(bool IC) { |
2310 | FunctionDeclBits.InstantiationIsPending = IC; |
2311 | } |
2312 | |
2313 | /// Indicates the function uses __try. |
2314 | bool usesSEHTry() const { return FunctionDeclBits.UsesSEHTry; } |
2315 | void setUsesSEHTry(bool UST) { FunctionDeclBits.UsesSEHTry = UST; } |
2316 | |
2317 | /// Whether this function has been deleted. |
2318 | /// |
2319 | /// A function that is "deleted" (via the C++0x "= delete" syntax) |
2320 | /// acts like a normal function, except that it cannot actually be |
2321 | /// called or have its address taken. Deleted functions are |
2322 | /// typically used in C++ overload resolution to attract arguments |
2323 | /// whose type or lvalue/rvalue-ness would permit the use of a |
2324 | /// different overload that would behave incorrectly. For example, |
2325 | /// one might use deleted functions to ban implicit conversion from |
2326 | /// a floating-point number to an Integer type: |
2327 | /// |
2328 | /// @code |
2329 | /// struct Integer { |
2330 | /// Integer(long); // construct from a long |
2331 | /// Integer(double) = delete; // no construction from float or double |
2332 | /// Integer(long double) = delete; // no construction from long double |
2333 | /// }; |
2334 | /// @endcode |
2335 | // If a function is deleted, its first declaration must be. |
2336 | bool isDeleted() const { |
2337 | return getCanonicalDecl()->FunctionDeclBits.IsDeleted; |
2338 | } |
2339 | |
2340 | bool isDeletedAsWritten() const { |
2341 | return FunctionDeclBits.IsDeleted && !isDefaulted(); |
2342 | } |
2343 | |
2344 | void setDeletedAsWritten(bool D = true) { FunctionDeclBits.IsDeleted = D; } |
2345 | |
2346 | /// Determines whether this function is "main", which is the |
2347 | /// entry point into an executable program. |
2348 | bool isMain() const; |
2349 | |
2350 | /// Determines whether this function is a MSVCRT user defined entry |
2351 | /// point. |
2352 | bool isMSVCRTEntryPoint() const; |
2353 | |
2354 | /// Determines whether this operator new or delete is one |
2355 | /// of the reserved global placement operators: |
2356 | /// void *operator new(size_t, void *); |
2357 | /// void *operator new[](size_t, void *); |
2358 | /// void operator delete(void *, void *); |
2359 | /// void operator delete[](void *, void *); |
2360 | /// These functions have special behavior under [new.delete.placement]: |
2361 | /// These functions are reserved, a C++ program may not define |
2362 | /// functions that displace the versions in the Standard C++ library. |
2363 | /// The provisions of [basic.stc.dynamic] do not apply to these |
2364 | /// reserved placement forms of operator new and operator delete. |
2365 | /// |
2366 | /// This function must be an allocation or deallocation function. |
2367 | bool isReservedGlobalPlacementOperator() const; |
2368 | |
2369 | /// Determines whether this function is one of the replaceable |
2370 | /// global allocation functions: |
2371 | /// void *operator new(size_t); |
2372 | /// void *operator new(size_t, const std::nothrow_t &) noexcept; |
2373 | /// void *operator new[](size_t); |
2374 | /// void *operator new[](size_t, const std::nothrow_t &) noexcept; |
2375 | /// void operator delete(void *) noexcept; |
2376 | /// void operator delete(void *, std::size_t) noexcept; [C++1y] |
2377 | /// void operator delete(void *, const std::nothrow_t &) noexcept; |
2378 | /// void operator delete[](void *) noexcept; |
2379 | /// void operator delete[](void *, std::size_t) noexcept; [C++1y] |
2380 | /// void operator delete[](void *, const std::nothrow_t &) noexcept; |
2381 | /// These functions have special behavior under C++1y [expr.new]: |
2382 | /// An implementation is allowed to omit a call to a replaceable global |
2383 | /// allocation function. [...] |
2384 | /// |
2385 | /// If this function is an aligned allocation/deallocation function, return |
2386 | /// the parameter number of the requested alignment through AlignmentParam. |
2387 | /// |
2388 | /// If this function is an allocation/deallocation function that takes |
2389 | /// the `std::nothrow_t` tag, return true through IsNothrow, |
2390 | bool isReplaceableGlobalAllocationFunction( |
2391 | Optional<unsigned> *AlignmentParam = nullptr, |
2392 | bool *IsNothrow = nullptr) const; |
2393 | |
2394 | /// Determine if this function provides an inline implementation of a builtin. |
2395 | bool isInlineBuiltinDeclaration() const; |
2396 | |
2397 | /// Determine whether this is a destroying operator delete. |
2398 | bool isDestroyingOperatorDelete() const; |
2399 | |
2400 | /// Compute the language linkage. |
2401 | LanguageLinkage getLanguageLinkage() const; |
2402 | |
2403 | /// Determines whether this function is a function with |
2404 | /// external, C linkage. |
2405 | bool isExternC() const; |
2406 | |
2407 | /// Determines whether this function's context is, or is nested within, |
2408 | /// a C++ extern "C" linkage spec. |
2409 | bool isInExternCContext() const; |
2410 | |
2411 | /// Determines whether this function's context is, or is nested within, |
2412 | /// a C++ extern "C++" linkage spec. |
2413 | bool isInExternCXXContext() const; |
2414 | |
2415 | /// Determines whether this is a global function. |
2416 | bool isGlobal() const; |
2417 | |
2418 | /// Determines whether this function is known to be 'noreturn', through |
2419 | /// an attribute on its declaration or its type. |
2420 | bool isNoReturn() const; |
2421 | |
2422 | /// True if the function was a definition but its body was skipped. |
2423 | bool hasSkippedBody() const { return FunctionDeclBits.HasSkippedBody; } |
2424 | void setHasSkippedBody(bool Skipped = true) { |
2425 | FunctionDeclBits.HasSkippedBody = Skipped; |
2426 | } |
2427 | |
2428 | /// True if this function will eventually have a body, once it's fully parsed. |
2429 | bool willHaveBody() const { return FunctionDeclBits.WillHaveBody; } |
2430 | void setWillHaveBody(bool V = true) { FunctionDeclBits.WillHaveBody = V; } |
2431 | |
2432 | /// True if this function is considered a multiversioned function. |
2433 | bool isMultiVersion() const { |
2434 | return getCanonicalDecl()->FunctionDeclBits.IsMultiVersion; |
2435 | } |
2436 | |
2437 | /// Sets the multiversion state for this declaration and all of its |
2438 | /// redeclarations. |
2439 | void setIsMultiVersion(bool V = true) { |
2440 | getCanonicalDecl()->FunctionDeclBits.IsMultiVersion = V; |
2441 | } |
2442 | |
2443 | /// Gets the kind of multiversioning attribute this declaration has. Note that |
2444 | /// this can return a value even if the function is not multiversion, such as |
2445 | /// the case of 'target'. |
2446 | MultiVersionKind getMultiVersionKind() const; |
2447 | |
2448 | |
2449 | /// True if this function is a multiversioned dispatch function as a part of |
2450 | /// the cpu_specific/cpu_dispatch functionality. |
2451 | bool isCPUDispatchMultiVersion() const; |
2452 | /// True if this function is a multiversioned processor specific function as a |
2453 | /// part of the cpu_specific/cpu_dispatch functionality. |
2454 | bool isCPUSpecificMultiVersion() const; |
2455 | |
2456 | /// True if this function is a multiversioned dispatch function as a part of |
2457 | /// the target functionality. |
2458 | bool isTargetMultiVersion() const; |
2459 | |
2460 | /// \brief Get the associated-constraints of this function declaration. |
2461 | /// Currently, this will either be a vector of size 1 containing the |
2462 | /// trailing-requires-clause or an empty vector. |
2463 | /// |
2464 | /// Use this instead of getTrailingRequiresClause for concepts APIs that |
2465 | /// accept an ArrayRef of constraint expressions. |
2466 | void getAssociatedConstraints(SmallVectorImpl<const Expr *> &AC) const { |
2467 | if (auto *TRC = getTrailingRequiresClause()) |
2468 | AC.push_back(TRC); |
2469 | } |
2470 | |
2471 | void setPreviousDeclaration(FunctionDecl * PrevDecl); |
2472 | |
2473 | FunctionDecl *getCanonicalDecl() override; |
2474 | const FunctionDecl *getCanonicalDecl() const { |
2475 | return const_cast<FunctionDecl*>(this)->getCanonicalDecl(); |
2476 | } |
2477 | |
2478 | unsigned getBuiltinID(bool ConsiderWrapperFunctions = false) const; |
2479 | |
2480 | // ArrayRef interface to parameters. |
2481 | ArrayRef<ParmVarDecl *> parameters() const { |
2482 | return {ParamInfo, getNumParams()}; |
2483 | } |
2484 | MutableArrayRef<ParmVarDecl *> parameters() { |
2485 | return {ParamInfo, getNumParams()}; |
2486 | } |
2487 | |
2488 | // Iterator access to formal parameters. |
2489 | using param_iterator = MutableArrayRef<ParmVarDecl *>::iterator; |
2490 | using param_const_iterator = ArrayRef<ParmVarDecl *>::const_iterator; |
2491 | |
2492 | bool param_empty() const { return parameters().empty(); } |
2493 | param_iterator param_begin() { return parameters().begin(); } |
2494 | param_iterator param_end() { return parameters().end(); } |
2495 | param_const_iterator param_begin() const { return parameters().begin(); } |
2496 | param_const_iterator param_end() const { return parameters().end(); } |
2497 | size_t param_size() const { return parameters().size(); } |
2498 | |
2499 | /// Return the number of parameters this function must have based on its |
2500 | /// FunctionType. This is the length of the ParamInfo array after it has been |
2501 | /// created. |
2502 | unsigned getNumParams() const; |
2503 | |
2504 | const ParmVarDecl *getParamDecl(unsigned i) const { |
2505 | assert(i < getNumParams() && "Illegal param #")((void)0); |
2506 | return ParamInfo[i]; |
2507 | } |
2508 | ParmVarDecl *getParamDecl(unsigned i) { |
2509 | assert(i < getNumParams() && "Illegal param #")((void)0); |
2510 | return ParamInfo[i]; |
2511 | } |
2512 | void setParams(ArrayRef<ParmVarDecl *> NewParamInfo) { |
2513 | setParams(getASTContext(), NewParamInfo); |
2514 | } |
2515 | |
2516 | /// Returns the minimum number of arguments needed to call this function. This |
2517 | /// may be fewer than the number of function parameters, if some of the |
2518 | /// parameters have default arguments (in C++). |
2519 | unsigned getMinRequiredArguments() const; |
2520 | |
2521 | /// Determine whether this function has a single parameter, or multiple |
2522 | /// parameters where all but the first have default arguments. |
2523 | /// |
2524 | /// This notion is used in the definition of copy/move constructors and |
2525 | /// initializer list constructors. Note that, unlike getMinRequiredArguments, |
2526 | /// parameter packs are not treated specially here. |
2527 | bool hasOneParamOrDefaultArgs() const; |
2528 | |
2529 | /// Find the source location information for how the type of this function |
2530 | /// was written. May be absent (for example if the function was declared via |
2531 | /// a typedef) and may contain a different type from that of the function |
2532 | /// (for example if the function type was adjusted by an attribute). |
2533 | FunctionTypeLoc getFunctionTypeLoc() const; |
2534 | |
2535 | QualType getReturnType() const { |
2536 | return getType()->castAs<FunctionType>()->getReturnType(); |
2537 | } |
2538 | |
2539 | /// Attempt to compute an informative source range covering the |
2540 | /// function return type. This may omit qualifiers and other information with |
2541 | /// limited representation in the AST. |
2542 | SourceRange getReturnTypeSourceRange() const; |
2543 | |
2544 | /// Attempt to compute an informative source range covering the |
2545 | /// function parameters, including the ellipsis of a variadic function. |
2546 | /// The source range excludes the parentheses, and is invalid if there are |
2547 | /// no parameters and no ellipsis. |
2548 | SourceRange getParametersSourceRange() const; |
2549 | |
2550 | /// Get the declared return type, which may differ from the actual return |
2551 | /// type if the return type is deduced. |
2552 | QualType getDeclaredReturnType() const { |
2553 | auto *TSI = getTypeSourceInfo(); |
2554 | QualType T = TSI ? TSI->getType() : getType(); |
2555 | return T->castAs<FunctionType>()->getReturnType(); |
2556 | } |
2557 | |
2558 | /// Gets the ExceptionSpecificationType as declared. |
2559 | ExceptionSpecificationType getExceptionSpecType() const { |
2560 | auto *TSI = getTypeSourceInfo(); |
2561 | QualType T = TSI ? TSI->getType() : getType(); |
2562 | const auto *FPT = T->getAs<FunctionProtoType>(); |
2563 | return FPT ? FPT->getExceptionSpecType() : EST_None; |
2564 | } |
2565 | |
2566 | /// Attempt to compute an informative source range covering the |
2567 | /// function exception specification, if any. |
2568 | SourceRange getExceptionSpecSourceRange() const; |
2569 | |
2570 | /// Determine the type of an expression that calls this function. |
2571 | QualType getCallResultType() const { |
2572 | return getType()->castAs<FunctionType>()->getCallResultType( |
2573 | getASTContext()); |
2574 | } |
2575 | |
2576 | /// Returns the storage class as written in the source. For the |
2577 | /// computed linkage of symbol, see getLinkage. |
2578 | StorageClass getStorageClass() const { |
2579 | return static_cast<StorageClass>(FunctionDeclBits.SClass); |
2580 | } |
2581 | |
2582 | /// Sets the storage class as written in the source. |
2583 | void setStorageClass(StorageClass SClass) { |
2584 | FunctionDeclBits.SClass = SClass; |
2585 | } |
2586 | |
2587 | /// Determine whether the "inline" keyword was specified for this |
2588 | /// function. |
2589 | bool isInlineSpecified() const { return FunctionDeclBits.IsInlineSpecified; } |
2590 | |
2591 | /// Set whether the "inline" keyword was specified for this function. |
2592 | void setInlineSpecified(bool I) { |
2593 | FunctionDeclBits.IsInlineSpecified = I; |
2594 | FunctionDeclBits.IsInline = I; |
2595 | } |
2596 | |
2597 | /// Flag that this function is implicitly inline. |
2598 | void setImplicitlyInline(bool I = true) { FunctionDeclBits.IsInline = I; } |
2599 | |
2600 | /// Determine whether this function should be inlined, because it is |
2601 | /// either marked "inline" or "constexpr" or is a member function of a class |
2602 | /// that was defined in the class body. |
2603 | bool isInlined() const { return FunctionDeclBits.IsInline; } |
2604 | |
2605 | bool isInlineDefinitionExternallyVisible() const; |
2606 | |
2607 | bool isMSExternInline() const; |
2608 | |
2609 | bool doesDeclarationForceExternallyVisibleDefinition() const; |
2610 | |
2611 | bool isStatic() const { return getStorageClass() == SC_Static; } |
2612 | |
2613 | /// Whether this function declaration represents an C++ overloaded |
2614 | /// operator, e.g., "operator+". |
2615 | bool isOverloadedOperator() const { |
2616 | return getOverloadedOperator() != OO_None; |
2617 | } |
2618 | |
2619 | OverloadedOperatorKind getOverloadedOperator() const; |
2620 | |
2621 | const IdentifierInfo *getLiteralIdentifier() const; |
2622 | |
2623 | /// If this function is an instantiation of a member function |
2624 | /// of a class template specialization, retrieves the function from |
2625 | /// which it was instantiated. |
2626 | /// |
2627 | /// This routine will return non-NULL for (non-templated) member |
2628 | /// functions of class templates and for instantiations of function |
2629 | /// templates. For example, given: |
2630 | /// |
2631 | /// \code |
2632 | /// template<typename T> |
2633 | /// struct X { |
2634 | /// void f(T); |
2635 | /// }; |
2636 | /// \endcode |
2637 | /// |
2638 | /// The declaration for X<int>::f is a (non-templated) FunctionDecl |
2639 | /// whose parent is the class template specialization X<int>. For |
2640 | /// this declaration, getInstantiatedFromFunction() will return |
2641 | /// the FunctionDecl X<T>::A. When a complete definition of |
2642 | /// X<int>::A is required, it will be instantiated from the |
2643 | /// declaration returned by getInstantiatedFromMemberFunction(). |
2644 | FunctionDecl *getInstantiatedFromMemberFunction() const; |
2645 | |
2646 | /// What kind of templated function this is. |
2647 | TemplatedKind getTemplatedKind() const; |
2648 | |
2649 | /// If this function is an instantiation of a member function of a |
2650 | /// class template specialization, retrieves the member specialization |
2651 | /// information. |
2652 | MemberSpecializationInfo *getMemberSpecializationInfo() const; |
2653 | |
2654 | /// Specify that this record is an instantiation of the |
2655 | /// member function FD. |
2656 | void setInstantiationOfMemberFunction(FunctionDecl *FD, |
2657 | TemplateSpecializationKind TSK) { |
2658 | setInstantiationOfMemberFunction(getASTContext(), FD, TSK); |
2659 | } |
2660 | |
2661 | /// Retrieves the function template that is described by this |
2662 | /// function declaration. |
2663 | /// |
2664 | /// Every function template is represented as a FunctionTemplateDecl |
2665 | /// and a FunctionDecl (or something derived from FunctionDecl). The |
2666 | /// former contains template properties (such as the template |
2667 | /// parameter lists) while the latter contains the actual |
2668 | /// description of the template's |
2669 | /// contents. FunctionTemplateDecl::getTemplatedDecl() retrieves the |
2670 | /// FunctionDecl that describes the function template, |
2671 | /// getDescribedFunctionTemplate() retrieves the |
2672 | /// FunctionTemplateDecl from a FunctionDecl. |
2673 | FunctionTemplateDecl *getDescribedFunctionTemplate() const; |
2674 | |
2675 | void setDescribedFunctionTemplate(FunctionTemplateDecl *Template); |
2676 | |
2677 | /// Determine whether this function is a function template |
2678 | /// specialization. |
2679 | bool isFunctionTemplateSpecialization() const { |
2680 | return getPrimaryTemplate() != nullptr; |
2681 | } |
2682 | |
2683 | /// If this function is actually a function template specialization, |
2684 | /// retrieve information about this function template specialization. |
2685 | /// Otherwise, returns NULL. |
2686 | FunctionTemplateSpecializationInfo *getTemplateSpecializationInfo() const; |
2687 | |
2688 | /// Determines whether this function is a function template |
2689 | /// specialization or a member of a class template specialization that can |
2690 | /// be implicitly instantiated. |
2691 | bool isImplicitlyInstantiable() const; |
2692 | |
2693 | /// Determines if the given function was instantiated from a |
2694 | /// function template. |
2695 | bool isTemplateInstantiation() const; |
2696 | |
2697 | /// Retrieve the function declaration from which this function could |
2698 | /// be instantiated, if it is an instantiation (rather than a non-template |
2699 | /// or a specialization, for example). |
2700 | /// |
2701 | /// If \p ForDefinition is \c false, explicit specializations will be treated |
2702 | /// as if they were implicit instantiations. This will then find the pattern |
2703 | /// corresponding to non-definition portions of the declaration, such as |
2704 | /// default arguments and the exception specification. |
2705 | FunctionDecl * |
2706 | getTemplateInstantiationPattern(bool ForDefinition = true) const; |
2707 | |
2708 | /// Retrieve the primary template that this function template |
2709 | /// specialization either specializes or was instantiated from. |
2710 | /// |
2711 | /// If this function declaration is not a function template specialization, |
2712 | /// returns NULL. |
2713 | FunctionTemplateDecl *getPrimaryTemplate() const; |
2714 | |
2715 | /// Retrieve the template arguments used to produce this function |
2716 | /// template specialization from the primary template. |
2717 | /// |
2718 | /// If this function declaration is not a function template specialization, |
2719 | /// returns NULL. |
2720 | const TemplateArgumentList *getTemplateSpecializationArgs() const; |
2721 | |
2722 | /// Retrieve the template argument list as written in the sources, |
2723 | /// if any. |
2724 | /// |
2725 | /// If this function declaration is not a function template specialization |
2726 | /// or if it had no explicit template argument list, returns NULL. |
2727 | /// Note that it an explicit template argument list may be written empty, |
2728 | /// e.g., template<> void foo<>(char* s); |
2729 | const ASTTemplateArgumentListInfo* |
2730 | getTemplateSpecializationArgsAsWritten() const; |
2731 | |
2732 | /// Specify that this function declaration is actually a function |
2733 | /// template specialization. |
2734 | /// |
2735 | /// \param Template the function template that this function template |
2736 | /// specialization specializes. |
2737 | /// |
2738 | /// \param TemplateArgs the template arguments that produced this |
2739 | /// function template specialization from the template. |
2740 | /// |
2741 | /// \param InsertPos If non-NULL, the position in the function template |
2742 | /// specialization set where the function template specialization data will |
2743 | /// be inserted. |
2744 | /// |
2745 | /// \param TSK the kind of template specialization this is. |
2746 | /// |
2747 | /// \param TemplateArgsAsWritten location info of template arguments. |
2748 | /// |
2749 | /// \param PointOfInstantiation point at which the function template |
2750 | /// specialization was first instantiated. |
2751 | void setFunctionTemplateSpecialization(FunctionTemplateDecl *Template, |
2752 | const TemplateArgumentList *TemplateArgs, |
2753 | void *InsertPos, |
2754 | TemplateSpecializationKind TSK = TSK_ImplicitInstantiation, |
2755 | const TemplateArgumentListInfo *TemplateArgsAsWritten = nullptr, |
2756 | SourceLocation PointOfInstantiation = SourceLocation()) { |
2757 | setFunctionTemplateSpecialization(getASTContext(), Template, TemplateArgs, |
2758 | InsertPos, TSK, TemplateArgsAsWritten, |
2759 | PointOfInstantiation); |
2760 | } |
2761 | |
2762 | /// Specifies that this function declaration is actually a |
2763 | /// dependent function template specialization. |
2764 | void setDependentTemplateSpecialization(ASTContext &Context, |
2765 | const UnresolvedSetImpl &Templates, |
2766 | const TemplateArgumentListInfo &TemplateArgs); |
2767 | |
2768 | DependentFunctionTemplateSpecializationInfo * |
2769 | getDependentSpecializationInfo() const; |
2770 | |
2771 | /// Determine what kind of template instantiation this function |
2772 | /// represents. |
2773 | TemplateSpecializationKind getTemplateSpecializationKind() const; |
2774 | |
2775 | /// Determine the kind of template specialization this function represents |
2776 | /// for the purpose of template instantiation. |
2777 | TemplateSpecializationKind |
2778 | getTemplateSpecializationKindForInstantiation() const; |
2779 | |
2780 | /// Determine what kind of template instantiation this function |
2781 | /// represents. |
2782 | void setTemplateSpecializationKind(TemplateSpecializationKind TSK, |
2783 | SourceLocation PointOfInstantiation = SourceLocation()); |
2784 | |
2785 | /// Retrieve the (first) point of instantiation of a function template |
2786 | /// specialization or a member of a class template specialization. |
2787 | /// |
2788 | /// \returns the first point of instantiation, if this function was |
2789 | /// instantiated from a template; otherwise, returns an invalid source |
2790 | /// location. |
2791 | SourceLocation getPointOfInstantiation() const; |
2792 | |
2793 | /// Determine whether this is or was instantiated from an out-of-line |
2794 | /// definition of a member function. |
2795 | bool isOutOfLine() const override; |
2796 | |
2797 | /// Identify a memory copying or setting function. |
2798 | /// If the given function is a memory copy or setting function, returns |
2799 | /// the corresponding Builtin ID. If the function is not a memory function, |
2800 | /// returns 0. |
2801 | unsigned getMemoryFunctionKind() const; |
2802 | |
2803 | /// Returns ODRHash of the function. This value is calculated and |
2804 | /// stored on first call, then the stored value returned on the other calls. |
2805 | unsigned getODRHash(); |
2806 | |
2807 | /// Returns cached ODRHash of the function. This must have been previously |
2808 | /// computed and stored. |
2809 | unsigned getODRHash() const; |
2810 | |
2811 | // Implement isa/cast/dyncast/etc. |
2812 | static bool classof(const Decl *D) { return classofKind(D->getKind()); } |
2813 | static bool classofKind(Kind K) { |
2814 | return K >= firstFunction && K <= lastFunction; |
2815 | } |
2816 | static DeclContext *castToDeclContext(const FunctionDecl *D) { |
2817 | return static_cast<DeclContext *>(const_cast<FunctionDecl*>(D)); |
2818 | } |
2819 | static FunctionDecl *castFromDeclContext(const DeclContext *DC) { |
2820 | return static_cast<FunctionDecl *>(const_cast<DeclContext*>(DC)); |
2821 | } |
2822 | }; |
2823 | |
2824 | /// Represents a member of a struct/union/class. |
2825 | class FieldDecl : public DeclaratorDecl, public Mergeable<FieldDecl> { |
2826 | unsigned BitField : 1; |
2827 | unsigned Mutable : 1; |
2828 | mutable unsigned CachedFieldIndex : 30; |
2829 | |
2830 | /// The kinds of value we can store in InitializerOrBitWidth. |
2831 | /// |
2832 | /// Note that this is compatible with InClassInitStyle except for |
2833 | /// ISK_CapturedVLAType. |
2834 | enum InitStorageKind { |
2835 | /// If the pointer is null, there's nothing special. Otherwise, |
2836 | /// this is a bitfield and the pointer is the Expr* storing the |
2837 | /// bit-width. |
2838 | ISK_NoInit = (unsigned) ICIS_NoInit, |
2839 | |
2840 | /// The pointer is an (optional due to delayed parsing) Expr* |
2841 | /// holding the copy-initializer. |
2842 | ISK_InClassCopyInit = (unsigned) ICIS_CopyInit, |
2843 | |
2844 | /// The pointer is an (optional due to delayed parsing) Expr* |
2845 | /// holding the list-initializer. |
2846 | ISK_InClassListInit = (unsigned) ICIS_ListInit, |
2847 | |
2848 | /// The pointer is a VariableArrayType* that's been captured; |
2849 | /// the enclosing context is a lambda or captured statement. |
2850 | ISK_CapturedVLAType, |
2851 | }; |
2852 | |
2853 | /// If this is a bitfield with a default member initializer, this |
2854 | /// structure is used to represent the two expressions. |
2855 | struct InitAndBitWidth { |
2856 | Expr *Init; |
2857 | Expr *BitWidth; |
2858 | }; |
2859 | |
2860 | /// Storage for either the bit-width, the in-class initializer, or |
2861 | /// both (via InitAndBitWidth), or the captured variable length array bound. |
2862 | /// |
2863 | /// If the storage kind is ISK_InClassCopyInit or |
2864 | /// ISK_InClassListInit, but the initializer is null, then this |
2865 | /// field has an in-class initializer that has not yet been parsed |
2866 | /// and attached. |
2867 | // FIXME: Tail-allocate this to reduce the size of FieldDecl in the |
2868 | // overwhelmingly common case that we have none of these things. |
2869 | llvm::PointerIntPair<void *, 2, InitStorageKind> InitStorage; |
2870 | |
2871 | protected: |
2872 | FieldDecl(Kind DK, DeclContext *DC, SourceLocation StartLoc, |
2873 | SourceLocation IdLoc, IdentifierInfo *Id, |
2874 | QualType T, TypeSourceInfo *TInfo, Expr *BW, bool Mutable, |
2875 | InClassInitStyle InitStyle) |
2876 | : DeclaratorDecl(DK, DC, IdLoc, Id, T, TInfo, StartLoc), |
2877 | BitField(false), Mutable(Mutable), CachedFieldIndex(0), |
2878 | InitStorage(nullptr, (InitStorageKind) InitStyle) { |
2879 | if (BW) |
2880 | setBitWidth(BW); |
2881 | } |
2882 | |
2883 | public: |
2884 | friend class ASTDeclReader; |
2885 | friend class ASTDeclWriter; |
2886 | |
2887 | static FieldDecl *Create(const ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, |
2888 | SourceLocation StartLoc, SourceLocation IdLoc, |
2889 | IdentifierInfo *Id, QualType T, |
2890 | TypeSourceInfo *TInfo, Expr *BW, bool Mutable, |
2891 | InClassInitStyle InitStyle); |
2892 | |
2893 | static FieldDecl *CreateDeserialized(ASTContext &C, unsigned ID); |
2894 | |
2895 | /// Returns the index of this field within its record, |
2896 | /// as appropriate for passing to ASTRecordLayout::getFieldOffset. |
2897 | unsigned getFieldIndex() const; |
2898 | |
2899 | /// Determines whether this field is mutable (C++ only). |
2900 | bool isMutable() const { return Mutable; } |
2901 | |
2902 | /// Determines whether this field is a bitfield. |
2903 | bool isBitField() const { return BitField; } |
2904 | |
2905 | /// Determines whether this is an unnamed bitfield. |
2906 | bool isUnnamedBitfield() const { return isBitField() && !getDeclName(); } |
2907 | |
2908 | /// Determines whether this field is a |
2909 | /// representative for an anonymous struct or union. Such fields are |
2910 | /// unnamed and are implicitly generated by the implementation to |
2911 | /// store the data for the anonymous union or struct. |
2912 | bool isAnonymousStructOrUnion() const; |
2913 | |
2914 | Expr *getBitWidth() const { |
2915 | if (!BitField) |
2916 | return nullptr; |
2917 | void *Ptr = InitStorage.getPointer(); |
2918 | if (getInClassInitStyle()) |
2919 | return static_cast<InitAndBitWidth*>(Ptr)->BitWidth; |
2920 | return static_cast<Expr*>(Ptr); |
2921 | } |
2922 | |
2923 | unsigned getBitWidthValue(const ASTContext &Ctx) const; |
2924 | |
2925 | /// Set the bit-field width for this member. |
2926 | // Note: used by some clients (i.e., do not remove it). |
2927 | void setBitWidth(Expr *Width) { |
2928 | assert(!hasCapturedVLAType() && !BitField &&((void)0) |
2929 | "bit width or captured type already set")((void)0); |
2930 | assert(Width && "no bit width specified")((void)0); |
2931 | InitStorage.setPointer( |
2932 | InitStorage.getInt() |
2933 | ? new (getASTContext()) |
2934 | InitAndBitWidth{getInClassInitializer(), Width} |
2935 | : static_cast<void*>(Width)); |
2936 | BitField = true; |
2937 | } |
2938 | |
2939 | /// Remove the bit-field width from this member. |
2940 | // Note: used by some clients (i.e., do not remove it). |
2941 | void removeBitWidth() { |
2942 | assert(isBitField() && "no bitfield width to remove")((void)0); |
2943 | InitStorage.setPointer(getInClassInitializer()); |
2944 | BitField = false; |
2945 | } |
2946 | |
2947 | /// Is this a zero-length bit-field? Such bit-fields aren't really bit-fields |
2948 | /// at all and instead act as a separator between contiguous runs of other |
2949 | /// bit-fields. |
2950 | bool isZeroLengthBitField(const ASTContext &Ctx) const; |
2951 | |
2952 | /// Determine if this field is a subobject of zero size, that is, either a |
2953 | /// zero-length bit-field or a field of empty class type with the |
2954 | /// [[no_unique_address]] attribute. |
2955 | bool isZeroSize(const ASTContext &Ctx) const; |
2956 | |
2957 | /// Get the kind of (C++11) default member initializer that this field has. |
2958 | InClassInitStyle getInClassInitStyle() const { |
2959 | InitStorageKind storageKind = InitStorage.getInt(); |
2960 | return (storageKind == ISK_CapturedVLAType |
2961 | ? ICIS_NoInit : (InClassInitStyle) storageKind); |
2962 | } |
2963 | |
2964 | /// Determine whether this member has a C++11 default member initializer. |
2965 | bool hasInClassInitializer() const { |
2966 | return getInClassInitStyle() != ICIS_NoInit; |
2967 | } |
2968 | |
2969 | /// Get the C++11 default member initializer for this member, or null if one |
2970 | /// has not been set. If a valid declaration has a default member initializer, |
2971 | /// but this returns null, then we have not parsed and attached it yet. |
2972 | Expr *getInClassInitializer() const { |
2973 | if (!hasInClassInitializer()) |
2974 | return nullptr; |
2975 | void *Ptr = InitStorage.getPointer(); |
2976 | if (BitField) |
2977 | return static_cast<InitAndBitWidth*>(Ptr)->Init; |
2978 | return static_cast<Expr*>(Ptr); |
2979 | } |
2980 | |
2981 | /// Set the C++11 in-class initializer for this member. |
2982 | void setInClassInitializer(Expr *Init) { |
2983 | assert(hasInClassInitializer() && !getInClassInitializer())((void)0); |
2984 | if (BitField) |
2985 | static_cast<InitAndBitWidth*>(InitStorage.getPointer())->Init = Init; |
2986 | else |
2987 | InitStorage.setPointer(Init); |
2988 | } |
2989 | |
2990 | /// Remove the C++11 in-class initializer from this member. |
2991 | void removeInClassInitializer() { |
2992 | assert(hasInClassInitializer() && "no initializer to remove")((void)0); |
2993 | InitStorage.setPointerAndInt(getBitWidth(), ISK_NoInit); |
2994 | } |
2995 | |
2996 | /// Determine whether this member captures the variable length array |
2997 | /// type. |
2998 | bool hasCapturedVLAType() const { |
2999 | return InitStorage.getInt() == ISK_CapturedVLAType; |
3000 | } |
3001 | |
3002 | /// Get the captured variable length array type. |
3003 | const VariableArrayType *getCapturedVLAType() const { |
3004 | return hasCapturedVLAType() ? static_cast<const VariableArrayType *>( |
3005 | InitStorage.getPointer()) |
3006 | : nullptr; |
3007 | } |
3008 | |
3009 | /// Set the captured variable length array type for this field. |
3010 | void setCapturedVLAType(const VariableArrayType *VLAType); |
3011 | |
3012 | /// Returns the parent of this field declaration, which |
3013 | /// is the struct in which this field is defined. |
3014 | /// |
3015 | /// Returns null if this is not a normal class/struct field declaration, e.g. |
3016 | /// ObjCAtDefsFieldDecl, ObjCIvarDecl. |
3017 | const RecordDecl *getParent() const { |
3018 | return dyn_cast<RecordDecl>(getDeclContext()); |
3019 | } |
3020 | |
3021 | RecordDecl *getParent() { |
3022 | return dyn_cast<RecordDecl>(getDeclContext()); |
3023 | } |
3024 | |
3025 | SourceRange getSourceRange() const override LLVM_READONLY__attribute__((__pure__)); |
3026 | |
3027 | /// Retrieves the canonical declaration of this field. |
3028 | FieldDecl *getCanonicalDecl() override { return getFirstDecl(); } |
3029 | const FieldDecl *getCanonicalDecl() const { return getFirstDecl(); } |
3030 | |
3031 | // Implement isa/cast/dyncast/etc. |
3032 | static bool classof(const Decl *D) { return classofKind(D->getKind()); } |
3033 | static bool classofKind(Kind K) { return K >= firstField && K <= lastField; } |
3034 | }; |
3035 | |
3036 | /// An instance of this object exists for each enum constant |
3037 | /// that is defined. For example, in "enum X {a,b}", each of a/b are |
3038 | /// EnumConstantDecl's, X is an instance of EnumDecl, and the type of a/b is a |
3039 | /// TagType for the X EnumDecl. |
3040 | class EnumConstantDecl : public ValueDecl, public Mergeable<EnumConstantDecl> { |
3041 | Stmt *Init; // an integer constant expression |
3042 | llvm::APSInt Val; // The value. |
3043 | |
3044 | protected: |
3045 | EnumConstantDecl(DeclContext *DC, SourceLocation L, |
3046 | IdentifierInfo *Id, QualType T, Expr *E, |
3047 | const llvm::APSInt &V) |
3048 | : ValueDecl(EnumConstant, DC, L, Id, T), Init((Stmt*)E), Val(V) {} |
3049 | |
3050 | public: |
3051 | friend class StmtIteratorBase; |
3052 | |
3053 | static EnumConstantDecl *Create(ASTContext &C, EnumDecl *DC, |
3054 | SourceLocation L, IdentifierInfo *Id, |
3055 | QualType T, Expr *E, |
3056 | const llvm::APSInt &V); |
3057 | static EnumConstantDecl *CreateDeserialized(ASTContext &C, unsigned ID); |
3058 | |
3059 | const Expr *getInitExpr() const { return (const Expr*) Init; } |
3060 | Expr *getInitExpr() { return (Expr*) Init; } |
3061 | const llvm::APSInt &getInitVal() const { return Val; } |
3062 | |
3063 | void setInitExpr(Expr *E) { Init = (Stmt*) E; } |
3064 | void setInitVal(const llvm::APSInt &V) { Val = V; } |
3065 | |
3066 | SourceRange getSourceRange() const override LLVM_READONLY__attribute__((__pure__)); |
3067 | |
3068 | /// Retrieves the canonical declaration of this enumerator. |
3069 | EnumConstantDecl *getCanonicalDecl() override { return getFirstDecl(); } |
3070 | const EnumConstantDecl *getCanonicalDecl() const { return getFirstDecl(); } |
3071 | |
3072 | // Implement isa/cast/dyncast/etc. |
3073 | static bool classof(const Decl *D) { return classofKind(D->getKind()); } |
3074 | static bool classofKind(Kind K) { return K == EnumConstant; } |
3075 | }; |
3076 | |
3077 | /// Represents a field injected from an anonymous union/struct into the parent |
3078 | /// scope. These are always implicit. |
3079 | class IndirectFieldDecl : public ValueDecl, |
3080 | public Mergeable<IndirectFieldDecl> { |
3081 | NamedDecl **Chaining; |
3082 | unsigned ChainingSize; |
3083 | |
3084 | IndirectFieldDecl(ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, SourceLocation L, |
3085 | DeclarationName N, QualType T, |
3086 | MutableArrayRef<NamedDecl *> CH); |
3087 | |
3088 | void anchor() override; |
3089 | |
3090 | public: |
3091 | friend class ASTDeclReader; |
3092 | |
3093 | static IndirectFieldDecl *Create(ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, |
3094 | SourceLocation L, IdentifierInfo *Id, |
3095 | QualType T, llvm::MutableArrayRef<NamedDecl *> CH); |
3096 | |
3097 | static IndirectFieldDecl *CreateDeserialized(ASTContext &C, unsigned ID); |
3098 | |
3099 | using chain_iterator = ArrayRef<NamedDecl *>::const_iterator; |
3100 | |
3101 | ArrayRef<NamedDecl *> chain() const { |
3102 | return llvm::makeArrayRef(Chaining, ChainingSize); |
3103 | } |
3104 | chain_iterator chain_begin() const { return chain().begin(); } |
3105 | chain_iterator chain_end() const { return chain().end(); } |
3106 | |
3107 | unsigned getChainingSize() const { return ChainingSize; } |
3108 | |
3109 | FieldDecl *getAnonField() const { |
3110 | assert(chain().size() >= 2)((void)0); |
3111 | return cast<FieldDecl>(chain().back()); |
3112 | } |
3113 | |
3114 | VarDecl *getVarDecl() const { |
3115 | assert(chain().size() >= 2)((void)0); |
3116 | return dyn_cast<VarDecl>(chain().front()); |
3117 | } |
3118 | |
3119 | IndirectFieldDecl *getCanonicalDecl() override { return getFirstDecl(); } |
3120 | const IndirectFieldDecl *getCanonicalDecl() const { return getFirstDecl(); } |
3121 | |
3122 | // Implement isa/cast/dyncast/etc. |
3123 | static bool classof(const Decl *D) { return classofKind(D->getKind()); } |
3124 | static bool classofKind(Kind K) { return K == IndirectField; } |
3125 | }; |
3126 | |
3127 | /// Represents a declaration of a type. |
3128 | class TypeDecl : public NamedDecl { |
3129 | friend class ASTContext; |
3130 | |
3131 | /// This indicates the Type object that represents |
3132 | /// this TypeDecl. It is a cache maintained by |
3133 | /// ASTContext::getTypedefType, ASTContext::getTagDeclType, and |
3134 | /// ASTContext::getTemplateTypeParmType, and TemplateTypeParmDecl. |
3135 | mutable const Type *TypeForDecl = nullptr; |
3136 | |
3137 | /// The start of the source range for this declaration. |
3138 | SourceLocation LocStart; |
3139 | |
3140 | void anchor() override; |
3141 | |
3142 | protected: |
3143 | TypeDecl(Kind DK, DeclContext *DC, SourceLocation L, IdentifierInfo *Id, |
3144 | SourceLocation StartL = SourceLocation()) |
3145 | : NamedDecl(DK, DC, L, Id), LocStart(StartL) {} |
3146 | |
3147 | public: |
3148 | // Low-level accessor. If you just want the type defined by this node, |
3149 | // check out ASTContext::getTypeDeclType or one of |
3150 | // ASTContext::getTypedefType, ASTContext::getRecordType, etc. if you |
3151 | // already know the specific kind of node this is. |
3152 | const Type *getTypeForDecl() const { return TypeForDecl; } |
3153 | void setTypeForDecl(const Type *TD) { TypeForDecl = TD; } |
3154 | |
3155 | SourceLocation getBeginLoc() const LLVM_READONLY__attribute__((__pure__)) { return LocStart; } |
3156 | void setLocStart(SourceLocation L) { LocStart = L; } |
3157 | SourceRange getSourceRange() const override LLVM_READONLY__attribute__((__pure__)) { |
3158 | if (LocStart.isValid()) |
3159 | return SourceRange(LocStart, getLocation()); |
3160 | else |
3161 | return SourceRange(getLocation()); |
3162 | } |
3163 | |
3164 | // Implement isa/cast/dyncast/etc. |
3165 | static bool classof(const Decl *D) { return classofKind(D->getKind()); } |
3166 | static bool classofKind(Kind K) { return K >= firstType && K <= lastType; } |
3167 | }; |
3168 | |
3169 | /// Base class for declarations which introduce a typedef-name. |
3170 | class TypedefNameDecl : public TypeDecl, public Redeclarable<TypedefNameDecl> { |
3171 | struct alignas(8) ModedTInfo { |
3172 | TypeSourceInfo *first; |
3173 | QualType second; |
3174 | }; |
3175 | |
3176 | /// If int part is 0, we have not computed IsTransparentTag. |
3177 | /// Otherwise, IsTransparentTag is (getInt() >> 1). |
3178 | mutable llvm::PointerIntPair< |
3179 | llvm::PointerUnion<TypeSourceInfo *, ModedTInfo *>, 2> |
3180 | MaybeModedTInfo; |
3181 | |
3182 | void anchor() override; |
3183 | |
3184 | protected: |
3185 | TypedefNameDecl(Kind DK, ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, |
3186 | SourceLocation StartLoc, SourceLocation IdLoc, |
3187 | IdentifierInfo *Id, TypeSourceInfo *TInfo) |
3188 | : TypeDecl(DK, DC, IdLoc, Id, StartLoc), redeclarable_base(C), |
3189 | MaybeModedTInfo(TInfo, 0) {} |
3190 | |
3191 | using redeclarable_base = Redeclarable<TypedefNameDecl>; |
3192 | |
3193 | TypedefNameDecl *getNextRedeclarationImpl() override { |
3194 | return getNextRedeclaration(); |
3195 | } |
3196 | |
3197 | TypedefNameDecl *getPreviousDeclImpl() override { |
3198 | return getPreviousDecl(); |
3199 | } |
3200 | |
3201 | TypedefNameDecl *getMostRecentDeclImpl() override { |
3202 | return getMostRecentDecl(); |
3203 | } |
3204 | |
3205 | public: |
3206 | using redecl_range = redeclarable_base::redecl_range; |
3207 | using redecl_iterator = redeclarable_base::redecl_iterator; |
3208 | |
3209 | using redeclarable_base::redecls_begin; |
3210 | using redeclarable_base::redecls_end; |
3211 | using redeclarable_base::redecls; |
3212 | using redeclarable_base::getPreviousDecl; |
3213 | using redeclarable_base::getMostRecentDecl; |
3214 | using redeclarable_base::isFirstDecl; |
3215 | |
3216 | bool isModed() const { |
3217 | return MaybeModedTInfo.getPointer().is<ModedTInfo *>(); |
3218 | } |
3219 | |
3220 | TypeSourceInfo *getTypeSourceInfo() const { |
3221 | return isModed() ? MaybeModedTInfo.getPointer().get<ModedTInfo *>()->first |
3222 | : MaybeModedTInfo.getPointer().get<TypeSourceInfo *>(); |
3223 | } |
3224 | |
3225 | QualType getUnderlyingType() const { |
3226 | return isModed() ? MaybeModedTInfo.getPointer().get<ModedTInfo *>()->second |
3227 | : MaybeModedTInfo.getPointer() |
3228 | .get<TypeSourceInfo *>() |
3229 | ->getType(); |
3230 | } |
3231 | |
3232 | void setTypeSourceInfo(TypeSourceInfo *newType) { |
3233 | MaybeModedTInfo.setPointer(newType); |
3234 | } |
3235 | |
3236 | void setModedTypeSourceInfo(TypeSourceInfo *unmodedTSI, QualType modedTy) { |
3237 | MaybeModedTInfo.setPointer(new (getASTContext(), 8) |
3238 | ModedTInfo({unmodedTSI, modedTy})); |
3239 | } |
3240 | |
3241 | /// Retrieves the canonical declaration of this typedef-name. |
3242 | TypedefNameDecl *getCanonicalDecl() override { return getFirstDecl(); } |
3243 | const TypedefNameDecl *getCanonicalDecl() const { return getFirstDecl(); } |
3244 | |
3245 | /// Retrieves the tag declaration for which this is the typedef name for |
3246 | /// linkage purposes, if any. |
3247 | /// |
3248 | /// \param AnyRedecl Look for the tag declaration in any redeclaration of |
3249 | /// this typedef declaration. |
3250 | TagDecl *getAnonDeclWithTypedefName(bool AnyRedecl = false) const; |
3251 | |
3252 | /// Determines if this typedef shares a name and spelling location with its |
3253 | /// underlying tag type, as is the case with the NS_ENUM macro. |
3254 | bool isTransparentTag() const { |
3255 | if (MaybeModedTInfo.getInt()) |
3256 | return MaybeModedTInfo.getInt() & 0x2; |
3257 | return isTransparentTagSlow(); |
3258 | } |
3259 | |
3260 | // Implement isa/cast/dyncast/etc. |
3261 | static bool classof(const Decl *D) { return classofKind(D->getKind()); } |
3262 | static bool classofKind(Kind K) { |
3263 | return K >= firstTypedefName && K <= lastTypedefName; |
3264 | } |
3265 | |
3266 | private: |
3267 | bool isTransparentTagSlow() const; |
3268 | }; |
3269 | |
3270 | /// Represents the declaration of a typedef-name via the 'typedef' |
3271 | /// type specifier. |
3272 | class TypedefDecl : public TypedefNameDecl { |
3273 | TypedefDecl(ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, SourceLocation StartLoc, |
3274 | SourceLocation IdLoc, IdentifierInfo *Id, TypeSourceInfo *TInfo) |
3275 | : TypedefNameDecl(Typedef, C, DC, StartLoc, IdLoc, Id, TInfo) {} |
3276 | |
3277 | public: |
3278 | static TypedefDecl *Create(ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, |
3279 | SourceLocation StartLoc, SourceLocation IdLoc, |
3280 | IdentifierInfo *Id, TypeSourceInfo *TInfo); |
3281 | static TypedefDecl *CreateDeserialized(ASTContext &C, unsigned ID); |
3282 | |
3283 | SourceRange getSourceRange() const override LLVM_READONLY__attribute__((__pure__)); |
3284 | |
3285 | // Implement isa/cast/dyncast/etc. |
3286 | static bool classof(const Decl *D) { return classofKind(D->getKind()); } |
3287 | static bool classofKind(Kind K) { return K == Typedef; } |
3288 | }; |
3289 | |
3290 | /// Represents the declaration of a typedef-name via a C++11 |
3291 | /// alias-declaration. |
3292 | class TypeAliasDecl : public TypedefNameDecl { |
3293 | /// The template for which this is the pattern, if any. |
3294 | TypeAliasTemplateDecl *Template; |
3295 | |
3296 | TypeAliasDecl(ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, SourceLocation StartLoc, |
3297 | SourceLocation IdLoc, IdentifierInfo *Id, TypeSourceInfo *TInfo) |
3298 | : TypedefNameDecl(TypeAlias, C, DC, StartLoc, IdLoc, Id, TInfo), |
3299 | Template(nullptr) {} |
3300 | |
3301 | public: |
3302 | static TypeAliasDecl *Create(ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, |
3303 | SourceLocation StartLoc, SourceLocation IdLoc, |
3304 | IdentifierInfo *Id, TypeSourceInfo *TInfo); |
3305 | static TypeAliasDecl *CreateDeserialized(ASTContext &C, unsigned ID); |
3306 | |
3307 | SourceRange getSourceRange() const override LLVM_READONLY__attribute__((__pure__)); |
3308 | |
3309 | TypeAliasTemplateDecl *getDescribedAliasTemplate() const { return Template; } |
3310 | void setDescribedAliasTemplate(TypeAliasTemplateDecl *TAT) { Template = TAT; } |
3311 | |
3312 | // Implement isa/cast/dyncast/etc. |
3313 | static bool classof(const Decl *D) { return classofKind(D->getKind()); } |
3314 | static bool classofKind(Kind K) { return K == TypeAlias; } |
3315 | }; |
3316 | |
3317 | /// Represents the declaration of a struct/union/class/enum. |
3318 | class TagDecl : public TypeDecl, |
3319 | public DeclContext, |
3320 | public Redeclarable<TagDecl> { |
3321 | // This class stores some data in DeclContext::TagDeclBits |
3322 | // to save some space. Use the provided accessors to access it. |
3323 | public: |
3324 | // This is really ugly. |
3325 | using TagKind = TagTypeKind; |
3326 | |
3327 | private: |
3328 | SourceRange BraceRange; |
3329 | |
3330 | // A struct representing syntactic qualifier info, |
3331 | // to be used for the (uncommon) case of out-of-line declarations. |
3332 | using ExtInfo = QualifierInfo; |
3333 | |
3334 | /// If the (out-of-line) tag declaration name |
3335 | /// is qualified, it points to the qualifier info (nns and range); |
3336 | /// otherwise, if the tag declaration is anonymous and it is part of |
3337 | /// a typedef or alias, it points to the TypedefNameDecl (used for mangling); |
3338 | /// otherwise, if the tag declaration is anonymous and it is used as a |
3339 | /// declaration specifier for variables, it points to the first VarDecl (used |
3340 | /// for mangling); |
3341 | /// otherwise, it is a null (TypedefNameDecl) pointer. |
3342 | llvm::PointerUnion<TypedefNameDecl *, ExtInfo *> TypedefNameDeclOrQualifier; |
3343 | |
3344 | bool hasExtInfo() const { return TypedefNameDeclOrQualifier.is<ExtInfo *>(); } |
3345 | ExtInfo *getExtInfo() { return TypedefNameDeclOrQualifier.get<ExtInfo *>(); } |
3346 | const ExtInfo *getExtInfo() const { |
3347 | return TypedefNameDeclOrQualifier.get<ExtInfo *>(); |
3348 | } |
3349 | |
3350 | protected: |
3351 | TagDecl(Kind DK, TagKind TK, const ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, |
3352 | SourceLocation L, IdentifierInfo *Id, TagDecl *PrevDecl, |
3353 | SourceLocation StartL); |
3354 | |
3355 | using redeclarable_base = Redeclarable<TagDecl>; |
3356 | |
3357 | TagDecl *getNextRedeclarationImpl() override { |
3358 | return getNextRedeclaration(); |
3359 | } |
3360 | |
3361 | TagDecl *getPreviousDeclImpl() override { |
3362 | return getPreviousDecl(); |
3363 | } |
3364 | |
3365 | TagDecl *getMostRecentDeclImpl() override { |
3366 | return getMostRecentDecl(); |
3367 | } |
3368 | |
3369 | /// Completes the definition of this tag declaration. |
3370 | /// |
3371 | /// This is a helper function for derived classes. |
3372 | void completeDefinition(); |
3373 | |
3374 | /// True if this decl is currently being defined. |
3375 | void setBeingDefined(bool V = true) { TagDeclBits.IsBeingDefined = V; } |
3376 | |
3377 | /// Indicates whether it is possible for declarations of this kind |
3378 | /// to have an out-of-date definition. |
3379 | /// |
3380 | /// This option is only enabled when modules are enabled. |
3381 | void setMayHaveOutOfDateDef(bool V = true) { |
3382 | TagDeclBits.MayHaveOutOfDateDef = V; |
3383 | } |
3384 | |
3385 | public: |
3386 | friend class ASTDeclReader; |
3387 | friend class ASTDeclWriter; |
3388 | |
3389 | using redecl_range = redeclarable_base::redecl_range; |
3390 | using redecl_iterator = redeclarable_base::redecl_iterator; |
3391 | |
3392 | using redeclarable_base::redecls_begin; |
3393 | using redeclarable_base::redecls_end; |
3394 | using redeclarable_base::redecls; |
3395 | using redeclarable_base::getPreviousDecl; |
3396 | using redeclarable_base::getMostRecentDecl; |
3397 | using redeclarable_base::isFirstDecl; |
3398 | |
3399 | SourceRange getBraceRange() const { return BraceRange; } |
3400 | void setBraceRange(SourceRange R) { BraceRange = R; } |
3401 | |
3402 | /// Return SourceLocation representing start of source |
3403 | /// range ignoring outer template declarations. |
3404 | SourceLocation getInnerLocStart() const { return getBeginLoc(); } |
3405 | |
3406 | /// Return SourceLocation representing start of source |
3407 | /// range taking into account any outer template declarations. |
3408 | SourceLocation getOuterLocStart() const; |
3409 | SourceRange getSourceRange() const override LLVM_READONLY__attribute__((__pure__)); |
3410 | |
3411 | TagDecl *getCanonicalDecl() override; |
3412 | const TagDecl *getCanonicalDecl() const { |
3413 | return const_cast<TagDecl*>(this)->getCanonicalDecl(); |
3414 | } |
3415 | |
3416 | /// Return true if this declaration is a completion definition of the type. |
3417 | /// Provided for consistency. |
3418 | bool isThisDeclarationADefinition() const { |
3419 | return isCompleteDefinition(); |
3420 | } |
3421 | |
3422 | /// Return true if this decl has its body fully specified. |
3423 | bool isCompleteDefinition() const { return TagDeclBits.IsCompleteDefinition; } |
3424 | |
3425 | /// True if this decl has its body fully specified. |
3426 | void setCompleteDefinition(bool V = true) { |
3427 | TagDeclBits.IsCompleteDefinition = V; |
3428 | } |
3429 | |
3430 | /// Return true if this complete decl is |
3431 | /// required to be complete for some existing use. |
3432 | bool isCompleteDefinitionRequired() const { |
3433 | return TagDeclBits.IsCompleteDefinitionRequired; |
3434 | } |
3435 | |
3436 | /// True if this complete decl is |
3437 | /// required to be complete for some existing use. |
3438 | void setCompleteDefinitionRequired(bool V = true) { |
3439 | TagDeclBits.IsCompleteDefinitionRequired = V; |
3440 | } |
3441 | |
3442 | /// Return true if this decl is currently being defined. |
3443 | bool isBeingDefined() const { return TagDeclBits.IsBeingDefined; } |
3444 | |
3445 | /// True if this tag declaration is "embedded" (i.e., defined or declared |
3446 | /// for the very first time) in the syntax of a declarator. |
3447 | bool isEmbeddedInDeclarator() const { |
3448 | return TagDeclBits.IsEmbeddedInDeclarator; |
3449 | } |
3450 | |
3451 | /// True if this tag declaration is "embedded" (i.e., defined or declared |
3452 | /// for the very first time) in the syntax of a declarator. |
3453 | void setEmbeddedInDeclarator(bool isInDeclarator) { |
3454 | TagDeclBits.IsEmbeddedInDeclarator = isInDeclarator; |
3455 | } |
3456 | |
3457 | /// True if this tag is free standing, e.g. "struct foo;". |
3458 | bool isFreeStanding() const { return TagDeclBits.IsFreeStanding; } |
3459 | |
3460 | /// True if this tag is free standing, e.g. "struct foo;". |
3461 | void setFreeStanding(bool isFreeStanding = true) { |
3462 | TagDeclBits.IsFreeStanding = isFreeStanding; |
3463 | } |
3464 | |
3465 | /// Indicates whether it is possible for declarations of this kind |
3466 | /// to have an out-of-date definition. |
3467 | /// |
3468 | /// This option is only enabled when modules are enabled. |
3469 | bool mayHaveOutOfDateDef() const { return TagDeclBits.MayHaveOutOfDateDef; } |
3470 | |
3471 | /// Whether this declaration declares a type that is |
3472 | /// dependent, i.e., a type that somehow depends on template |
3473 | /// parameters. |
3474 | bool isDependentType() const { return isDependentContext(); } |
3475 | |
3476 | /// Starts the definition of this tag declaration. |
3477 | /// |
3478 | /// This method should be invoked at the beginning of the definition |
3479 | /// of this tag declaration. It will set the tag type into a state |
3480 | /// where it is in the process of being defined. |
3481 | void startDefinition(); |
3482 | |
3483 | /// Returns the TagDecl that actually defines this |
3484 | /// struct/union/class/enum. When determining whether or not a |
3485 | /// struct/union/class/enum has a definition, one should use this |
3486 | /// method as opposed to 'isDefinition'. 'isDefinition' indicates |
3487 | /// whether or not a specific TagDecl is defining declaration, not |
3488 | /// whether or not the struct/union/class/enum type is defined. |
3489 | /// This method returns NULL if there is no TagDecl that defines |
3490 | /// the struct/union/class/enum. |
3491 | TagDecl *getDefinition() const; |
3492 | |
3493 | StringRef getKindName() const { |
3494 | return TypeWithKeyword::getTagTypeKindName(getTagKind()); |
3495 | } |
3496 | |
3497 | TagKind getTagKind() const { |
3498 | return static_cast<TagKind>(TagDeclBits.TagDeclKind); |
3499 | } |
3500 | |
3501 | void setTagKind(TagKind TK) { TagDeclBits.TagDeclKind = TK; } |
3502 | |
3503 | bool isStruct() const { return getTagKind() == TTK_Struct; } |
3504 | bool isInterface() const { return getTagKind() == TTK_Interface; } |
3505 | bool isClass() const { return getTagKind() == TTK_Class; } |
3506 | bool isUnion() const { return getTagKind() == TTK_Union; } |
3507 | bool isEnum() const { return getTagKind() == TTK_Enum; } |
3508 | |
3509 | /// Is this tag type named, either directly or via being defined in |
3510 | /// a typedef of this type? |
3511 | /// |
3512 | /// C++11 [basic.link]p8: |
3513 | /// A type is said to have linkage if and only if: |
3514 | /// - it is a class or enumeration type that is named (or has a |
3515 | /// name for linkage purposes) and the name has linkage; ... |
3516 | /// C++11 [dcl.typedef]p9: |
3517 | /// If the typedef declaration defines an unnamed class (or enum), |
3518 | /// the first typedef-name declared by the declaration to be that |
3519 | /// class type (or enum type) is used to denote the class type (or |
3520 | /// enum type) for linkage purposes only. |
3521 | /// |
3522 | /// C does not have an analogous rule, but the same concept is |
3523 | /// nonetheless useful in some places. |
3524 | bool hasNameForLinkage() const { |
3525 | return (getDeclName() || getTypedefNameForAnonDecl()); |
3526 | } |
3527 | |
3528 | TypedefNameDecl *getTypedefNameForAnonDecl() const { |
3529 | return hasExtInfo() ? nullptr |
3530 | : TypedefNameDeclOrQualifier.get<TypedefNameDecl *>(); |
3531 | } |
3532 | |
3533 | void setTypedefNameForAnonDecl(TypedefNameDecl *TDD); |
3534 | |
3535 | /// Retrieve the nested-name-specifier that qualifies the name of this |
3536 | /// declaration, if it was present in the source. |
3537 | NestedNameSpecifier *getQualifier() const { |
3538 | return hasExtInfo() ? getExtInfo()->QualifierLoc.getNestedNameSpecifier() |
3539 | : nullptr; |
3540 | } |
3541 | |
3542 | /// Retrieve the nested-name-specifier (with source-location |
3543 | /// information) that qualifies the name of this declaration, if it was |
3544 | /// present in the source. |
3545 | NestedNameSpecifierLoc getQualifierLoc() const { |
3546 | return hasExtInfo() ? getExtInfo()->QualifierLoc |
3547 | : NestedNameSpecifierLoc(); |
3548 | } |
3549 | |
3550 | void setQualifierInfo(NestedNameSpecifierLoc QualifierLoc); |
3551 | |
3552 | unsigned getNumTemplateParameterLists() const { |
3553 | return hasExtInfo() ? getExtInfo()->NumTemplParamLists : 0; |
3554 | } |
3555 | |
3556 | TemplateParameterList *getTemplateParameterList(unsigned i) const { |
3557 | assert(i < getNumTemplateParameterLists())((void)0); |
3558 | return getExtInfo()->TemplParamLists[i]; |
3559 | } |
3560 | |
3561 | void setTemplateParameterListsInfo(ASTContext &Context, |
3562 | ArrayRef<TemplateParameterList *> TPLists); |
3563 | |
3564 | // Implement isa/cast/dyncast/etc. |
3565 | static bool classof(const Decl *D) { return classofKind(D->getKind()); } |
3566 | static bool classofKind(Kind K) { return K >= firstTag && K <= lastTag; } |
3567 | |
3568 | static DeclContext *castToDeclContext(const TagDecl *D) { |
3569 | return static_cast<DeclContext *>(const_cast<TagDecl*>(D)); |
3570 | } |
3571 | |
3572 | static TagDecl *castFromDeclContext(const DeclContext *DC) { |
3573 | return static_cast<TagDecl *>(const_cast<DeclContext*>(DC)); |
3574 | } |
3575 | }; |
3576 | |
3577 | /// Represents an enum. In C++11, enums can be forward-declared |
3578 | /// with a fixed underlying type, and in C we allow them to be forward-declared |
3579 | /// with no underlying type as an extension. |
3580 | class EnumDecl : public TagDecl { |
3581 | // This class stores some data in DeclContext::EnumDeclBits |
3582 | // to save some space. Use the provided accessors to access it. |
3583 | |
3584 | /// This represent the integer type that the enum corresponds |
3585 | /// to for code generation purposes. Note that the enumerator constants may |
3586 | /// have a different type than this does. |
3587 | /// |
3588 | /// If the underlying integer type was explicitly stated in the source |
3589 | /// code, this is a TypeSourceInfo* for that type. Otherwise this type |
3590 | /// was automatically deduced somehow, and this is a Type*. |
3591 | /// |
3592 | /// Normally if IsFixed(), this would contain a TypeSourceInfo*, but in |
3593 | /// some cases it won't. |
3594 | /// |
3595 | /// The underlying type of an enumeration never has any qualifiers, so |
3596 | /// we can get away with just storing a raw Type*, and thus save an |
3597 | /// extra pointer when TypeSourceInfo is needed. |
3598 | llvm::PointerUnion<const Type *, TypeSourceInfo *> IntegerType; |
3599 | |
3600 | /// The integer type that values of this type should |
3601 | /// promote to. In C, enumerators are generally of an integer type |
3602 | /// directly, but gcc-style large enumerators (and all enumerators |
3603 | /// in C++) are of the enum type instead. |
3604 | QualType PromotionType; |
3605 | |
3606 | /// If this enumeration is an instantiation of a member enumeration |
3607 | /// of a class template specialization, this is the member specialization |
3608 | /// information. |
3609 | MemberSpecializationInfo *SpecializationInfo = nullptr; |
3610 | |
3611 | /// Store the ODRHash after first calculation. |
3612 | /// The corresponding flag HasODRHash is in EnumDeclBits |
3613 | /// and can be accessed with the provided accessors. |
3614 | unsigned ODRHash; |
3615 | |
3616 | EnumDecl(ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, SourceLocation StartLoc, |
3617 | SourceLocation IdLoc, IdentifierInfo *Id, EnumDecl *PrevDecl, |
3618 | bool Scoped, bool ScopedUsingClassTag, bool Fixed); |
3619 | |
3620 | void anchor() override; |
3621 | |
3622 | void setInstantiationOfMemberEnum(ASTContext &C, EnumDecl *ED, |
3623 | TemplateSpecializationKind TSK); |
3624 | |
3625 | /// Sets the width in bits required to store all the |
3626 | /// non-negative enumerators of this enum. |
3627 | void setNumPositiveBits(unsigned Num) { |
3628 | EnumDeclBits.NumPositiveBits = Num; |
3629 | assert(EnumDeclBits.NumPositiveBits == Num && "can't store this bitcount")((void)0); |
3630 | } |
3631 | |
3632 | /// Returns the width in bits required to store all the |
3633 | /// negative enumerators of this enum. (see getNumNegativeBits) |
3634 | void setNumNegativeBits(unsigned Num) { EnumDeclBits.NumNegativeBits = Num; } |
3635 | |
3636 | public: |
3637 | /// True if this tag declaration is a scoped enumeration. Only |
3638 | /// possible in C++11 mode. |
3639 | void setScoped(bool Scoped = true) { EnumDeclBits.IsScoped = Scoped; } |
3640 | |
3641 | /// If this tag declaration is a scoped enum, |
3642 | /// then this is true if the scoped enum was declared using the class |
3643 | /// tag, false if it was declared with the struct tag. No meaning is |
3644 | /// associated if this tag declaration is not a scoped enum. |
3645 | void setScopedUsingClassTag(bool ScopedUCT = true) { |
3646 | EnumDeclBits.IsScopedUsingClassTag = ScopedUCT; |
3647 | } |
3648 | |
3649 | /// True if this is an Objective-C, C++11, or |
3650 | /// Microsoft-style enumeration with a fixed underlying type. |
3651 | void setFixed(bool Fixed = true) { EnumDeclBits.IsFixed = Fixed; } |
3652 | |
3653 | private: |
3654 | /// True if a valid hash is stored in ODRHash. |
3655 | bool hasODRHash() const { return EnumDeclBits.HasODRHash; } |
3656 | void setHasODRHash(bool Hash = true) { EnumDeclBits.HasODRHash = Hash; } |
3657 | |
3658 | public: |
3659 | friend class ASTDeclReader; |
3660 | |
3661 | EnumDecl *getCanonicalDecl() override { |
3662 | return cast<EnumDecl>(TagDecl::getCanonicalDecl()); |
3663 | } |
3664 | const EnumDecl *getCanonicalDecl() const { |
3665 | return const_cast<EnumDecl*>(this)->getCanonicalDecl(); |
3666 | } |
3667 | |
3668 | EnumDecl *getPreviousDecl() { |
3669 | return cast_or_null<EnumDecl>( |
3670 | static_cast<TagDecl *>(this)->getPreviousDecl()); |
3671 | } |
3672 | const EnumDecl *getPreviousDecl() const { |
3673 | return const_cast<EnumDecl*>(this)->getPreviousDecl(); |
3674 | } |
3675 | |
3676 | EnumDecl *getMostRecentDecl() { |
3677 | return cast<EnumDecl>(static_cast<TagDecl *>(this)->getMostRecentDecl()); |
3678 | } |
3679 | const EnumDecl *getMostRecentDecl() const { |
3680 | return const_cast<EnumDecl*>(this)->getMostRecentDecl(); |
3681 | } |
3682 | |
3683 | EnumDecl *getDefinition() const { |
3684 | return cast_or_null<EnumDecl>(TagDecl::getDefinition()); |
3685 | } |
3686 | |
3687 | static EnumDecl *Create(ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, |
3688 | SourceLocation StartLoc, SourceLocation IdLoc, |
3689 | IdentifierInfo *Id, EnumDecl *PrevDecl, |
3690 | bool IsScoped, bool IsScopedUsingClassTag, |
3691 | bool IsFixed); |
3692 | static EnumDecl *CreateDeserialized(ASTContext &C, unsigned ID); |
3693 | |
3694 | /// When created, the EnumDecl corresponds to a |
3695 | /// forward-declared enum. This method is used to mark the |
3696 | /// declaration as being defined; its enumerators have already been |
3697 | /// added (via DeclContext::addDecl). NewType is the new underlying |
3698 | /// type of the enumeration type. |
3699 | void completeDefinition(QualType NewType, |
3700 | QualType PromotionType, |
3701 | unsigned NumPositiveBits, |
3702 | unsigned NumNegativeBits); |
3703 | |
3704 | // Iterates through the enumerators of this enumeration. |
3705 | using enumerator_iterator = specific_decl_iterator<EnumConstantDecl>; |
3706 | using enumerator_range = |
3707 | llvm::iterator_range<specific_decl_iterator<EnumConstantDecl>>; |
3708 | |
3709 | enumerator_range enumerators() const { |
3710 | return enumerator_range(enumerator_begin(), enumerator_end()); |
3711 | } |
3712 | |
3713 | enumerator_iterator enumerator_begin() const { |
3714 | const EnumDecl *E = getDefinition(); |
3715 | if (!E) |
3716 | E = this; |
3717 | return enumerator_iterator(E->decls_begin()); |
3718 | } |
3719 | |
3720 | enumerator_iterator enumerator_end() const { |
3721 | const EnumDecl *E = getDefinition(); |
3722 | if (!E) |
3723 | E = this; |
3724 | return enumerator_iterator(E->decls_end()); |
3725 | } |
3726 | |
3727 | /// Return the integer type that enumerators should promote to. |
3728 | QualType getPromotionType() const { return PromotionType; } |
3729 | |
3730 | /// Set the promotion type. |
3731 | void setPromotionType(QualType T) { PromotionType = T; } |
3732 | |
3733 | /// Return the integer type this enum decl corresponds to. |
3734 | /// This returns a null QualType for an enum forward definition with no fixed |
3735 | /// underlying type. |
3736 | QualType getIntegerType() const { |
3737 | if (!IntegerType) |
3738 | return QualType(); |
3739 | if (const Type *T = IntegerType.dyn_cast<const Type*>()) |
3740 | return QualType(T, 0); |
3741 | return IntegerType.get<TypeSourceInfo*>()->getType().getUnqualifiedType(); |
3742 | } |
3743 | |
3744 | /// Set the underlying integer type. |
3745 | void setIntegerType(QualType T) { IntegerType = T.getTypePtrOrNull(); } |
3746 | |
3747 | /// Set the underlying integer type source info. |
3748 | void setIntegerTypeSourceInfo(TypeSourceInfo *TInfo) { IntegerType = TInfo; } |
3749 | |
3750 | /// Return the type source info for the underlying integer type, |
3751 | /// if no type source info exists, return 0. |
3752 | TypeSourceInfo *getIntegerTypeSourceInfo() const { |
3753 | return IntegerType.dyn_cast<TypeSourceInfo*>(); |
3754 | } |
3755 | |
3756 | /// Retrieve the source range that covers the underlying type if |
3757 | /// specified. |
3758 | SourceRange getIntegerTypeRange() const LLVM_READONLY__attribute__((__pure__)); |
3759 | |
3760 | /// Returns the width in bits required to store all the |
3761 | /// non-negative enumerators of this enum. |
3762 | unsigned getNumPositiveBits() const { return EnumDeclBits.NumPositiveBits; } |
3763 | |
3764 | /// Returns the width in bits required to store all the |
3765 | /// negative enumerators of this enum. These widths include |
3766 | /// the rightmost leading 1; that is: |
3767 | /// |
3768 | /// MOST NEGATIVE ENUMERATOR PATTERN NUM NEGATIVE BITS |
3769 | /// ------------------------ ------- ----------------- |
3770 | /// -1 1111111 1 |
3771 | /// -10 1110110 5 |
3772 | /// -101 1001011 8 |
3773 | unsigned getNumNegativeBits() const { return EnumDeclBits.NumNegativeBits; } |
3774 | |
3775 | /// Returns true if this is a C++11 scoped enumeration. |
3776 | bool isScoped() const { return EnumDeclBits.IsScoped; } |
3777 | |
3778 | /// Returns true if this is a C++11 scoped enumeration. |
3779 | bool isScopedUsingClassTag() const { |
3780 | return EnumDeclBits.IsScopedUsingClassTag; |
3781 | } |
3782 | |
3783 | /// Returns true if this is an Objective-C, C++11, or |
3784 | /// Microsoft-style enumeration with a fixed underlying type. |
3785 | bool isFixed() const { return EnumDeclBits.IsFixed; } |
3786 | |
3787 | unsigned getODRHash(); |
3788 | |
3789 | /// Returns true if this can be considered a complete type. |
3790 | bool isComplete() const { |
3791 | // IntegerType is set for fixed type enums and non-fixed but implicitly |
3792 | // int-sized Microsoft enums. |
3793 | return isCompleteDefinition() || IntegerType; |
3794 | } |
3795 | |
3796 | /// Returns true if this enum is either annotated with |
3797 | /// enum_extensibility(closed) or isn't annotated with enum_extensibility. |
3798 | bool isClosed() const; |
3799 | |
3800 | /// Returns true if this enum is annotated with flag_enum and isn't annotated |
3801 | /// with enum_extensibility(open). |
3802 | bool isClosedFlag() const; |
3803 | |
3804 | /// Returns true if this enum is annotated with neither flag_enum nor |
3805 | /// enum_extensibility(open). |
3806 | bool isClosedNonFlag() const; |
3807 | |
3808 | /// Retrieve the enum definition from which this enumeration could |
3809 | /// be instantiated, if it is an instantiation (rather than a non-template). |
3810 | EnumDecl *getTemplateInstantiationPattern() const; |
3811 | |
3812 | /// Returns the enumeration (declared within the template) |
3813 | /// from which this enumeration type was instantiated, or NULL if |
3814 | /// this enumeration was not instantiated from any template. |
3815 | EnumDecl *getInstantiatedFromMemberEnum() const; |
3816 | |
3817 | /// If this enumeration is a member of a specialization of a |
3818 | /// templated class, determine what kind of template specialization |
3819 | /// or instantiation this is. |
3820 | TemplateSpecializationKind getTemplateSpecializationKind() const; |
3821 | |
3822 | /// For an enumeration member that was instantiated from a member |
3823 | /// enumeration of a templated class, set the template specialiation kind. |
3824 | void setTemplateSpecializationKind(TemplateSpecializationKind TSK, |
3825 | SourceLocation PointOfInstantiation = SourceLocation()); |
3826 | |
3827 | /// If this enumeration is an instantiation of a member enumeration of |
3828 | /// a class template specialization, retrieves the member specialization |
3829 | /// information. |
3830 | MemberSpecializationInfo *getMemberSpecializationInfo() const { |
3831 | return SpecializationInfo; |
3832 | } |
3833 | |
3834 | /// Specify that this enumeration is an instantiation of the |
3835 | /// member enumeration ED. |
3836 | void setInstantiationOfMemberEnum(EnumDecl *ED, |
3837 | TemplateSpecializationKind TSK) { |
3838 | setInstantiationOfMemberEnum(getASTContext(), ED, TSK); |
3839 | } |
3840 | |
3841 | static bool classof(const Decl *D) { return classofKind(D->getKind()); } |
3842 | static bool classofKind(Kind K) { return K == Enum; } |
3843 | }; |
3844 | |
3845 | /// Represents a struct/union/class. For example: |
3846 | /// struct X; // Forward declaration, no "body". |
3847 | /// union Y { int A, B; }; // Has body with members A and B (FieldDecls). |
3848 | /// This decl will be marked invalid if *any* members are invalid. |
3849 | class RecordDecl : public TagDecl { |
3850 | // This class stores some data in DeclContext::RecordDeclBits |
3851 | // to save some space. Use the provided accessors to access it. |
3852 | public: |
3853 | friend class DeclContext; |
3854 | /// Enum that represents the different ways arguments are passed to and |
3855 | /// returned from function calls. This takes into account the target-specific |
3856 | /// and version-specific rules along with the rules determined by the |
3857 | /// language. |
3858 | enum ArgPassingKind : unsigned { |
3859 | /// The argument of this type can be passed directly in registers. |
3860 | APK_CanPassInRegs, |
3861 | |
3862 | /// The argument of this type cannot be passed directly in registers. |
3863 | /// Records containing this type as a subobject are not forced to be passed |
3864 | /// indirectly. This value is used only in C++. This value is required by |
3865 | /// C++ because, in uncommon situations, it is possible for a class to have |
3866 | /// only trivial copy/move constructors even when one of its subobjects has |
3867 | /// a non-trivial copy/move constructor (if e.g. the corresponding copy/move |
3868 | /// constructor in the derived class is deleted). |
3869 | APK_CannotPassInRegs, |
3870 | |
3871 | /// The argument of this type cannot be passed directly in registers. |
3872 | /// Records containing this type as a subobject are forced to be passed |
3873 | /// indirectly. |
3874 | APK_CanNeverPassInRegs |
3875 | }; |
3876 | |
3877 | protected: |
3878 | RecordDecl(Kind DK, TagKind TK, const ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, |
3879 | SourceLocation StartLoc, SourceLocation IdLoc, |
3880 | IdentifierInfo *Id, RecordDecl *PrevDecl); |
3881 | |
3882 | public: |
3883 | static RecordDecl *Create(const ASTContext &C, TagKind TK, DeclContext *DC, |
3884 | SourceLocation StartLoc, SourceLocation IdLoc, |
3885 | IdentifierInfo *Id, RecordDecl* PrevDecl = nullptr); |
3886 | static RecordDecl *CreateDeserialized(const ASTContext &C, unsigned ID); |
3887 | |
3888 | RecordDecl *getPreviousDecl() { |
3889 | return cast_or_null<RecordDecl>( |
3890 | static_cast<TagDecl *>(this)->getPreviousDecl()); |
3891 | } |
3892 | const RecordDecl *getPreviousDecl() const { |
3893 | return const_cast<RecordDecl*>(this)->getPreviousDecl(); |
3894 | } |
3895 | |
3896 | RecordDecl *getMostRecentDecl() { |
3897 | return cast<RecordDecl>(static_cast<TagDecl *>(this)->getMostRecentDecl()); |
3898 | } |
3899 | const RecordDecl *getMostRecentDecl() const { |
3900 | return const_cast<RecordDecl*>(this)->getMostRecentDecl(); |
3901 | } |
3902 | |
3903 | bool hasFlexibleArrayMember() const { |
3904 | return RecordDeclBits.HasFlexibleArrayMember; |
3905 | } |
3906 | |
3907 | void setHasFlexibleArrayMember(bool V) { |
3908 | RecordDeclBits.HasFlexibleArrayMember = V; |
3909 | } |
3910 | |
3911 | /// Whether this is an anonymous struct or union. To be an anonymous |
3912 | /// struct or union, it must have been declared without a name and |
3913 | /// there must be no objects of this type declared, e.g., |
3914 | /// @code |
3915 | /// union { int i; float f; }; |
3916 | /// @endcode |
3917 | /// is an anonymous union but neither of the following are: |
3918 | /// @code |
3919 | /// union X { int i; float f; }; |
3920 | /// union { int i; float f; } obj; |
3921 | /// @endcode |
3922 | bool isAnonymousStructOrUnion() const { |
3923 | return RecordDeclBits.AnonymousStructOrUnion; |
3924 | } |
3925 | |
3926 | void setAnonymousStructOrUnion(bool Anon) { |
3927 | RecordDeclBits.AnonymousStructOrUnion = Anon; |
3928 | } |
3929 | |
3930 | bool hasObjectMember() const { return RecordDeclBits.HasObjectMember; } |
3931 | void setHasObjectMember(bool val) { RecordDeclBits.HasObjectMember = val; } |
3932 | |
3933 | bool hasVolatileMember() const { return RecordDeclBits.HasVolatileMember; } |
3934 | |
3935 | void setHasVolatileMember(bool val) { |
3936 | RecordDeclBits.HasVolatileMember = val; |
3937 | } |
3938 | |
3939 | bool hasLoadedFieldsFromExternalStorage() const { |
3940 | return RecordDeclBits.LoadedFieldsFromExternalStorage; |
3941 | } |
3942 | |
3943 | void setHasLoadedFieldsFromExternalStorage(bool val) const { |
3944 | RecordDeclBits.LoadedFieldsFromExternalStorage = val; |
3945 | } |
3946 | |
3947 | /// Functions to query basic properties of non-trivial C structs. |
3948 | bool isNonTrivialToPrimitiveDefaultInitialize() const { |
3949 | return RecordDeclBits.NonTrivialToPrimitiveDefaultInitialize; |
3950 | } |
3951 | |
3952 | void setNonTrivialToPrimitiveDefaultInitialize(bool V) { |
3953 | RecordDeclBits.NonTrivialToPrimitiveDefaultInitialize = V; |
3954 | } |
3955 | |
3956 | bool isNonTrivialToPrimitiveCopy() const { |
3957 | return RecordDeclBits.NonTrivialToPrimitiveCopy; |
3958 | } |
3959 | |
3960 | void setNonTrivialToPrimitiveCopy(bool V) { |
3961 | RecordDeclBits.NonTrivialToPrimitiveCopy = V; |
3962 | } |
3963 | |
3964 | bool isNonTrivialToPrimitiveDestroy() const { |
3965 | return RecordDeclBits.NonTrivialToPrimitiveDestroy; |
3966 | } |
3967 | |
3968 | void setNonTrivialToPrimitiveDestroy(bool V) { |
3969 | RecordDeclBits.NonTrivialToPrimitiveDestroy = V; |
3970 | } |
3971 | |
3972 | bool hasNonTrivialToPrimitiveDefaultInitializeCUnion() const { |
3973 | return RecordDeclBits.HasNonTrivialToPrimitiveDefaultInitializeCUnion; |
3974 | } |
3975 | |
3976 | void setHasNonTrivialToPrimitiveDefaultInitializeCUnion(bool V) { |
3977 | RecordDeclBits.HasNonTrivialToPrimitiveDefaultInitializeCUnion = V; |
3978 | } |
3979 | |
3980 | bool hasNonTrivialToPrimitiveDestructCUnion() const { |
3981 | return RecordDeclBits.HasNonTrivialToPrimitiveDestructCUnion; |
3982 | } |
3983 | |
3984 | void setHasNonTrivialToPrimitiveDestructCUnion(bool V) { |
3985 | RecordDeclBits.HasNonTrivialToPrimitiveDestructCUnion = V; |
3986 | } |
3987 | |
3988 | bool hasNonTrivialToPrimitiveCopyCUnion() const { |
3989 | return RecordDeclBits.HasNonTrivialToPrimitiveCopyCUnion; |
3990 | } |
3991 | |
3992 | void setHasNonTrivialToPrimitiveCopyCUnion(bool V) { |
3993 | RecordDeclBits.HasNonTrivialToPrimitiveCopyCUnion = V; |
3994 | } |
3995 | |
3996 | /// Determine whether this class can be passed in registers. In C++ mode, |
3997 | /// it must have at least one trivial, non-deleted copy or move constructor. |
3998 | /// FIXME: This should be set as part of completeDefinition. |
3999 | bool canPassInRegisters() const { |
4000 | return getArgPassingRestrictions() == APK_CanPassInRegs; |
4001 | } |
4002 | |
4003 | ArgPassingKind getArgPassingRestrictions() const { |
4004 | return static_cast<ArgPassingKind>(RecordDeclBits.ArgPassingRestrictions); |
4005 | } |
4006 | |
4007 | void setArgPassingRestrictions(ArgPassingKind Kind) { |
4008 | RecordDeclBits.ArgPassingRestrictions = Kind; |
4009 | } |
4010 | |
4011 | bool isParamDestroyedInCallee() const { |
4012 | return RecordDeclBits.ParamDestroyedInCallee; |
4013 | } |
4014 | |
4015 | void setParamDestroyedInCallee(bool V) { |
4016 | RecordDeclBits.ParamDestroyedInCallee = V; |
4017 | } |
4018 | |
4019 | /// Determines whether this declaration represents the |
4020 | /// injected class name. |
4021 | /// |
4022 | /// The injected class name in C++ is the name of the class that |
4023 | /// appears inside the class itself. For example: |
4024 | /// |
4025 | /// \code |
4026 | /// struct C { |
4027 | /// // C is implicitly declared here as a synonym for the class name. |
4028 | /// }; |
4029 | /// |
4030 | /// C::C c; // same as "C c;" |
4031 | /// \endcode |
4032 | bool isInjectedClassName() const; |
4033 | |
4034 | /// Determine whether this record is a class describing a lambda |
4035 | /// function object. |
4036 | bool isLambda() const; |
4037 | |
4038 | /// Determine whether this record is a record for captured variables in |
4039 | /// CapturedStmt construct. |
4040 | bool isCapturedRecord() const; |
4041 | |
4042 | /// Mark the record as a record for captured variables in CapturedStmt |
4043 | /// construct. |
4044 | void setCapturedRecord(); |
4045 | |
4046 | /// Returns the RecordDecl that actually defines |
4047 | /// this struct/union/class. When determining whether or not a |
4048 | /// struct/union/class is completely defined, one should use this |
4049 | /// method as opposed to 'isCompleteDefinition'. |
4050 | /// 'isCompleteDefinition' indicates whether or not a specific |
4051 | /// RecordDecl is a completed definition, not whether or not the |
4052 | /// record type is defined. This method returns NULL if there is |
4053 | /// no RecordDecl that defines the struct/union/tag. |
4054 | RecordDecl *getDefinition() const { |
4055 | return cast_or_null<RecordDecl>(TagDecl::getDefinition()); |
4056 | } |
4057 | |
4058 | /// Returns whether this record is a union, or contains (at any nesting level) |
4059 | /// a union member. This is used by CMSE to warn about possible information |
4060 | /// leaks. |
4061 | bool isOrContainsUnion() const; |
4062 | |
4063 | // Iterator access to field members. The field iterator only visits |
4064 | // the non-static data members of this class, ignoring any static |
4065 | // data members, functions, constructors, destructors, etc. |
4066 | using field_iterator = specific_decl_iterator<FieldDecl>; |
4067 | using field_range = llvm::iterator_range<specific_decl_iterator<FieldDecl>>; |
4068 | |
4069 | field_range fields() const { return field_range(field_begin(), field_end()); } |
4070 | field_iterator field_begin() const; |
4071 | |
4072 | field_iterator field_end() const { |
4073 | return field_iterator(decl_iterator()); |
4074 | } |
4075 | |
4076 | // Whether there are any fields (non-static data members) in this record. |
4077 | bool field_empty() const { |
4078 | return field_begin() == field_end(); |
4079 | } |
4080 | |
4081 | /// Note that the definition of this type is now complete. |
4082 | virtual void completeDefinition(); |
4083 | |
4084 | static bool classof(const Decl *D) { return classofKind(D->getKind()); } |
4085 | static bool classofKind(Kind K) { |
4086 | return K >= firstRecord && K <= lastRecord; |
4087 | } |
4088 | |
4089 | /// Get whether or not this is an ms_struct which can |
4090 | /// be turned on with an attribute, pragma, or -mms-bitfields |
4091 | /// commandline option. |
4092 | bool isMsStruct(const ASTContext &C) const; |
4093 | |
4094 | /// Whether we are allowed to insert extra padding between fields. |
4095 | /// These padding are added to help AddressSanitizer detect |
4096 | /// intra-object-overflow bugs. |
4097 | bool mayInsertExtraPadding(bool EmitRemark = false) const; |
4098 | |
4099 | /// Finds the first data member which has a name. |
4100 | /// nullptr is returned if no named data member exists. |
4101 | const FieldDecl *findFirstNamedDataMember() const; |
4102 | |
4103 | private: |
4104 | /// Deserialize just the fields. |
4105 | void LoadFieldsFromExternalStorage() const; |
4106 | }; |
4107 | |
4108 | class FileScopeAsmDecl : public Decl { |
4109 | StringLiteral *AsmString; |
4110 | SourceLocation RParenLoc; |
4111 | |
4112 | FileScopeAsmDecl(DeclContext *DC, StringLiteral *asmstring, |
4113 | SourceLocation StartL, SourceLocation EndL) |
4114 | : Decl(FileScopeAsm, DC, StartL), AsmString(asmstring), RParenLoc(EndL) {} |
4115 | |
4116 | virtual void anchor(); |
4117 | |
4118 | public: |
4119 | static FileScopeAsmDecl *Create(ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, |
4120 | StringLiteral *Str, SourceLocation AsmLoc, |
4121 | SourceLocation RParenLoc); |
4122 | |
4123 | static FileScopeAsmDecl *CreateDeserialized(ASTContext &C, unsigned ID); |
4124 | |
4125 | SourceLocation getAsmLoc() const { return getLocation(); } |
4126 | SourceLocation getRParenLoc() const { return RParenLoc; } |
4127 | void setRParenLoc(SourceLocation L) { RParenLoc = L; } |
4128 | SourceRange getSourceRange() const override LLVM_READONLY__attribute__((__pure__)) { |
4129 | return SourceRange(getAsmLoc(), getRParenLoc()); |
4130 | } |
4131 | |
4132 | const StringLiteral *getAsmString() const { return AsmString; } |
4133 | StringLiteral *getAsmString() { return AsmString; } |
4134 | void setAsmString(StringLiteral *Asm) { AsmString = Asm; } |
4135 | |
4136 | static bool classof(const Decl *D) { return classofKind(D->getKind()); } |
4137 | static bool classofKind(Kind K) { return K == FileScopeAsm; } |
4138 | }; |
4139 | |
4140 | /// Represents a block literal declaration, which is like an |
4141 | /// unnamed FunctionDecl. For example: |
4142 | /// ^{ statement-body } or ^(int arg1, float arg2){ statement-body } |
4143 | class BlockDecl : public Decl, public DeclContext { |
4144 | // This class stores some data in DeclContext::BlockDeclBits |
4145 | // to save some space. Use the provided accessors to access it. |
4146 | public: |
4147 | /// A class which contains all the information about a particular |
4148 | /// captured value. |
4149 | class Capture { |
4150 | enum { |
4151 | flag_isByRef = 0x1, |
4152 | flag_isNested = 0x2 |
4153 | }; |
4154 | |
4155 | /// The variable being captured. |
4156 | llvm::PointerIntPair<VarDecl*, 2> VariableAndFlags; |
4157 | |
4158 | /// The copy expression, expressed in terms of a DeclRef (or |
4159 | /// BlockDeclRef) to the captured variable. Only required if the |
4160 | /// variable has a C++ class type. |
4161 | Expr *CopyExpr; |
4162 | |
4163 | public: |
4164 | Capture(VarDecl *variable, bool byRef, bool nested, Expr *copy) |
4165 | : VariableAndFlags(variable, |
4166 | (byRef ? flag_isByRef : 0) | (nested ? flag_isNested : 0)), |
4167 | CopyExpr(copy) {} |
4168 | |
4169 | /// The variable being captured. |
4170 | VarDecl *getVariable() const { return VariableAndFlags.getPointer(); } |
4171 | |
4172 | /// Whether this is a "by ref" capture, i.e. a capture of a __block |
4173 | /// variable. |
4174 | bool isByRef() const { return VariableAndFlags.getInt() & flag_isByRef; } |
4175 | |
4176 | bool isEscapingByref() const { |
4177 | return getVariable()->isEscapingByref(); |
4178 | } |
4179 | |
4180 | bool isNonEscapingByref() const { |
4181 | return getVariable()->isNonEscapingByref(); |
4182 | } |
4183 | |
4184 | /// Whether this is a nested capture, i.e. the variable captured |
4185 | /// is not from outside the immediately enclosing function/block. |
4186 | bool isNested() const { return VariableAndFlags.getInt() & flag_isNested; } |
4187 | |
4188 | bool hasCopyExpr() const { return CopyExpr != nullptr; } |
4189 | Expr *getCopyExpr() const { return CopyExpr; } |
4190 | void setCopyExpr(Expr *e) { CopyExpr = e; } |
4191 | }; |
4192 | |
4193 | private: |
4194 | /// A new[]'d array of pointers to ParmVarDecls for the formal |
4195 | /// parameters of this function. This is null if a prototype or if there are |
4196 | /// no formals. |
4197 | ParmVarDecl **ParamInfo = nullptr; |
4198 | unsigned NumParams = 0; |
4199 | |
4200 | Stmt *Body = nullptr; |
4201 | TypeSourceInfo *SignatureAsWritten = nullptr; |
4202 | |
4203 | const Capture *Captures = nullptr; |
4204 | unsigned NumCaptures = 0; |
4205 | |
4206 | unsigned ManglingNumber = 0; |
4207 | Decl *ManglingContextDecl = nullptr; |
4208 | |
4209 | protected: |
4210 | BlockDecl(DeclContext *DC, SourceLocation CaretLoc); |
4211 | |
4212 | public: |
4213 | static BlockDecl *Create(ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, SourceLocation L); |
4214 | static BlockDecl *CreateDeserialized(ASTContext &C, unsigned ID); |
4215 | |
4216 | SourceLocation getCaretLocation() const { return getLocation(); } |
4217 | |
4218 | bool isVariadic() const { return BlockDeclBits.IsVariadic; } |
4219 | void setIsVariadic(bool value) { BlockDeclBits.IsVariadic = value; } |
4220 | |
4221 | CompoundStmt *getCompoundBody() const { return (CompoundStmt*) Body; } |
4222 | Stmt *getBody() const override { return (Stmt*) Body; } |
4223 | void setBody(CompoundStmt *B) { Body = (Stmt*) B; } |
4224 | |
4225 | void setSignatureAsWritten(TypeSourceInfo *Sig) { SignatureAsWritten = Sig; } |
4226 | TypeSourceInfo *getSignatureAsWritten() const { return SignatureAsWritten; } |
4227 | |
4228 | // ArrayRef access to formal parameters. |
4229 | ArrayRef<ParmVarDecl *> parameters() const { |
4230 | return {ParamInfo, getNumParams()}; |
4231 | } |
4232 | MutableArrayRef<ParmVarDecl *> parameters() { |
4233 | return {ParamInfo, getNumParams()}; |
4234 | } |
4235 | |
4236 | // Iterator access to formal parameters. |
4237 | using param_iterator = MutableArrayRef<ParmVarDecl *>::iterator; |
4238 | using param_const_iterator = ArrayRef<ParmVarDecl *>::const_iterator; |
4239 | |
4240 | bool param_empty() const { return parameters().empty(); } |
4241 | param_iterator param_begin() { return parameters().begin(); } |
4242 | param_iterator param_end() { return parameters().end(); } |
4243 | param_const_iterator param_begin() const { return parameters().begin(); } |
4244 | param_const_iterator param_end() const { return parameters().end(); } |
4245 | size_t param_size() const { return parameters().size(); } |
4246 | |
4247 | unsigned getNumParams() const { return NumParams; } |
4248 | |
4249 | const ParmVarDecl *getParamDecl(unsigned i) const { |
4250 | assert(i < getNumParams() && "Illegal param #")((void)0); |
4251 | return ParamInfo[i]; |
4252 | } |
4253 | ParmVarDecl *getParamDecl(unsigned i) { |
4254 | assert(i < getNumParams() && "Illegal param #")((void)0); |
4255 | return ParamInfo[i]; |
4256 | } |
4257 | |
4258 | void setParams(ArrayRef<ParmVarDecl *> NewParamInfo); |
4259 | |
4260 | /// True if this block (or its nested blocks) captures |
4261 | /// anything of local storage from its enclosing scopes. |
4262 | bool hasCaptures() const { return NumCaptures || capturesCXXThis(); } |
4263 | |
4264 | /// Returns the number of captured variables. |
4265 | /// Does not include an entry for 'this'. |
4266 | unsigned getNumCaptures() const { return NumCaptures; } |
4267 | |
4268 | using capture_const_iterator = ArrayRef<Capture>::const_iterator; |
4269 | |
4270 | ArrayRef<Capture> captures() const { return {Captures, NumCaptures}; } |
4271 | |
4272 | capture_const_iterator capture_begin() const { return captures().begin(); } |
4273 | capture_const_iterator capture_end() const { return captures().end(); } |
4274 | |
4275 | bool capturesCXXThis() const { return BlockDeclBits.CapturesCXXThis; } |
4276 | void setCapturesCXXThis(bool B = true) { BlockDeclBits.CapturesCXXThis = B; } |
4277 | |
4278 | bool blockMissingReturnType() const { |
4279 | return BlockDeclBits.BlockMissingReturnType; |
4280 | } |
4281 | |
4282 | void setBlockMissingReturnType(bool val = true) { |
4283 | BlockDeclBits.BlockMissingReturnType = val; |
4284 | } |
4285 | |
4286 | bool isConversionFromLambda() const { |
4287 | return BlockDeclBits.IsConversionFromLambda; |
4288 | } |
4289 | |
4290 | void setIsConversionFromLambda(bool val = true) { |
4291 | BlockDeclBits.IsConversionFromLambda = val; |
4292 | } |
4293 | |
4294 | bool doesNotEscape() const { return BlockDeclBits.DoesNotEscape; } |
4295 | void setDoesNotEscape(bool B = true) { BlockDeclBits.DoesNotEscape = B; } |
4296 | |
4297 | bool canAvoidCopyToHeap() const { |
4298 | return BlockDeclBits.CanAvoidCopyToHeap; |
4299 | } |
4300 | void setCanAvoidCopyToHeap(bool B = true) { |
4301 | BlockDeclBits.CanAvoidCopyToHeap = B; |
4302 | } |
4303 | |
4304 | bool capturesVariable(const VarDecl *var) const; |
4305 | |
4306 | void setCaptures(ASTContext &Context, ArrayRef<Capture> Captures, |
4307 | bool CapturesCXXThis); |
4308 | |
4309 | unsigned getBlockManglingNumber() const { return ManglingNumber; } |
4310 | |
4311 | Decl *getBlockManglingContextDecl() const { return ManglingContextDecl; } |
4312 | |
4313 | void setBlockMangling(unsigned Number, Decl *Ctx) { |
4314 | ManglingNumber = Number; |
4315 | ManglingContextDecl = Ctx; |
4316 | } |
4317 | |
4318 | SourceRange getSourceRange() const override LLVM_READONLY__attribute__((__pure__)); |
4319 | |
4320 | // Implement isa/cast/dyncast/etc. |
4321 | static bool classof(const Decl *D) { return classofKind(D->getKind()); } |
4322 | static bool classofKind(Kind K) { return K == Block; } |
4323 | static DeclContext *castToDeclContext(const BlockDecl *D) { |
4324 | return static_cast<DeclContext *>(const_cast<BlockDecl*>(D)); |
4325 | } |
4326 | static BlockDecl *castFromDeclContext(const DeclContext *DC) { |
4327 | return static_cast<BlockDecl *>(const_cast<DeclContext*>(DC)); |
4328 | } |
4329 | }; |
4330 | |
4331 | /// Represents the body of a CapturedStmt, and serves as its DeclContext. |
4332 | class CapturedDecl final |
4333 | : public Decl, |
4334 | public DeclContext, |
4335 | private llvm::TrailingObjects<CapturedDecl, ImplicitParamDecl *> { |
4336 | protected: |
4337 | size_t numTrailingObjects(OverloadToken<ImplicitParamDecl>) { |
4338 | return NumParams; |
4339 | } |
4340 | |
4341 | private: |
4342 | /// The number of parameters to the outlined function. |
4343 | unsigned NumParams; |
4344 | |
4345 | /// The position of context parameter in list of parameters. |
4346 | unsigned ContextParam; |
4347 | |
4348 | /// The body of the outlined function. |
4349 | llvm::PointerIntPair<Stmt *, 1, bool> BodyAndNothrow; |
4350 | |
4351 | explicit CapturedDecl(DeclContext *DC, unsigned NumParams); |
4352 | |
4353 | ImplicitParamDecl *const *getParams() const { |
4354 | return getTrailingObjects<ImplicitParamDecl *>(); |
4355 | } |
4356 | |
4357 | ImplicitParamDecl **getParams() { |
4358 | return getTrailingObjects<ImplicitParamDecl *>(); |
4359 | } |
4360 | |
4361 | public: |
4362 | friend class ASTDeclReader; |
4363 | friend class ASTDeclWriter; |
4364 | friend TrailingObjects; |
4365 | |
4366 | static CapturedDecl *Create(ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, |
4367 | unsigned NumParams); |
4368 | static CapturedDecl *CreateDeserialized(ASTContext &C, unsigned ID, |
4369 | unsigned NumParams); |
4370 | |
4371 | Stmt *getBody() const override; |
4372 | void setBody(Stmt *B); |
4373 | |
4374 | bool isNothrow() const; |
4375 | void setNothrow(bool Nothrow = true); |
4376 | |
4377 | unsigned getNumParams() const { return NumParams; } |
4378 | |
4379 | ImplicitParamDecl *getParam(unsigned i) const { |
4380 | assert(i < NumParams)((void)0); |
4381 | return getParams()[i]; |
4382 | } |
4383 | void setParam(unsigned i, ImplicitParamDecl *P) { |
4384 | assert(i < NumParams)((void)0); |
4385 | getParams()[i] = P; |
4386 | } |
4387 | |
4388 | // ArrayRef interface to parameters. |
4389 | ArrayRef<ImplicitParamDecl *> parameters() const { |
4390 | return {getParams(), getNumParams()}; |
4391 | } |
4392 | MutableArrayRef<ImplicitParamDecl *> parameters() { |
4393 | return {getParams(), getNumParams()}; |
4394 | } |
4395 | |
4396 | /// Retrieve the parameter containing captured variables. |
4397 | ImplicitParamDecl *getContextParam() const { |
4398 | assert(ContextParam < NumParams)((void)0); |
4399 | return getParam(ContextParam); |
4400 | } |
4401 | void setContextParam(unsigned i, ImplicitParamDecl *P) { |
4402 | assert(i < NumParams)((void)0); |
4403 | ContextParam = i; |
4404 | setParam(i, P); |
4405 | } |
4406 | unsigned getContextParamPosition() const { return ContextParam; } |
4407 | |
4408 | using param_iterator = ImplicitParamDecl *const *; |
4409 | using param_range = llvm::iterator_range<param_iterator>; |
4410 | |
4411 | /// Retrieve an iterator pointing to the first parameter decl. |
4412 | param_iterator param_begin() const { return getParams(); } |
4413 | /// Retrieve an iterator one past the last parameter decl. |
4414 | param_iterator param_end() const { return getParams() + NumParams; } |
4415 | |
4416 | // Implement isa/cast/dyncast/etc. |
4417 | static bool classof(const Decl *D) { return classofKind(D->getKind()); } |
4418 | static bool classofKind(Kind K) { return K == Captured; } |
4419 | static DeclContext *castToDeclContext(const CapturedDecl *D) { |
4420 | return static_cast<DeclContext *>(const_cast<CapturedDecl *>(D)); |
4421 | } |
4422 | static CapturedDecl *castFromDeclContext(const DeclContext *DC) { |
4423 | return static_cast<CapturedDecl *>(const_cast<DeclContext *>(DC)); |
4424 | } |
4425 | }; |
4426 | |
4427 | /// Describes a module import declaration, which makes the contents |
4428 | /// of the named module visible in the current translation unit. |
4429 | /// |
4430 | /// An import declaration imports the named module (or submodule). For example: |
4431 | /// \code |
4432 | /// @import std.vector; |
4433 | /// \endcode |
4434 | /// |
4435 | /// Import declarations can also be implicitly generated from |
4436 | /// \#include/\#import directives. |
4437 | class ImportDecl final : public Decl, |
4438 | llvm::TrailingObjects<ImportDecl, SourceLocation> { |
4439 | friend class ASTContext; |
4440 | friend class ASTDeclReader; |
4441 | friend class ASTReader; |
4442 | friend TrailingObjects; |
4443 | |
4444 | /// The imported module. |
4445 | Module *ImportedModule = nullptr; |
4446 | |
4447 | /// The next import in the list of imports local to the translation |
4448 | /// unit being parsed (not loaded from an AST file). |
4449 | /// |
4450 | /// Includes a bit that indicates whether we have source-location information |
4451 | /// for each identifier in the module name. |
4452 | /// |
4453 | /// When the bit is false, we only have a single source location for the |
4454 | /// end of the import declaration. |
4455 | llvm::PointerIntPair<ImportDecl *, 1, bool> NextLocalImportAndComplete; |
4456 | |
4457 | ImportDecl(DeclContext *DC, SourceLocation StartLoc, Module *Imported, |
4458 | ArrayRef<SourceLocation> IdentifierLocs); |
4459 | |
4460 | ImportDecl(DeclContext *DC, SourceLocation StartLoc, Module *Imported, |
4461 | SourceLocation EndLoc); |
4462 | |
4463 | ImportDecl(EmptyShell Empty) : Decl(Import, Empty) {} |
4464 | |
4465 | bool isImportComplete() const { return NextLocalImportAndComplete.getInt(); } |
4466 | |
4467 | void setImportComplete(bool C) { NextLocalImportAndComplete.setInt(C); } |
4468 | |
4469 | /// The next import in the list of imports local to the translation |
4470 | /// unit being parsed (not loaded from an AST file). |
4471 | ImportDecl *getNextLocalImport() const { |
4472 | return NextLocalImportAndComplete.getPointer(); |
4473 | } |
4474 | |
4475 | void setNextLocalImport(ImportDecl *Import) { |
4476 | NextLocalImportAndComplete.setPointer(Import); |
4477 | } |
4478 | |
4479 | public: |
4480 | /// Create a new module import declaration. |
4481 | static ImportDecl *Create(ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, |
4482 | SourceLocation StartLoc, Module *Imported, |
4483 | ArrayRef<SourceLocation> IdentifierLocs); |
4484 | |
4485 | /// Create a new module import declaration for an implicitly-generated |
4486 | /// import. |
4487 | static ImportDecl *CreateImplicit(ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, |
4488 | SourceLocation StartLoc, Module *Imported, |
4489 | SourceLocation EndLoc); |
4490 | |
4491 | /// Create a new, deserialized module import declaration. |
4492 | static ImportDecl *CreateDeserialized(ASTContext &C, unsigned ID, |
4493 | unsigned NumLocations); |
4494 | |
4495 | /// Retrieve the module that was imported by the import declaration. |
4496 | Module *getImportedModule() const { return ImportedModule; } |
4497 | |
4498 | /// Retrieves the locations of each of the identifiers that make up |
4499 | /// the complete module name in the import declaration. |
4500 | /// |
4501 | /// This will return an empty array if the locations of the individual |
4502 | /// identifiers aren't available. |
4503 | ArrayRef<SourceLocation> getIdentifierLocs() const; |
4504 | |
4505 | SourceRange getSourceRange() const override LLVM_READONLY__attribute__((__pure__)); |
4506 | |
4507 | static bool classof(const Decl *D) { return classofKind(D->getKind()); } |
4508 | static bool classofKind(Kind K) { return K == Import; } |
4509 | }; |
4510 | |
4511 | /// Represents a C++ Modules TS module export declaration. |
4512 | /// |
4513 | /// For example: |
4514 | /// \code |
4515 | /// export void foo(); |
4516 | /// \endcode |
4517 | class ExportDecl final : public Decl, public DeclContext { |
4518 | virtual void anchor(); |
4519 | |
4520 | private: |
4521 | friend class ASTDeclReader; |
4522 | |
4523 | /// The source location for the right brace (if valid). |
4524 | SourceLocation RBraceLoc; |
4525 | |
4526 | ExportDecl(DeclContext *DC, SourceLocation ExportLoc) |
4527 | : Decl(Export, DC, ExportLoc), DeclContext(Export), |
4528 | RBraceLoc(SourceLocation()) {} |
4529 | |
4530 | public: |
4531 | static ExportDecl *Create(ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, |
4532 | SourceLocation ExportLoc); |
4533 | static ExportDecl *CreateDeserialized(ASTContext &C, unsigned ID); |
4534 | |
4535 | SourceLocation getExportLoc() const { return getLocation(); } |
4536 | SourceLocation getRBraceLoc() const { return RBraceLoc; } |
4537 | void setRBraceLoc(SourceLocation L) { RBraceLoc = L; } |
4538 | |
4539 | bool hasBraces() const { return RBraceLoc.isValid(); } |
4540 | |
4541 | SourceLocation getEndLoc() const LLVM_READONLY__attribute__((__pure__)) { |
4542 | if (hasBraces()) |
4543 | return RBraceLoc; |
4544 | // No braces: get the end location of the (only) declaration in context |
4545 | // (if present). |
4546 | return decls_empty() ? getLocation() : decls_begin()->getEndLoc(); |
4547 | } |
4548 | |
4549 | SourceRange getSourceRange() const override LLVM_READONLY__attribute__((__pure__)) { |
4550 | return SourceRange(getLocation(), getEndLoc()); |
4551 | } |
4552 | |
4553 | static bool classof(const Decl *D) { return classofKind(D->getKind()); } |
4554 | static bool classofKind(Kind K) { return K == Export; } |
4555 | static DeclContext *castToDeclContext(const ExportDecl *D) { |
4556 | return static_cast<DeclContext *>(const_cast<ExportDecl*>(D)); |
4557 | } |
4558 | static ExportDecl *castFromDeclContext(const DeclContext *DC) { |
4559 | return static_cast<ExportDecl *>(const_cast<DeclContext*>(DC)); |
4560 | } |
4561 | }; |
4562 | |
4563 | /// Represents an empty-declaration. |
4564 | class EmptyDecl : public Decl { |
4565 | EmptyDecl(DeclContext *DC, SourceLocation L) : Decl(Empty, DC, L) {} |
4566 | |
4567 | virtual void anchor(); |
4568 | |
4569 | public: |
4570 | static EmptyDecl *Create(ASTContext &C, DeclContext *DC, |
4571 | SourceLocation L); |
4572 | static EmptyDecl *CreateDeserialized(ASTContext &C, unsigned ID); |
4573 | |
4574 | static bool classof(const Decl *D) { return classofKind(D->getKind()); } |
4575 | static bool classofKind(Kind K) { return K == Empty; } |
4576 | }; |
4577 | |
4578 | /// Insertion operator for diagnostics. This allows sending NamedDecl's |
4579 | /// into a diagnostic with <<. |
4580 | inline const StreamingDiagnostic &operator<<(const StreamingDiagnostic &PD, |
4581 | const NamedDecl *ND) { |
4582 | PD.AddTaggedVal(reinterpret_cast<intptr_t>(ND), |
4583 | DiagnosticsEngine::ak_nameddecl); |
4584 | return PD; |
4585 | } |
4586 | |
4587 | template<typename decl_type> |
4588 | void Redeclarable<decl_type>::setPreviousDecl(decl_type *PrevDecl) { |
4589 | // Note: This routine is implemented here because we need both NamedDecl |
4590 | // and Redeclarable to be defined. |
4591 | assert(RedeclLink.isFirst() &&((void)0) |
4592 | "setPreviousDecl on a decl already in a redeclaration chain")((void)0); |
4593 | |
4594 | if (PrevDecl) { |
4595 | // Point to previous. Make sure that this is actually the most recent |
4596 | // redeclaration, or we can build invalid chains. If the most recent |
4597 | // redeclaration is invalid, it won't be PrevDecl, but we want it anyway. |
4598 | First = PrevDecl->getFirstDecl(); |
4599 | assert(First->RedeclLink.isFirst() && "Expected first")((void)0); |
4600 | decl_type *MostRecent = First->getNextRedeclaration(); |
4601 | RedeclLink = PreviousDeclLink(cast<decl_type>(MostRecent)); |
4602 | |
4603 | // If the declaration was previously visible, a redeclaration of it remains |
4604 | // visible even if it wouldn't be visible by itself. |
4605 | static_cast<decl_type*>(this)->IdentifierNamespace |= |
4606 | MostRecent->getIdentifierNamespace() & |
4607 | (Decl::IDNS_Ordinary | Decl::IDNS_Tag | Decl::IDNS_Type); |
4608 | } else { |
4609 | // Make this first. |
4610 | First = static_cast<decl_type*>(this); |
4611 | } |
4612 | |
4613 | // First one will point to this one as latest. |
4614 | First->RedeclLink.setLatest(static_cast<decl_type*>(this)); |
4615 | |
4616 | assert(!isa<NamedDecl>(static_cast<decl_type*>(this)) ||((void)0) |
4617 | cast<NamedDecl>(static_cast<decl_type*>(this))->isLinkageValid())((void)0); |
4618 | } |
4619 | |
4620 | // Inline function definitions. |
4621 | |
4622 | /// Check if the given decl is complete. |
4623 | /// |
4624 | /// We use this function to break a cycle between the inline definitions in |
4625 | /// Type.h and Decl.h. |
4626 | inline bool IsEnumDeclComplete(EnumDecl *ED) { |
4627 | return ED->isComplete(); |
4628 | } |
4629 | |
4630 | /// Check if the given decl is scoped. |
4631 | /// |
4632 | /// We use this function to break a cycle between the inline definitions in |
4633 | /// Type.h and Decl.h. |
4634 | inline bool IsEnumDeclScoped(EnumDecl *ED) { |
4635 | return ED->isScoped(); |
4636 | } |
4637 | |
4638 | /// OpenMP variants are mangled early based on their OpenMP context selector. |
4639 | /// The new name looks likes this: |
4640 | /// <name> + OpenMPVariantManglingSeparatorStr + <mangled OpenMP context> |
4641 | static constexpr StringRef getOpenMPVariantManglingSeparatorStr() { |
4642 | return "$ompvariant"; |
4643 | } |
4644 | |
4645 | } // namespace clang |
4646 | |
4647 | #endif // LLVM_CLANG_AST_DECL_H |